JP2019048136A - Slot machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To enable a wide range of game property design by providing start and termination triggers of AT with characteristics during an advantageous section.SOLUTION: As shown in Figure (a), a slot machine includes, as RT (a game state) in which a lottery of a winning combination is executed, at least RT5 and RT2 with different winning probabilities of at least one replay winning combination. After termination of 1BB actuation, a game state is transferred to non-RT and, when a replay 01 is won in the non-RT, the game state becomes RT5 or AT. In the RT5 or AT, when 50 games are consumed, a termination condition of AT is satisfied, the game state is transferred to RT2, and both of the advantageous section and AT are terminated.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 60

Description

  The present invention relates to a slot machine provided with an advantageous section capable of executing an instruction function operating game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch.

  In the conventional slot machine, it is known to manage the AT with the main control board in addition to managing the AT with the sub control board (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2014-161344, A

Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section which is a game section capable of executing AT.
When such an advantageous section is provided, it becomes a problem at what timing to start the AT and at what timing to end the AT.
The problem to be solved by the present invention is to make it possible to design a wide range of game characteristics by providing a feature to the start and end timings of the instruction game section during the advantageous section.

The invention solves the above-mentioned problems by means of the following solutions (in parentheses, the structure of the corresponding embodiment is shown).
The invention according to the first claim of the present application corresponds to the first invention 11 among the first inventions 1 to 26 described later.
Invention of Claim 1 (5th Embodiment; FIG. 60 (a)) is:
A game (a game when a small winning combination B is won) having an advantageous operation mode (a correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an indication function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Of the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function activation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, the game has an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, and an instruction function operating game is always executed or an instruction gaming section (AT) with a high execution frequency.
Game control means for controlling the start and end of the advantageous section and the start and end of the command game section;
The game control means is provided with a role lottery means (61) for performing a lottery of roles.
The first lottery state (for example, RT5) and the second lottery state (for example, RT2) in which the winning probability of at least one replay player combination is different are provided as the lottery state (RT) in which the lottery of roles is performed by the role lottery means.
In the advantageous section and the first lottery state, the instruction game section can be executed,
In the instruction game section and the first lottery state, when transitioning to the second lottery state due to satisfying the predetermined condition (having digested 50 games), ending both the advantageous section and the instruction game section It features.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to start or end an advantageous section or an instruction game section in response to the transition of the lottery state. This enables a wide range of gameplay designs.

FIG. 18 is a block diagram showing an outline of control of the slot machine in the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows a storage number display LED, an advantageous section display LED, an acquisition number display LED, a settlement switch, and the like. It is a figure which shows the main control board accommodated in the board | substrate case, (a) shows Example 1, (b) shows Example 2. As shown in FIG. It is a figure explaining the detail of a digit and a segment. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement of a reel. It is a figure which shows the display window (transparent window) provided in the slot machine, the positional relationship of each reel, an effective line etc. It is a figure (1) which shows the kind of combination, the number of payouts, and the combination of a symbol. It is a figure (2) which shows the combination of the kind of part, the number of payouts, and a symbol. It is a figure (3) which shows the kind of combination, the number of payouts, and the combination of a symbol. It is a figure (4) which shows the combination of the kind of combination, the number of payouts, and a symbol. It is a figure (5) which shows the combination of the kind of part, the number of payouts, and a symbol. It is a figure (6) which shows the kind of combination, the number of payouts, and the combination of a symbol. It is a figure (1) which shows the relationship between a condition apparatus, its winning combination, and pushing order. It is a figure (2) which shows the relationship between a condition apparatus, its winning combination, and pushing order. It is a figure (3) which shows the relationship between a condition apparatus, its winning combination, and pushing order. It is a figure (4) which shows the relationship between a condition apparatus, its winning combination, and pushing order. It is a figure (1) which shows a numerical table. It is a figure (2) which shows a numerical table. It is a figure which shows a pushing order instruction | indication number table. It is a figure which shows the relationship of pushing order instruction | indication number, advantageous pushing order, and display content. It is a figure which shows a presentation group number table. It is a figure explaining transition of RT. It is a figure which shows the lighting process of the advantageous area display LED. It is a timing chart (example 1 and example 2) which shows a flow of processing of a main control board, acquisition number display LED, and an image display device. It is a timing chart (example 3 and example 4) which shows a flow of processing of a main control board, an acquisition number display LED, and an image display device. It is a figure which shows the flow of the display of pushing order instruction information by acquisition number display LED, and the alerting | reporting of the correct pushing order by an image display apparatus. It is a figure which is a part of RWM, and is a storage area regarding an advantageous section and the total number of games. It is a part of RWM, and is a figure showing the storage area about all the number of payouts. It is a part of RWM, and is a figure showing the storage area about the number of sheets paid out at the time of continuous bonus product activation. It is a part of RWM, and is a figure showing the storage area about the number-of-payouts at bonus game activation time. It is a figure (modification) which is a part of RWM, and shows the storage area about the number of sheets paid out at the time of continuous combination goods operation. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the processing which updates the number of times of games etc. using a register. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example 1 in step S109-S114 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example 2 in step S109-S114 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the example 3 in step S109-S114 of FIG. It is a flow chart which shows a flow of processing which updates the number of games etc., without using a register. It is a flow chart which shows a flow of calculation processing of an advantageous section rate. It is a figure explaining the information displayed on management information display LED. It is a figure which shows the example which displays management information on storage number display LED. It is a figure which shows the example which displays management information on acquisition number display LED. FIG. 3 is an external perspective view showing a base portion 1 of the slot machine 10; In 2nd Embodiment, it is a figure which shows the main control board | substrate accommodated in the board | substrate case, (a) shows Example 1, (b) shows Example 2. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the process (example 1) by the side of the main control board in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process (example 2) by the side of the main control board in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process (example 3) by the side of the main control board in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process (example 4) by the side of the main control board in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process (example 5) by the side of the main control board in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process (example 6) by the side of the main control board in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process (example 7) by the side of the main control board in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process (example 8) by the side of the main control board in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process (example 9) by the side of the main control board in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process (example 10) by the side of the main control board in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process (example 1) by the side of the sub control board in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process (example 2) by the side of the sub control board in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the image display example (example 1-example 4) of the image display apparatus by a sub control board regarding the addition in AT (3rd Embodiment). In 3rd Embodiment, it is a figure explaining increase of AT frequency | count of a game, change of an effect, etc. FIG. It is a time chart (example 1 and example 2) of the external signal in a 4th embodiment. It is a time chart (example 3) of the external signal in a 4th embodiment. It is a figure which shows RT transfer in Example 1 of 5th Embodiment. In 5th Embodiment, it is a time chart which shows the relationship between RT transfer and AT. It is a figure which shows Example 2 ((a)-(c)) of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows RT transfer in 6th Embodiment. In 6th Embodiment, it is a figure which shows the relationship between the kind of Replay D group drawn by RT3, a winning combination, and pushing order and a display combination. It is a time chart which shows Example 1 and Example 2 of 8th Embodiment. It is a time chart which shows Example 3 of an 8th embodiment. It is a time chart which shows example 4 and example 5 of an 8th embodiment. It is a figure explaining the flow of the game in 9th Embodiment. It is a time chart which shows Example 1 and Example 2 of 11th Embodiment. It is a time chart which shows Example 3 and Example 4 of 11th Embodiment. In 12th Embodiment, it is a time chart which shows ending production etc. It is a figure which shows number table (2) of 13th Embodiment. In 14th Embodiment, it is a time chart which shows extension of an advantageous section. In 15th Embodiment, it is a time chart which shows the relationship between an advantageous section and freeze.

In the present specification, the meanings of the terms are as follows.
"RT" means that the type (number) of the condition devices (1BB, replay, small part) to be drawn and its winning probability is unique, and "RT transition" means one of By shifting from one RT to another RT, it means that the winning probability of at least one condition device (for example, replay) to be selected for lottery changes. Therefore, the winning probability for each replay type in one RT is a value specific to that RT, and the winning probability for each replay type will be the same for one RT and the other RT. Absent. However, there is no problem that the sum of winning probability of replay becomes the same between one RT and the other RT.

The RT includes non-RT, RT1, RT2, RT3 and RT4 in this embodiment (FIG. 22 described later).
Note that “non-RT” does not mean that it is not included in the concept of RT, and is equivalent to “RT0”. Thus, the term "RT" as used herein includes non-RT.
In the present embodiment, the non-internal part is non-RT, RT1, RT2, or RT3 and the internal part is RT4. The types (numbers) of replays to be drawn by lottery and the winning probability thereof differ between inside and outside.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, 1BBA operation and 1BBB operation are provided as RTs during special game. In this embodiment, each of the 1BBA operation and the 1BBB operation performs at least one replay lottery.
The "combination" is a target of a lottery, and in the present embodiment, the condition device is drawn, and the condition device is set to include at least one combination. Therefore, when any condition device is won, at least one winning combination will be won (with at least one winning combination).

The condition device to be drawn has “subject condition device” that includes any of “special roles (roles)”, and “winning and replay condition device” that includes any of small part or replay. .
The item condition device includes any one of the special roles. When special roles are won, devices (SB (single bonus), RB (type 1 special role; regular bonus), CB (type 2 special role; challenge bonus), etc. that are devices for facilitating the winning of small roles, 1BB (type 1 continuous action device; type 1 big bonus), 2BB (second type continuous action device; type 2 big bonus) operate.

Here, the first-class product continuous operation device (1BB) refers to a device capable of operating the first-class special service (RB) continuously.
Similarly, a second-class continuous acting device (2BB) refers to a device capable of continuously operating a second-class special role (CB).
In this embodiment, only 1BB is provided as a special role, and has two types (1BBA and 1BBB) described later.
During the operation of 1BB, the RB ends when either of the two winning combinations or two games is satisfied, and after that, the RB is operated again on the condition that the end condition of the 1BB operation is not satisfied. .
Further, in the present embodiment, SB, CB, and 2BB are not provided.

On the other hand, the "winning and replay condition device" includes either a small winning combination or replay that does not carry over the winning information after the next game.
In the present embodiment, winning and replay condition device numbers “0” to “30” are provided.
On the other hand, the "item condition device" includes any of RB, 1BB and 2BB which can carry over the winning information after the next game and SB and CB which do not carry over the winning information after the next game. In the present embodiment, only 1BB (1BBA and 1BBB) capable of carrying the winning information after the next game is provided.

When winning a prize condition device that includes any of the special parts that can carry over the winning information after the next game, the special prize winning information until the combination of the symbols corresponding to the special part is stopped on the effective line Carry over to the next game.
Then, a game in which the winning condition information device including a special part that can carry over after the next game is not won is referred to as "non-internal". On the other hand, when the combination condition symbol device is won, but the combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination won is not yet stopped on the effective line, that is, "inside" the game carrying over the special combination winning information It is said. In the present embodiment, although the game winning the item condition device is included in “non-internal”, the game winning the item condition device may be included in “internal”.

  The “preferred operation mode” of the stop switch is an operation mode in which the player with a large number of payouts wins in a game where advantage / convenience occurs in the game result (combination of symbols stopped on the effective line) by the operation mode of the stop switch. Alternatively, it refers to an operation mode in which a player who does not shift (promotion) to an advantageous RT or does not shift (fall) to a disadvantageous RT wins. The "favorable operation mode" is also referred to as the correct operation mode.

The "operation mode" is a concept that indicates the pressing order of the stop switch and / or the operation timing (the timing at which the target symbol is pressed by the stop switch to stop on the effective line).
And, in the present embodiment, “a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch” is a game when a push order bell (small group B, small group C group) is won, double replay (replay B group, replay C group ) It corresponds to the game when winning.

Furthermore, the bell (small part) that wins when the stop switch is operated in the correct order in the correct order is selected when the push order bell is won, the number of payouts out of the bells of high eyed bells (small combinations of small wins). It may be referred to as a bell (small part) in which the combination of the symbols, such as the most small part, is displayed most advantageously to the player.
On the other hand, when the stop switch is operated in the incorrect push order when the push order bell is won, there are cases in which the low-angle bell wins and the case in which the winning combination occurs according to the operation timing of the stop switch. In the present embodiment, the stopped eyes (combination of symbols on the effective line, also referred to as "spilled eyes") displayed at the time of dropping of the role are referred to as "pattern symbols" in this embodiment, and have pattern symbols 01 to 03.

On the other hand, when replay replay is won (Replay B, Replay C), combinations of different symbols are stopped and displayed according to the pressing order of the stop switch, but no replay occurs when replay is won (PB = 1 described later) ").
In this case, a combination of symbols advantageous to the player, for example, a combination of symbols for transitioning to an RT having a higher probability of winning a replay, or a pressing order for stopping and displaying a combination of symbols for maintaining an RT having a high probability of winning a replay It is called "pushing order" or "promotion pushing order".
On the other hand, the press order in which the combination of symbols transitioning from a favorable RT (for example, a replay winning probability is high) to a disadvantageous RT (for example, a low replay winning probability) for the player is stopped is displayed. It is called "pushing order" or "falling (demotion) pushing order".

The "instruction function" means a function of displaying (notifying) the "advantage operation mode" described above to the player.
In other words, the "instruction function" refers to a device that facilitates winning. On the other hand, when the "instruction function" is a device for facilitating the winning of a small winning combination, the "instruction function" displays the correct push order for winning the correct push order (high-order bell) when the push order bell is won. Replay does not include displaying the order of pressing the correct answer for winning an advantageous replay (replay for transitioning to an advantageous RT, or replay for maintaining an advantageous RT) at the time of replay double winning.

In the following embodiment, the "instruction function" refers to the function of displaying the "advantage operation mode" to the player, and the "operation of the instruction function" is to display the correct push order when the push order bell is won. It is used in the sense that it includes both displaying the correct pressing order which wins the replay which is advantageous at the time of and replay replay winning combination.
In addition, showing "instructions" contents to the player is "display", and notifying the player of instruction contents is "notification". Therefore, the "instruction function" is also a "display function" and a "notification function".
Also, "instruction" is a concept having the meaning of "instruction", but the player is not charged any penalty even if he does not follow "instruction". However, if the correct pressing order displayed by the operation of the instruction function is not obeyed, the high order bell may not be won when the winning order bell is won, or the disadvantageous replay may be won when the replay duplicate is won.

In addition, the “instruction function operation game” is a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (a conditional device having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (small combination B group, small combination C group, replay B group, replay C Group game) means a game in which the instruction function is operated. For this reason, the instruction function operation game is one game. The instruction function operation game may be also referred to as a notification game.
Moreover, even if it is a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, when the instruction function is not activated, the game is not the instruction function operated game.

In the present embodiment, the “game section” includes the “normal section”, the “standby section”, and the “favorable section”.
First, the "normal section" refers to a signal relating to an instruction function, specifically, a pressing order instruction number to be described later, winning and replay condition device number (information capable of determining the correct pressing order), peripheral substrates (for example, It refers to a game section that prohibits transmission to a substrate), and does not affect the performance related to the instruction function at all (does not operate the instruction function). However, in addition to the lottery of the condition device (combination), it is possible to determine whether or not to shift to the advantageous section (lottery, etc.).
In the normal section, the indication function can not be activated, so that pressing order indication information can not be displayed on a predetermined display device (such as an LED) electrically connected to the main control board. Since such a signal is not transmitted to the peripheral substrate, display (notification) of an advantageous operation mode can not be performed by the image display device electrically connected to the sub control substrate described later.

When making a transition decision to an advantageous section in a normal section, it is necessary to make a transition decision in association with a winning conditional device (association).
Here, to determine the transition to the advantageous section in association with the condition apparatus that has won means to decide whether or not to shift to the advantageous section simultaneously with the drawing of the conditional apparatus, and to have won the specific condition apparatus. The case where the lottery of whether or not to shift to the advantageous section on the condition of is separately performed may be mentioned.

  In the present embodiment, at the same time as the drawing of the condition device, it is set to determine whether to shift to the advantageous section. Further, the length (the number of games) of the advantageous section to be determined (winning) differs depending on the condition device that has won. For example, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section when winning in 1BB which will be described later, when it is counted as the initial value after the end of the 1BB game, it becomes an advantageous section of 50 games, and it wins the small winning combination E1 alone. When it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, there is a case where it becomes the advantageous section only to execute one indication function operation game (except for the game winning the small winning combination C group, the replay B group and the replay C group). is there.

Furthermore, when determining the transition to the advantageous section in association with the condition apparatus that has won, the conditional apparatus that can be determined to shift to the advantageous section (when performing lottery for whether to shift to the advantageous section separately The condition device serving as the condition for performing the lottery is set so as to satisfy the condition device that the winning probability does not have the setting difference.
Here, the “set value” is to determine the player's degree of advantage, and the higher the set value (or the lower the set value), the more advantageous it is for the player (the expected value of the payout is higher). ) Is set. For example, six levels of setting 1 to setting 6 are provided as setting values.
And "the condition device which does not have a setting difference in the winning probability (setting common)" refers to a condition device in which the winning probability is the same in all the settings.

  It should be noted that it is only possible to determine the transition to the advantageous section in association with the winning of the condition device having no setting difference in the winning probability, and at the time of winning the condition device having no setting difference in the winning probability. It does not mean that you should always shift to the advantageous section, or you must always draw the transition to the advantageous section. It is of course possible not to make any decision regarding the advantageous section even when the condition device is selected with no setting difference in the selection probability.

  On the other hand, "a conditional device having a setting difference in the winning probability (by setting)" indicates that the winning probability is not the same for all settings. For example, in addition to the case where the winning probability is different among all the setting values, the winning probability of one of the setting values is different from the winning probability of another one of the setting values (for example, the winning probability of setting 1 to setting 5) Is “x”, and the winning probability of setting 6 is “y (≠ x)”.

Further, the "advantage zone" is a game zone having a performance related to the instruction function (which may operate the instruction function). Specifically, when the instruction function is operated, the instruction content in the main control board This refers to a game section which can transmit a signal relating to an instruction function to the sub control board only when the pressing order instruction information is displayed so that (advantage operation mode) can be identified. The game during the advantageous section may also be referred to as a notification-enabled game. Conversely, the game during the normal section or the game during the standby section may be referred to as a notification impossible game.
However, the sub control board can not output an instruction content issued by the main control board or an effect contrary to the received signal relating to the instruction function.

  And, in the advantageous section of this embodiment, it is possible to obtain the maximum payout number ("9") corresponding to the specified number ("3") in the game (when the character is inactive) capable of executing the instruction function operation game. In a game in which a condition device (small part B group) having an advantageous operation mode is won, at least one game or more is performed to instruct the operation mode of the stop switch in which the part (small part 01) related to the maximum payout number wins It is necessary.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, a small winning combination B group and a small winning combination C group are provided as a so-called pushing order bell condition device.
In the small combination B group, the small combination 01, which is a nine-piece combination, always wins when the pressing order is correct, and when the pressing order is incorrect, the one-piece combination can be won (may be dropped).
On the other hand, in the small winning combination C group, the small winning combination 02, which is the three winning combination, always wins when the pressing order is correct, and the single winning combination always wins when the pressing order is incorrect.

And, the game when executing the indication function operation game is at the time of bonus non-operation (normal game), the specified number (the number of medals to be inserted) in this normal game is "3".
Furthermore, the maximum payout number when the specified number is “3” is “9” (at the time of the small winning combination 01).
For this reason, in the advantageous section of the present embodiment, the correct pressing order for winning the small winning combination 01 is achieved by activating the instruction function when the condition device (small winning combination B group) in which the small winning combination 01 can be won It is necessary to execute at least one game to be displayed.

In addition, during the advantageous section, in the game in which the condition device having the advantageous operation mode is won, the indication function may be always operated to display the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch.
On the other hand, even in the advantageous section, even if the game is won in the condition device having the advantageous operation mode, it does not matter if the indication function is not activated.

Furthermore, the "standby section" refers to a game section when it has not been shifted to the advantageous section after deciding to shift to the advantageous section. The waiting section may or may not be provided. That is, the normal section may shift to the advantageous section, or the normal section may shift to the standby section, and the standby section may shift to the advantageous section. Note that it is not possible to shift from the advantageous section to the standby section, and always shifts to the normal section after the advantageous section ends. The standby section can be shifted only when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of the condition device that includes the special part that can be carried over after the next game, and corresponds to the special part You must finish by all means in the game where the combination of the symbols is displayed. Of course, it may be finished before the game in which the combination of symbols corresponding to the special part is displayed.
Further, in the standby section, it is not possible to activate the indication function in the main control board or to transmit a signal relating to the indication function to the sub control board. In the case where the instruction function is activated in the main control board and a signal related to the instruction function is transmitted to the sub control board, it is a condition that it is in an advantageous section.

In the advantageous section of this embodiment, the case of executing a single command function operation game (except for the game winning the small winning combination C group, the replay B group and the replay C group) and the case of executing the predetermined number of games Have.
In an advantageous section in which a predetermined number of games are executed, when the condition device having the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is won, the instruction function is basically operated.
In addition, the termination condition of the advantageous section is not to determine the number of games described above, for example, a lottery is performed at a predetermined timing, and the advantageous section is terminated when the lottery is won, etc. May be

Alternatively, just by shifting to the advantageous section, the execution condition of the instruction function operation game is not satisfied, and it is determined by lottery or the like whether or not the instruction function operational game is to be executed under the condition that it is in the advantageous section. When it is determined to execute the command function operation game, the command function operation game may be executed until a predetermined end condition is satisfied.
In addition, during the advantageous section, it is determined (lottery, etc.) whether or not the (remaining) number of games of the advantageous section is to be added (added).
In addition, the upper limit game frequency is defined in the advantageous zone, and when the upper limit game frequency is reached, the advantageous zone is always ended at that point even if it has the remaining game frequency of the advantageous zone (limiter ), Shift to the normal section.

  Furthermore, when the upper limit game number is reached, the condition device (small part B group) having an advantageous operation mode capable of acquiring the maximum payout number ("9" sheets) may not have been won even once. Even if the combination (small part 01) related to the maximum payout number does not indicate the operation mode of the stop switch to be won at one time, it always ends the advantageous section at that point (the operation of the limiter), Transfer to the section.

As described above, although the content partially overlaps with the above, the advantageous section in this embodiment is defined as follows.
a) In the normal section, the lottery whether to shift to the advantageous section (even when determined simultaneously with the drawing of the condition device) must be linked to the condition device having no setting difference. That is, the transition probability to the advantageous section should not differ according to the set value.
b) The addition lottery for the advantageous section (even if it is determined without drawing) should not refer to the set value. When adding an advantageous section based on the condition device that has won, it is necessary to link to a condition device that does not have a setting difference.

c) Special role in the regular section (means special role to carry over the winning. The same shall apply in this paragraph below.) Inside or during the special role operation, the transfer lot drawing of the advantageous section (also determined simultaneously with the drawing of the condition device Do not go). In addition, within the special role, even during the advantageous section, it is not allowed to carry out the lottery for the addition of the advantageous section. Furthermore, when the special equipment is selected and the special equipment is activated during the special equipment, the special equipment is selected, and the special area additional lottery is performed while the special equipment is in operation. Do not go too.
Here, conventionally, since it was common to perform the AT lottery even after becoming inside, even if becoming inside, without waiting for a special part to win, while keeping inside, waiting for AT winning It was possible. However, in recent years, it has been considered desirable not to play AT's lottery inside. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the special role is won in the normal section and the inside becomes inside, it is determined that the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section can not be made in the inside. Furthermore, when the special role is won during the advantageous section and the inside becomes inside, it is determined that the advantageous section should not be added inside.

d) When it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, in principle, it is shifted from the next game to the advantageous section, and until the advantageous section starts (in the present embodiment, it is determined that the next game bet is possible) In the next game, it is necessary to indicate to the player that it is an advantageous section from the next game (such as lighting of a lamp indicating that it is an advantageous section).
Here, in the prior art, it is common for a certain number of times of games to be consumed (by passing a sign) after the AT is won after the AT is won after the AT is won. The Also, for example, when drawing the AT based on the winning of the role of rare, if the player plays the role of rare in the game, the player is elected to the role of rare and that the AT is drawn based on the role of the rare. Even if the player wins the AT by winning the rare character, the player may stop the game before the AT is notified. After that, when another person played a game on that platform, there was a problem that the other person might enjoy the benefit of AT (the previous player has contributed). However, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, in principle, it is indicated that it is the advantageous section from the next game until the advantageous section starts (in the present embodiment, until the bet of the next game becomes possible). Therefore, the above problems do not occur.
As described above, conventionally, the AT winning is notified after the AT winning (in particular, after passing through the precursor of the AT), whereas in the present embodiment, in principle, the next game bet is possible until it becomes possible. It is different in that it indicates that it is an advantageous section before the advantageous section is started.
Furthermore, although the notification of the conventional AT winning is only performed as a part of the effect, it is displayed to the player that it is an advantageous section from the next game in the present embodiment (a lamp showing an advantageous section And the like) is different in that it is performed to solve the above problem.

Further, the advantageous section ratio refers to the ratio of staying in the advantageous section with respect to all the game sections (the normal section + the waiting section + the advantageous section). Specifically, for example, when the number of games played in all the game sections is "1000" and the number of games played in the advantageous section therebetween is "700", the advantageous section percentage is "70%".
Note that, as described later, in the present embodiment, an advantageous segment ratio is displayed, but the displayed advantageous segment ratio is a numerical value obtained by rounding off the decimal part as a result of calculation.

The draw-in rate (PB) is the probability that the desired pattern to be stopped on the active line can be stopped on the effective line from the moment the stop switch is operated to the time the reel stops. Show.
Then, if the stop switch is not operated at an appropriate reel position (at an operation timing at which the target symbol can be stopped on the active line within the range of the maximum number of moving symbols), the target symbol is stopped on the active line (up to the active line The fact that it can not be pulled in is referred to as "PB (retraction rate) ≠ 1".
On the other hand, regardless of the position of the reel at the moment the stop switch is operated (regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch), the target symbol can always be stopped (pulled in) to the effective line. It is called "1".

And "PB = 1" has a case where all reels are such and a case where it is so only for a specific (partial) reel.
In the present embodiment, the maximum moving number of frames is set to "4", and when the target symbols are arranged at an interval of 5 symbols or less, "PB = 1" and more than 5 symbols (6 symbols or more) When arranged at intervals, "PB ≠ 1". In particular, the number of symbols of the reel according to the present embodiment is set to "20", and if four symbols are arranged at intervals of 5 symbols, the symbol is "PB = 1".

If the game proceeds with "N-1" game, "N" game, "N + 1" game, ... ("N" is an integer of 2 or more), the current game is "N" When it is an eye, the "N" game is referred to as the "current game". Also, the game of the "N-1" game eye is referred to as the "previous game".
On the other hand, the game of the “N + 1” game eye is referred to as “next game”.

"Displacement rate" is a value calculated by medal payout number expected value / medal insertion number, and when it is "1", it is a current maintenance state, and when it exceeds "1", medals increase. In the state, when it is less than "1", the medal is in the state of decreasing.
Further, the “expected value for the number of medals paid out” is calculated as the sum of “probability of winning the winning combination × number of paid out” for all the winning combinations to be drawn in the game.

  Furthermore, the "difference number" is a value calculated by "the number of medals paid out (the number of medals actually paid out or the expected number of medals paid out)-the number of inserted medals". When the medal insertion number is “3”, if the medal payout number (expected value) is “3”, the difference number is “± 0”, and if the medal payout number (expected value) exceeds “3”, When the difference number exceeds “0” and the medal payout number (expected value) is less than “3”, the difference number is less than “0”.

"Bet" means betting on medals (game media) to play a game. In the present embodiment, the number of bets that can be played (prescribed number) is set to 3 at the time when the bonus is not in operation (during normal game). On the other hand, while the bonus (1BB) is in operation, the number of bets (prescribed number) available for playing is set to two. In order to bet medals, the actual medals are maintained from the medal insertion port, or the bet switch is operated to bet on the stored medals.
In the present embodiment, the “gaming medium” is a medal, but in the case of, for example, an enclosed type gaming machine, electronic information is used as the gaming medium. For example, when money (banknote) is inserted into the lending machine, "electronic information" is converted into electronic information corresponding to the money, and part or all of the electronic information is played on the gaming machine Can be stored in a game machine as a game medium for performing the game.
In addition, since it is possible to apply to not only the slot machine but also the ball and ball game machine about the display of the feature ratio etc which will be mentioned later, not only the medal but also the game ball is included in the "gaming medium". Be

  Unlike the above-mentioned "bet", "reserved" refers to crediting a medal inside the slot machine 10. Although "storage" may be used in a meaning including a bet, in the present specification, when "storage" is used, it is used in a meaning not including a "bet". In the present embodiment, the maximum (limit) number of sheets that can be stored is set to “50” regardless of the gaming state or the like. When the small part wins and the medal is paid out, the medal is stored. In addition, when the medals have been placed in maintenance through the medal insertion slot, when the maximum number has been bet, the inserted medals are stored. Therefore, when the medals are placed on the medal insertion slot, there is a case in which the bet is placed and a case in which the medals are stored.

  Note that the slot machine 10 "pays out" the medals to the player is equivalent to the player "gains" the medals. Therefore, in the viewpoint of the slot machine 10, it is "payout of medals", and in the viewpoint of the player, it is "acquisition of medals". For this reason, there are cases where it is called "payout (number of sheets)" (for example, the payout means 67) and when it is called "acquired (number of sheets)" (for example, the number-of-earnings display LED 78).

In the present specification, a numerical value with “B” at the end (especially, 8 bits) means a binary number. Similarly, a number with an "H" at the end means a hexadecimal number. Specifically, for example, a numerical value indicating "16" in decimal is described as "00010000 (B)" in binary, and is described as "10 (H)" in hexadecimal. Moreover, about the numerical value which means a decimal number, it describes with "16 (D)" as needed.
However, when it is clear which of the binary number, the decimal number, and the hexadecimal number is clear, the end symbols of "B", "D" and "H" may be omitted.

Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings and the like.
First Embodiment
FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing an outline of control of the slot machine 10 in the present embodiment.
A main control board 50 and a sub control board 80 are provided as representative control boards provided in the slot machine 10.
The main control board 50 has an input port 51 and an output port 52, and includes the RWM 53, the ROM 54, the main CPU 55, and the like (not meant to include only those illustrated in FIG. 1).

In FIG. 1, the main control board 50 and peripheral devices for game progression including operation switches such as the bet switch 40 are electrically connected via the input port 51 or the output port 52. The input port 51 is a connection unit to which a signal such as an operation switch is input, and the output port 52 is a connection unit to transmit a signal to peripheral devices such as the motor 32.
In FIG. 1, peripheral devices for input are indicated by arrows directing signals from the peripheral devices to the main control board 50, and peripheral devices for output are arrows indicated from the main control board 50 to the peripheral devices. (The same applies to the sub control board 80).

The RWM 53 is a storage medium capable of storing (updating) various data (variables) based on the progress of a game or the like. Data (total number of games, etc.) necessary for displaying management information described later is stored in the RWM 53.
The ROM 54 is a storage medium for storing programs and various data (for example, data tables) necessary for the progress of the game.

The main CPU 55 refers to a CPU provided on the main control board 50, executes programs necessary for the progress of the game, performs calculations, etc. Specifically, lottery of the winning combination, drive control of the reel 31, and winning time To pay out, etc.
The main CPU 55 incorporates a register. In particular, in the present embodiment, a plurality of registers (for example, A register to L register, transmission register, etc.) are provided.

Further, on the main control board 50, an RWM 53, a ROM 54, an MPU including a main CPU 55, and a register are mounted. The RWM 53 and the ROM 54 may be provided outside as well as those mounted inside the MPU.
An MPU including an RWM 83, a ROM 84, and a sub CPU 85 is mounted on a sub control board 80 described later. The RWM 83 and the ROM 84 may be provided outside as well as those mounted inside the MPU.

In FIG. 1, the medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 43 is sent to the inside of the medal selector.
As shown in FIG. 1, the medal selector includes (but is not limited to) a passage sensor 43a, a blocker 45, and an insertion sensor 44, and is electrically connected to the main control board 50.
When a medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot 43, it is first detected by the passage sensor 43a.

  Furthermore, a blocker 45 is provided downstream of the passage sensor 43a. The blocker 45 is for permitting / disapproving the insertion of medals, and forms a medal passage for returning medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 43 from the payout opening when medal insertion is not permitted. Do. On the other hand, when the insertion of medals is permitted, a medal passage for guiding the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 43 to the hopper 35 is formed.

  Here, the blocker 45 prohibits the insertion of the medal during the game (from the start of the rotation of the reel 31 to the stop of all the reels 31 and until the end of the payout corresponding to the winning combination when the combination is won). Do. That is, the blocker 45 permits the medals to be inserted at least when no game is played.

  A feed sensor 44 (a plurality of optical sensors) is provided on the further downstream side of the blocker 45. Therefore, after the medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 43 is detected by the passage sensor 43a, the medal is further detected by the insertion sensor 44.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 1, the main control board 50 has a bet switch 40, a start switch 41, (left, middle, right) stop switches 42, and a settlement switch 46 as electric switches operated by the player. Connected.
The bet switch 40 (40a or 40b) is a switch operated by the player when betting the stored medals for the current game. In this embodiment, a 1-bed switch 40a for inserting one medal and a 3-bed switch 40b for inserting three (maximum number or prescribed number) medals are provided.
In addition, you may provide not only this but the bet switch for 2 bets.

  In addition, although the specified number of this embodiment is set to three when the bonus is not in operation and two when the bonus is in operation, two medals when the 1-bed switch 40a is operated twice (pressed). Can be inserted, and when it is operated (pressed) three times, three medals can be inserted. In addition, while the prize is in operation, by operating the 3 bet switch 40b, it is possible to insert two (prescribed number) medals at a time.

The start switch 41 is a switch operated by the player when starting the reels 31 (all for left, middle and right).
Furthermore, three stop switches 42 are provided corresponding to the three (left, middle and right) reels 31, and are switches operated by the player when stopping the corresponding reels 31.
Further, the settlement switch 46 is a switch operated by the player when paying out (payout) medals bet and / or stored (credited) inside the slot machine 10.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a display substrate 75 is electrically connected to the main control substrate 50. In practice, a relay board is provided between the main control board 50 and the display board 75, and the main control board 50 and the relay board, and the relay board and the display board 75 are connected, as shown in the figure. In 1, the illustration of the relay board is omitted. As described above, the main control substrate 50 and the display substrate 75 may be directly connected by a harness or the like, but another substrate may be interposed between the two.
Furthermore, the control boards are not limited to being directly connected by a harness or the like, and may be connected via another separate board (relay board or the like). For example, one or more other substrates (relay substrate or the like) may be interposed between the main control substrate 50 and the sub control substrate 80.

  On the display substrate 75, a storage number display LED 76, an advantageous section display LED 77, and an acquisition number display LED 78 are mounted. These LEDs 76 to 78 are provided in the vicinity of the operation switch operated by the player, and are provided at a position where the player can always visually recognize. It is not necessary to provide all the LEDs 76 to 78 on one display substrate 75. For example, a plurality of display substrates 75 such as the display substrates 75A, 75B,. It is sufficient if any of the LEDs 76 to 78 are provided.

FIG. 2 shows the actual positional relationship (arrangement) of the storage number display LED 76, the advantageous section display LED 77, the acquisition number display LED 78, the settlement switch 46, the 1-bed switch 40a, and the 3-bed switch 40b on the front side of the slot machine 10. It is a top view.
Further, in FIG. 2, a display substrate 75 (indicated by a dotted line in FIG. 2) is disposed under the storage number display LED 76, the advantageous section display LED 77, and the acquisition number display LED 78 and inside the slot machine 10. ing.

The storage number display LED 76 is an LED for displaying the number of medals stored in the slot machine 10, and is composed of a digit 1 for displaying the upper digit and a digit 2 for displaying the lower digit. That is, the storage number display LED 76 displays two digits.
Here, “digit” means a display unit (display), and in the present embodiment, in particular, it comprises a seven-segment LED (so-called 7-segment) and a segment DP (decimal point; dot-like LED for displaying a decimal point) It is done.
As shown in FIG. 2, the number of digits mounted on the display substrate 75 is four of the digits 1 to 4, but in the present embodiment, nine digits are provided, and the other digits are the main control substrate It is mounted on the 60 (details will be described later).

The storage number display LED 76 displays the number of medals stored, and in the present embodiment, displays a number between “00” and “50” (integer).
For example, when no medals are betted and stored, the display of the stored number display LED 76 is “00”. Here, when one medal is maintained, the one medal is bet for the game. When two more cards are additionally inserted, three medals are bet for the game (in the case where the specified number is three). Therefore, when the number of medals that have been maintained is three, the medal is bet and is not stored. When the medals are further maintained, the medals are stored in the slot machine 10, and the number of stored medals is displayed by the stored number display LED 76.

  In the present embodiment, up to 50 medals can be stored. Therefore, when the number of stored sheets reaches 50 (when "50" is displayed on the stored number display LED 76), no more medals are stored. In this state, temporarily, when the medals are treated from the medal insertion slot 43, the medals that have been kept by the blocker 45 are returned from the payout slot.

  Here, when a combination with a medal payout (except for replay) is won and medals corresponding to that combination are paid out, priority is given to the inside of the slot machine 10 over the actual payout of medals from the payout opening. Medals are stored. For example, in the case where the number of stored sheets before the winning combination is “10”, when the nine-piece winning combination is won, the display of the stored number display LED 76 is updated from “10” to “19”.

  Furthermore, when the number of stored sheets exceeds “50” at the time of winning of the winning combination, the amount exceeding “50” is actually paid out from the payout port. For example, when the number of stored pieces is “47” before winning a winning combination, and nine medals are paid out by winning a combination of 9 winnings, 3 pieces are stored, the number of stored pieces becomes “50”, and “50” is exceeded. About six pieces are paid out from the payout opening.

  Furthermore, at the time of winning a replay, storage and payout of medals are not performed, and the number of medals betted in the game is automatically betted for replay. For example, when the player plays the game with 3 bets (3 sheets) and a replay is won, 3 medals are automatically betted. And, since the automatic bet based on the replay winning is the insertion of the medal for performing the re-game, the medal can not be settled even if the settlement (return) operation is performed thereafter.

  In the "rules related to the authorization of the gaming machine and the verification of the type (hereinafter simply referred to as" rule ")", when the combination of symbols corresponding to the replay has stopped on the effective line, the condition device It is interpreted that it is an operation and not a "winning". However, in the present application (this specification and the like), Replay is also treated as one of the roles (Replay Role), and the fact that the combination of symbols corresponding to Replay has stopped on the effective line is referred to as "Replay win".

  Further, the advantageous section display LED 77 is constituted by the segment DP of the digit 2. The advantageous section display LED 77 is controlled to be turned off in the normal section and the standby section, but is controlled to be lit during the advantageous section. Therefore, if the player confirms the on / off state of the advantageous section display LED 77, it can judge at a glance whether or not the player is currently staying in the advantageous section.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 2, the advantageous section display LED 77 is located in the vicinity of the settlement switch 46. Therefore, when ending the game, the player operates the settlement switch 46 when having a stored medal (for example, when "10" is displayed on the stored number display LED 76), but at that time, It can be easily confirmed by the extinguished state of the advantageous section display LED 77 that the advantageous section is not in progress. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when it is determined to shift to the advantageous section, in principle, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on before the settlement switch 46 becomes operable. This makes it possible to prevent the player from ending the game contrary to the player's will, despite being in the advantageous section (or from the next game to the advantageous section).

Furthermore, the number-of-earnings display LED 78 is an LED for displaying the number of payouts (the number of players who have won) when winning a winning combination, and is composed of a digit 3 for displaying the upper digit and a digit 4 for displaying the lower digit. ing. Therefore, similarly to the storage number display LED 76, the acquisition number display LED 78 displays 2 digits.
When there are no medals to be paid out, the number-of-earnings display LED 78 is "00". However, for example, when nine medals are paid out and nine medals are paid out, the display of the number-of-earnings display LED 78 is It changes from "00" to "09".
The acquisition number display LED 78 may be controlled to be turned off when there is no medal to be paid out. Alternatively, the upper digit (digit 3) may be turned off and only the lower digit (digit 4) may be displayed as "0".

Moreover, although the acquisition number display LED 78 normally displays the acquisition number, it functions as an LED that displays the content (type) of the error when an error occurs. For example, when the front door of the slot machine 10 is opened and a door open error is detected, an acquisition number display LED 78 displays an error number “dE”.
Furthermore, the acquisition number display LED 78 functions as an LED for displaying an advantageous operation mode (push order instruction information) when the instruction function is activated. Therefore, the acquisition number display LED 78 in the present embodiment is an LED that doubles as an acquisition number, an error content, and an advantageous operation mode display by the operation of the indication function. The notification of the advantageous push order when the instruction function is activated is also performed by the image display device 23 connected to the sub control substrate 80.

Here, in the present specification, the display of the push order using the acquired number display LED 78 by the main control board 50 is referred to as “operation of the instruction function”, and the display of the push order by the sub control board 80 is “notification of push order”. It is called.
Further, as shown in FIG. 20 described later, a number corresponding to an advantageous push order is referred to as a “push order instruction number”.
Furthermore, it is the pushing order displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 by the operation of the instructing function, and information such as “= 1” in FIG. 20, for example, is referred to as “pushing order instruction information”. That is, pressing order instruction information is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 by the operation of the instruction function.

FIG. 3 is a plan view showing other digits (digits 5 to 9) mounted on the main control board 50. As shown in FIG. In FIG. 3, (a) shows Example 1, and (b) shows Example 2.
The main control substrate 50 is housed in a transparent substrate case 16 and sealed in terms of security. Then, the main control board 50 can not be accessed (the board case 16 can not be opened) unless the caulking portion 16a of the board case 16 is broken. In FIG. 3, the main control boards 50 (50A and 50B) are illustrated as seen through without being blocked by the board case 16. The caulking portion 16a may also be referred to as a sealing member.

On the substrate case 16 are affixed stickers that show the certification of the main control substrate 50, the serial number, the unsealing record of the caulking portion 16a, etc. Digits 5 to 9 are mounted on the main control board 50 so as not to occur.
The digit 5 is a setting value display LED 73, and is an LED for displaying the current setting value at the time of setting confirmation or setting change. The set value display LED 73 does not necessarily have to be mounted on the main control board 50, and can be used also as, for example, the back side of the front door, the storage number display LED 76 or the acquisition number display LED 78.

Digits 6 to 9 are management information display LEDs 74. The management information display LED 74 is, for example, in FIG. 3 (a) for one digit housing in order to secure its visibility.
It is preferable to design to a size of width m1 × length nn36 square millimeters. Alternatively, when the management information display LED 74 is a single horizontally long (width m2) digit housing,
It is preferable to design to a size of width m2 × length n = 4 (number of digits) 3636 square millimeters.

In FIG. 3, in the example 1 of (a), the number of the main control board 50 is one, but the present invention is not limited thereto. As in the example 2 of (b) And each substrate may be connected by a harness or the like. However, even if the main control substrate 50 is formed of a plurality of separate substrates, it is necessary to entirely enclose the main control substrate 50 in the substrate case 16 and seal it.
In the example of FIG. 3B, the main control boards 50 are two main control boards 50A and 50B, connectors are provided on the main control boards 50A and 50B, respectively, and the connectors are connected by a harness. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a connector capable of directly connecting the main control boards 50A and 50B may be used, and the harness may not be used (the same applies to FIG. 42B described later).
The set value display LED 73 is provided on the main control board 50A side, but the management information display LED 74 is mounted on the main control board 50B. That is, the main control board 50B doubles as a display board for mounting the management information display LED 74.

  Furthermore, the management information display LED 74 arranges, for example, the digits 6 and 7 in the upper one row as in the example 2 of (b), in addition to the case of making one row as shown in the example 1 of (a). , Digits 8 and 9 may be arranged in the lower row.

FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the relationship between the digits 1 to 9, the segments A to G, and the segment DP.
As described above, each digit is composed of seven rod-like segments A to G and one dot-like segment DP, and so-called seven segments are composed of segments A to G (seven). .

As shown in FIG. 4, for example, of the digit 1, segments A to G constitute 7 segments of the upper digit of the storage number display LED 76, and the segment DP is unused.
Further, among the digits 2, segments A to G constitute 7 segments of the lower digit of the storage number display LED 76, and the segment DP is used as the advantageous segment display LED 77.
Furthermore, each segment A to G of the digits 3 and 4 constitutes 7 segments of the upper digit and the lower digit of the acquisition number display LED 78, respectively, and the segment DP is unused.

Further, of the digits 5, the segments A to G constitute 7 segments of the setting value display LED 73, and the segment DP is an LED which lights up during the setting change. That is, of the set value display LEDs 73, when only 7 segments are on, it indicates that the setting is being confirmed, and when the 7 segments and the segment DP are on, the setting is being changed. The segment DP of the setting value display LED 73 is not necessarily limited to such usage. For example, the segment DP of the setting value display LED 73 may be a segment that lights up when the setting value is determined during setting change.

  Segments 6 to 9 constitute a management information display LED 74, and segments 6 and 7 display information types in the management information. Also, segments 8 and 9 display numerical values corresponding to the information type displayed in segments 6 and 7 among the management information. Segment DP of digits 6 to 9 is unused. However, when the management information display LED 74 is turned on, it is also possible to turn on the segment DP of the digit 7. Further, by turning on the segment DP of the digit 7, the boundaries between the digits 6 and 7 indicating the information type and the digits 8 and 9 indicating the numerical value can be clarified to facilitate confirmation.

Further, FIG. 4 shows the configuration of segment data. For example, when the digit 1 displays “0”, the segments A to F are turned on and the segments G and DP are turned off, so that the segment data is “00111111 (B)”.
Further, when the digit 2 displays "1" and the segment B, C, and DP are turned on when the segment is in the advantageous section, the segment data is "10000110 (B)". That is, by setting the most significant bit (eighth bit) of the segment data of the digit 2 to "0" or "1", the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off or lit. Thus, by determining whether the eighth bit of the segment data of the digit 2 is “0” or “1”, it can be determined whether or not it is in the advantageous section.

In FIG. 1, the motor 32 of the symbol display device and the like are electrically connected to the main control board 50.
The symbol display device includes reels (three in the present embodiment) for displaying symbols, a motor 32 for driving each of the reels 31, and a reel sensor 33 for detecting the position of the reels 31.

  The motor 32 is for rotating the reels 31, is connected to the rotation center of each of the reels 31, and is controlled by the reel control means 65 described later. Here, the reel 31 is composed of the left reel 31, the middle reel 31, and the right reel 31, and when the stop switch 42 operated to stop the left reel 31 is the left stop switch 42, the middle reel 31 is stopped. The stop switch 42 to be operated is the middle stop switch 42, and the stop switch 42 operated to stop the right reel 31 is the right stop switch 42.

The reel 31 has a ring shape, and a reel tape on which a plurality of types of symbols (designs constituting a combination of symbols corresponding to a combination) are printed is attached to the outer peripheral surface thereof. The specific arrangement of the symbols on the reel 31 will be described later.
Further, each reel 31 is provided with one (or two or more) indexes. The index is provided in a convex shape, for example, on the circumferential side surface of the reel 31 and is used to detect whether the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position, whether it has made one rotation, or the like. Each index is detected by the reel sensor 33. The signal of the reel sensor 33 is electrically connected to the main control board 50. Then, when the index detects (turns off) the reel sensor 33, the input signal is input to the main control board 50, and it is detected that the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position.

  Further, the symbol on the reference position at the moment when the reel sensor 33 detects the index of the reel 31 is stored in the ROM 54 in advance. Thereby, the pattern on the reference position at the moment when the index is detected can be detected.

Further, a medal payout device is electrically connected to the main control board 50. The medal payout device includes a hopper 35 for storing medals, a hopper motor 36 which is driven when the medals of the hopper 35 are paid out from the payout port, and a payout for detecting the medals paid out from the hopper motor 36. A sensor 37 is provided.

The medals, which are maintained and accepted from the medal insertion slot 43, are formed to be accommodated in the hopper 35 through a predetermined passage (also referred to as a "shoot portion").
The payout sensor 37 is a pair of optical sensors arranged at a predetermined distance, and is configured to be detected by the other payout sensor 37 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the medal is detected by one payout sensor 37. It is done. Then, based on the timing when each of the pair of payout sensors 37 is turned on / off, it is determined whether or not the medals have been correctly dispensed.

For example, when the signals from both of the payout sensors 37 are off even though the hopper motor 36 is driven, it is determined that the medal is not paid out, and the hopper error (no medal) is detected. Be done.
On the other hand, when at least one of the signals of the payout sensor 37 remains on, it is detected that a medal jam has occurred.

The power switch 11 is a switch that turns on / off the power of the slot machine 10.
The setting key switch 12 is a switch that is turned on when the setting key is inserted from the setting key insertion port and rotated right 90 degrees (clockwise), and is turned on at the time of setting confirmation or setting change.

  The setting switch 13 is a switch operated when changing the setting value. For example, every time the setting is changed, the setting value is incremented by one. In the present embodiment, setting values have setting 1 to setting 6, and during setting change, each time the setting switch 13 is operated, the setting value is “1” → “2” →... →→ “6” → It changes with "1" →. In addition, any setting value is displayed during the setting change, and when the start switch 41 is operated, the displayed setting value is decided.

Further, when the power switch 11 is turned on while turning on this switch, the reset switch 14 is reset, that is, initialization processing is performed, and predetermined data stored in the RWM 53 is cleared.
The door switch 15 is a switch that is turned on when the front door (not shown) of the slot machine 10 is opened, and is for detecting the open / close state of the front door.

Furthermore, an external signal (outer end signal) to the external concentrated terminal plate 100 is output from part of the output port 52.
Here, the “external signal” is a signal for outputting to the outside of the slot machine 10 (hole computer 200, data counter installed in a hole, etc.) via the external concentrated terminal plate 100. In the present embodiment, the external signal (1BB signal, RB signal, advantageous period signal), an external signal indicating that an error or a power failure has occurred in the slot machine 10 and the like, and the opening of the front door of the slot machine 10 are shown. An external signal, a medal insertion signal, a medal payout signal, etc. are provided.

In FIG. 1, the sub control board 80 controls selection, output, and the like of effects (information) during game play and game standby.
Here, the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 are electrically connected, and the main control board 50 (control command transmission means 71 described later) is unidirectionally connected to the sub control board 80 by parallel communication. Sends information (control command) necessary for output of presentation.
The main control substrate 50 and the sub control substrate 80 are not limited to being electrically connected, but may be connections using optical communication means. Further, both of the electrical connection and the optical communication connection are not limited to parallel communication, but may be serial communication, and serial communication and parallel communication may be used in combination.

Similar to the main control board 50, the sub control board 80 includes an input port 81, an output port 82, an RWM 83, a ROM 84, a sub CPU 85, and the like.
The sub control board 80 is electrically connected to effect peripheral devices such as the following effect lamps 21 as shown in FIG. 1 via the input port 81 or the output port 82. However, peripheral devices for presentation are not limited to these.
The RWM 83 is a storage medium capable of temporarily storing data acquired when the sub CPU 85 controls an effect.
Further, the ROM 84 is a storage medium for storing a program for performing a lottery relating to an effect, various data, and the like as effect data.

  The effect lamp 21 is, for example, an LED or the like, and lights up in a predetermined pattern when a predetermined condition is satisfied. In addition, the effect lamp 21 is a back lamp for illuminating the symbols displayed on the reel 31 (three symbols continuous in the vertical direction seen from the display window 17) disposed on the inner peripheral side of each reel 31 from behind, the reel 31 A fluorescent lamp for illuminating the symbols on the reels 31 from the top of the frame, a frame lamp arranged on the front door of the slot machine 10 and blinking at the time of winning of the winning combination and the like are included.

In addition, the speaker 22 outputs a predetermined sound when a predetermined condition is satisfied in order to perform various effects during the game.
Furthermore, the image display device 23 includes a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, a dot display and the like, and various effect images (a correct pressing order, an effect corresponding to a lottery result of the condition device, etc.) Game information (such as the number of times of game operation and the number of games acquired during a bonus operation or an advantageous section) is displayed.
In addition, the cross key 24 and the menu button 25 change various settings when displaying information intended by the player (including a two-dimensional code that is a player's game history) or a hole manager (such as a store manager). It is used when you

Subsequently, a combination of symbols and combinations of the present embodiment will be described.
FIG. 5 is a view showing a symbol arrangement of the reels 31 in the present embodiment. In FIG. 5, symbol numbers are shown together. For example, in the left reel 31, the symbol of symbol number 0 is "bell A".
As shown in FIG. 5, in the present embodiment, each reel 31 is equally divided into 20 frames, and a predetermined symbol is displayed on each frame.
In addition, in the figure, "blank" does not mean that a symbol is not displayed at all, but a predetermined symbol corresponding to "blank" is displayed.
In addition, although "bell A", "bell B", and "bell C" are patterns whose appearances are similar, they are respectively different patterns.

6A shows the positional relationship between the display windows (transparent windows) 17 provided on the front door (front door; not shown) of the slot machine 10 and the respective reels 31 and the effective lines (symbols (Display line for displaying a combination).
Three reels (left reel 31, middle reel 31, and right reel 31) are provided in parallel in the lateral direction in the present embodiment. Furthermore, each reel 31 is arranged so that three designs which are continuous in the vertical direction can be seen from the display window 17. Therefore, the display window 1 of the slot machine 10
A total of nine symbols (pieces) are arranged to be visible from 7 onwards. The numbers at the lower right of each symbol indicate the symbol number.

Moreover, FIG. 6 (B) has shown the admiration of the symbol position in this specification. In this specification, the symbol position at the time of stopping visible from the display window 17 is referred to as “upper stage”, “middle stage”, and “lower stage” in order from top to bottom for each reel 31. , “Left middle stage”, “lower left stage”.
Furthermore, as shown to FIG. 6 (A), the effective line is set with respect to nine patterns seen from the display window 17. FIG.

  Here, the "effective line" is a line of symbols at the time of stopping the reel 31, and is a symbol combination line (display line) for forming a combination of symbols, and of the symbol corresponding to any one of the roles. When the combination is stopped on the line, it is a line that wins the part. In this embodiment, one effective line ("lower left stage"-"middle middle stage"-straight line passing through "upper right stage") is defined, and all other symbol combination lines become invalid lines. There is.

  An invalid line is a line which is not set as an effective line among symbol combination lines, and even if a combination of symbols corresponding to any of the symbols is stopped at that line, the provision of a profit according to the combination It is a line that does not pay out medals, etc. That is, an invalid line is a line which is not a formation object of a combination of symbols from the beginning.

  Also, conventionally, slot machines having different numbers of valid lines according to the number of medals inserted are known. For example, when the number of medals inserted is one, the number of valid lines is one when the number of medals inserted is three, and when the number of medals inserted is three, the number of effective lines is five. And the like. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, three or two medals are inserted to play a game, and one game shown in FIG. 6A becomes an effective line in all the games. There is no change in the number of valid lines due to the number of medals inserted. Therefore, in the present specification, the term "effective line" refers to the line shown in FIG.

  FIGS. 7 to 12 are diagrams showing combinations of symbol types, types of payouts, etc., and combinations in the present embodiment (combinations etc. included in the condition device selected by the combination lottery means 61 described later). In FIG. 12, pattern symbols 01 to 03 are shown as combinations of symbols displayed when the winning combination is missed, although they are not winning combinations, although they are winning the specific condition device (numbers "101" to "120").

The roles in this embodiment are roughly classified into special roles, replays (replay roles), and small roles.
A combination of symbols corresponding to each combination and the number of payouts at the time of winning are determined. When all the reels 31 are stopped, a combination of symbols corresponding to one of the combinations is stopped on the active line (the combination of winnings is the same). The number of medals corresponding to the combination is paid out.
However, the payout number at the time of winning of the special part is set to zero. Also, in replay, medals are automatically inserted (replay).

  In FIG. 7 to FIG. 12, "the prescribed number 3" displayed on the number of payouts, etc. indicates the number of payouts, etc. when the prescribed number is 3 (when the bonus is inactive, ie, the number of inserted coins in normal game) , “The prescribed number 2” indicates the number of payouts and the like when the prescribed number is 2 (the number of inserted items during bonus game operation, ie, during special game). For example, Replay 01 of the number "3" indicates that the prescribed number of three will be replayed, and the prescribed number of two "-" indicates that the lottery is not made.

In FIG. 7, numbers "1" and "2" correspond to special roles (features). In the present embodiment, only 1BB is provided as a special role, and 1BB has two types (1BBA and 1BBB).
The special part is a part to shift from the normal game to the special game.
When the player wins 1BB, there is no payout of medals in the current game, but the next game is transferred to the 1BB game corresponding to the special game (action of a bonus).
It is an advantageous game for the player who can expect medals to be won more than when the bonus item is inoperative by setting the payout rate to "1" or more during the 1BB game (when the bonus item is in operation). .

Also, Replay (replay role) is a role that enables replay with maintaining the number of medals inserted in the current game (automatic bet on medals).
The replay according to the present embodiment includes replays 01 to 06 (numbers “3” to “13”) as shown in FIG.
Replays 02 and 03 are replays that are to be transferred to another RT when winning in a particular RT. Therefore, these replays are also referred to as transitional replays.

More specifically, when Replay 02 is won in RT2, the game is shifted to RT3 (RT that is advantageous to the player) from the next game. For this reason, Replay 02 is also referred to as promotion Replay.
In addition, when Replay 03 is won in RT3, the next game is shifted to RT2 (RT which is more disadvantageous to the player than RTs up to that time). For this reason, Replay 03 is also referred to as fall (relegation) replay.

  Replays 04 and 05 are first used as control replays aiming to increase the number of types of conditional devices by winning a plurality of replays in duplicate, and in the present embodiment, among the conditional devices to be described later, Replay included in Replay B2, B3, C2, C3 or E. When the player wins the replay B2, B3, C2 or C3, the replay 04 or 05 as the control replay is not stopped at the effective line.

Furthermore, Replays 04 and 05 are secondly used as rear play, and included in Replay E of the condition device described later. When Replay E is won during the advantageous section, the addition of the advantageous section is executed. In addition, the addition lottery may be performed instead of the addition.
Also, Replay 06 is a Replay that is drawn during the 1BB operation, and is included in Replay D of the condition device described later. When Replay D in the advantageous section is won, the addition of the advantageous section is executed. In addition, the addition lottery may be performed instead of the addition.

Further, the small winning combination, as shown in FIG. 7 to FIG. The small roles 01 and 02 are small roles (small roles corresponding to high-pitched bells) to be won when the correct answer is made when the correct bell is selected as described later. Further, the small winning combination 03 to 34 is a small winning combination (a small winning combination corresponding to a low bell) which can be won (PB ≠ 1) at the time of incorrect release at the time of winning bell selection.
Furthermore, the minors 35 to 38 are rare minors (a minor corresponding to watermelon or cherry).
Furthermore, the minors 39 and 40 are minors that can be won only when the specified number is two, that is, when the bonus is activated.

The pattern symbols 01 to 03, as described above, are not the part itself but appear when the winning combination is missed (when the winning combination is not won) when the pushing order is incorrect when the pushing order is elected. It is a combination of symbols. Furthermore, in the pattern pattern, when the combination of the symbols is stopped at the effective line in a specific RT (in this embodiment, non-RT, RT1 or RT3), the RT is shifted (in this embodiment, it is shifted to RT2) It is a combination. In this embodiment, pattern symbols 01 to 03 are always made to appear when the winning combination is missed (when the winning combination is not won) when the winning combination is incorrect when the small winning combination B is won. However, other symbol combinations (not the role itself) may appear.

In each role mentioned above, when the combination of symbols corresponding to the role does not stop on the activated line in the game won by the role, the role carried over after the next game and the role not carried over are defined. .
The part carried over is 1BB in the present embodiment. When the player wins 1BB, it is controlled to carry over the winning information of 1BB after the next game in the game until 1BB wins.

  On the other hand, the 1BB winning is carried over, but the minors and replays other than 1BB are not carried over. In the lottery of the condition device, when the small winning combination or the replay is won, the winning combination becomes effective only in the current game, and the winning is not carried over after the next game. That is, in the game in which these roles have been won, the reel 31 is stop-controlled so that the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning roles can be won, but regardless of the presence or absence of the winning combination, at the end of the game , The right concerning the winning combination disappears.

  When starting the game, the player inserts the medals stored in advance by the operation of the bet switch 40 (reserved bet), or the maintenance insertion of the medals from the medal insertion slot 43 (cared bed). When the start switch 41 is operated with the defined number of medals bet, a signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 50. When the main control board 50 (specifically, the reel control means 65 to be described later) receives this signal, the main control board 50 performs lottery of the roles by the role lottery means 61 and drives and controls all the motors 32 to obtain all reels. Control 31 to rotate. In this manner, the reel 31 is rotated by the motor 32, whereby the design on the reel 31 is moved and displayed up and down in the display window 17 at a predetermined speed.

  Then, the player presses the stop switch 42 to stop the rotation of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 (for example, the left reel 31 corresponding to the left stop switch 42). When the stop switch 42 is operated, a signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 50. When the main control board 50 (specifically, the reel control means 65 described later) receives this signal, the main control board 50 drives and controls the motor 32 corresponding to the stop switch 42 to correspond to the lottery result of the combination lottery unit 61 As described above, stop control of the reel 31 related to the motor 32 is performed.

  Then, the game result of the current game is displayed by the combination of the symbols when all the reels 31 stop. Furthermore, when the combination of symbols corresponding to any one of the winning combinations is stopped on the active line (when the winning combination is achieved), payout of medals corresponding to the winning combination is performed.

Next, the specific configuration of the main control board 50 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 1, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes the following role lottery means 61 and the like. The following means in the present embodiment are illustrative, and the present invention is not limited to the means shown in the present embodiment.

The role lottery means 61 performs lottery (determination, selection) of the condition device (winning combination). Therefore, the role lottery means 61 is also referred to as a condition device determination (lottery or selection) means, a winning combination determination (lottery or selection) means, or the like.
In addition, “the winning of the condition device” is also referred to as a winning lottery result, a lottery result, a winning number, a winning result, and the like.

  The role lottery means 61 is based on, for example, random number generation means for lottery (hardware random number etc.), random number extraction means for extracting random numbers generated by the random number generation means, and random number values extracted by the random number extraction means. And a determination unit that determines whether or not the condition device has been won and the condition device that has won the condition device.

  The random number generation means generates a random number in a predetermined area (for example, “0” to “65535” in decimal). The random number is, for example, a random number in which a counter that counts 1 in 200 n (nano) sec continues counting as 1 cycle in the range of “0” to “65535”, and while the slot machine 10 is powered on Keep counting.

  The random number extraction means extracts the random number generated by the random number generation means when the start switch 41 is operated (turned on) by the player in the present embodiment at a predetermined time. The determination means collates the random number value extracted by the random number extraction means with a condition device lottery table described later to determine the condition device corresponding to the area to which the random number value belongs. For example, when the extracted random number value belongs to the area of winning and replay condition device number "1" (replay A), it is determined that replay A is won.

13 to 16 are diagrams showing the types of condition devices to be randomly selected by the combination lottery means 61 and the contents of the winning combinations included in the respective condition devices.
In the following description, the description of the condition device is mainly made, and the details of the stop control of the reel 31 based on the pushing order of the stop switch 42 and the operation timing at the time of winning each condition device are explained by the reel control means 65. Do.

As described above, the condition device according to the present embodiment does not carry over the winning information to the next game, "the item condition device" which is a condition device including any of the special roles capable of carrying over the winning information to the next game. It consists of a "winning and replay condition device" which is a conditional device that includes either a small winning combination or a replay.
The winning of the item condition device corresponds to the winning of 1BB in the present embodiment, and includes the item condition device numbers “1” and “2”.
The feature condition device number "0" corresponds to the non-winning of the special role, the feature condition device number "1" corresponds to the winning of 1BBA, and the feature condition device number "2" is the winning of 1BBB. Equivalent to.

Also, for example, when Replay A is won, the item condition device number is “0”, and the winning and replay condition device number is “1”.
On the other hand, when the 1BBA alone is won, the item condition device number is “1”, and the winning and replay condition device number is “0”.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, there is a case in which 1BB and the small winning combination will be double winning, for example, when 1BBA and the small winning combination D are double winning, the item condition device number is “1”, winning and replay condition device number Will be "26".
When 1BB and the small winning combination or the replay are dually won, the winning combination of the small winning combination or the replay is prioritized in the current game (the priority can be set arbitrarily). Further, since the winning of the small winning combination or the replay is effective only in the current game, it is not carried over to the next game, but the 1BB winning information is carried over to the next game unless it is a prize.

Hereinafter, the winning and replay condition device will be described.
The condition device number “0” corresponds to the non-winning of the part (so-called lost).
Also, Replay A of the condition device number “1” is a single win of Replay 01. When Replay A is won, Replay 01 wins in any pressing order (in any pressing order).

Replays B1 to B3 of condition device numbers “2” to “4” (hereinafter collectively referred to as “replay B group”), replays C1 to C3 of condition device numbers “5” to “7” (hereinafter generically referred to) Each “Replay C Group” is a double winning of multiple types of Replays, and is a double winning including at least one of Replay 01 or 02. Then, according to the pressing order of the stop switch 42, the type of replay to be won is set to be different.
For example, in the replay B1 of the condition device number "2", the replay 02 wins in the pushing order of the left first stop, and the replay 01 wins other than the left first stop (middle or right first stop).

In addition, in the case of repeated replay winning, since the replay (replay role) is won in any pushing order, there is no concept of high / low eye on payout of medals and the like. However, for example, when the player wins the replay B1 in RT2, the RT is promoted (transition from RT2 to RT3) by winning the replay 02 in the left first stop. On the other hand, except for the left first stop, RT2 is maintained by winning a replay 01.
In addition, when the player wins the replay C1 in RT3, the RT1 is maintained by winning the replay 01 in the first left stop. On the other hand, except for the left first stop, RT is made to fall (demotion) (transition from RT3 to RT2) by winning a replay 03.

The replay D with the condition device number “8” is a single replay 06 replay. When Replay D is won, Replay 06 wins in any order.
Similarly, Replay E of the condition device number “9” is a duplicate winning of Replay 04 and 05. When Replay E is won, Replay 04 or 05 wins in any order. These replays 04 and 05 have a role as rear play. In the present embodiment, in particular, when the lottery is made at RT1 and the replay E is won during the RT1 and the advantageous section, the advantageous section is added. In addition, the addition lottery may be performed instead of the addition.

In FIG. 14, the small winning combination A of the condition device number “10” is a so-called common bell, and the small winning combination 01 is a single winning. When the small winning combination A is won, the small winning combination 01 always wins (PB = 1) regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42.
Also, in FIG. 14 to FIG. 15, the small roles B1 to B12 of the condition device numbers "11" to "22" (hereinafter collectively referred to as "small group B group") correspond to so-called push order bells , And a small winning combination 01 including at least one of nine small bells (nine bells, nine winning combinations) and a small winning combination 03 to 34 (one winning combination).

  When these condition devices are won, according to the pressing order of the stop switch 42, when it is the correct pressing order, a small winning combination 01 having a high eye bell (9 bells and 9 prizes) with "PB = 1" is won. On the other hand, when the order is incorrect, according to the operation timing of the stop switch 42 (the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated), the small part 03 which is a low bell (one sheet) There is a case where .about.34 wins and a case where none of the small winning combination wins (when a pattern symbol is displayed due to dropping).

In FIG. 16, the small roles C1 to C3 (hereinafter collectively referred to as "small group C group") of the condition device numbers "23" to "25" are so-called pressed as in the small group B group described above. It corresponds to a forward bell, and is a double winning including a small part 02 (three bells, three sheets) and a small part 03 to 10 (one sheet).
When these condition devices are won, according to the pressing order of the stop switch 42, when it is the correct pressing order, the small winning combination 02 having a high eye bell (three bells and three wins) with "PB = 1" is won. On the other hand, in the case of incorrect release order, one of the small prizes 03 to 10, which is a low-order bell (one-piece winning combination), is won with "PB = 1". Therefore, when winning the small winning combination C group, unlike when winning the small winning combination B group, there is no case where the pattern symbol is displayed (dropped). In addition, you may have the case where not only this but any small part wins.

At the time of winning the small part B group, it will be paid out nine sheets at the time of winning the high bell, so when it is the correct order of pressing, there will be three in (insertion number) and nine out (disbursed number), the difference in this game The number is "+6". Therefore, when the pushing order is correct, the number of medals increases, and when the pushing order is incorrect (the number of payouts is one or zero), the medal device decreases.
On the other hand, in the small part C group, since 3 payouts will be made when the high bell is won, 3 ins (number of inserted sheets) and 3 out (number of paid outs) will be obtained in the present game The difference number of is “± 0”. Therefore, at the time of correct pressing, the number of medals is maintained as it is, and at the time of incorrect answering of the pressing order (the number of payouts is one), it becomes a condition device in which the number of medals decreases.

  As described above, the reason for providing both the pushing order bell which gives out 9 sheets in the correct pushing order and the pushing order bell which gives out 3 sheets is for adjusting the payout rate. In particular, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14 and FIG. 15, at the time of pressing order incorrect at the time of winning the small winning combination B group, the probability of winning one winning combination is 25%, and the other 75% is a pattern symbol Is set to be displayed (no payout at the time of pattern symbol display). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 16, when the winning combination of the small winning combination C group is incorrect, one winning combination is made with "PB = 1". In this way, by providing two types of push order bells with different payout numbers depending on the push order correct answer time and the incorrect answer time, and by appropriately setting the winning probability, it is possible to set the payout rate to an appropriate range. become.

The minor role D of the condition device number "26" corresponds to the rare minor role (watermelon). The small role D is a single winning of the small portion 35, and is set to "PB」 1 ".
Further, the small combination E1 of the condition device number "27" and the small combination E2 of the condition device number "28" correspond to the rare small combination (cherry) similarly to the small combination D1. The small combination E1 is a double combination of the small combinations 36 and 38, and the small combination E2 is a double combination including the small combination 37 in addition to the small combinations 36 and 38 described above. When the small winning combination E1 or E2 is won, the two-piece winning combination (small winning combination 36 or 38) is won regardless of the pushing order.

The small combination F of the condition device number “29” is a combination to be drawn only during 1BB operation (1BB game), and is a double winning of the small combinations 01 to 39. When the small winning combination F is won, the small winning combination 39, which is a 10-piece winning combination, wins with “PB = 1”.
The small combination G with the condition device number "30" is a combination to be drawn only during 1BB operation (1BB game), and the small combination 40 is a single winning. When the small winning combination G is won, the small winning combination 40, which is a nine-piece winning combination, wins with "PB = 1".

  FIGS. 17 and 18 show the winning probability defined by the lottery table when the lottery of the condition device is performed by the role lottery means 61, and shows the number of item condition devices and winning and replay condition devices for each RT. FIG. If the numerical value shown in FIG.17 and FIG.18 is divided by "65536", it will become a winning probability. For example, in the non-RT and any of RT1 to RT3, the prefix number for 1 BBA is set to “20” and “10” (total of “30”). Therefore, the single winning probability of 1BBA is "30/65536".

FIG. 17 is a table of number tables of condition devices which can be determined to shift to the common setting and the advantageous section, or which can execute the addition of the advantageous section (or perform the additional drawing).
Here, "setting common" indicates that there is no setting difference, that is, setting 1 to setting 6 have the same value.
Then, when the condition device common to the setting is won, it may always be decided to shift to the advantageous section (it is decided to be added during the advantageous section), or whether or not to shift to the advantageous section ( During the advantageous section, it may be determined by lottery. Alternatively, a conditional device that decides to shift to the advantageous section (decides to add during the advantageous segment) and a conditional device that decides not to shift to the advantageous section (decides to not add to the advantageous segment) You may provide.

In the present embodiment, the condition device common to settings shown in FIG. 17 is provided with a condition device which decides to shift to the advantageous section and a condition device which decides not to shift to the advantageous section. Furthermore, during the advantageous section, it is always set as a condition device that decides to add the advantageous section.
In FIG. 17, in the normal section, “o” means deciding to shift to the advantageous section, and “x” means deciding not to shift to the advantageous section. In addition, in the advantageous section, “Δ” means to determine to add the advantageous section, and “x” means to determine to not add the advantageous section.
In FIG. 17, “o” is determined to shift to the advantageous section, and “Δ” is determined to add the advantageous section, but not limited to this, “o” is It means to draw lots whether or not to shift to the advantageous section, and “Δ” may mean to draw whether or not to add the advantageous section.

Further, FIG. 18 shows a condition device and its number which are not determined to shift to the advantageous section, and are not determined to add the advantageous section.
In the present embodiment, the condition device for deciding to shift to the advantageous section or deciding to add the advantageous section is limited to the winning of the condition apparatus shown in FIG. In the case of winning, none of them decide to shift to the advantageous section, nor decide to add the advantageous section.
In FIG. 18, although the setting numbers of setting 1 and setting 6 are representatively illustrated, in practice, as described above, the setting value has six stages of setting 1 to setting 6, and setting There is a fixed number for each value.

In FIG. 17 and FIG. 18, since the conditional devices including 1BBA or 1BBB are drawn only in the non-inside, they are drawn by non-RT, RT1 to RT3. Further, 1BBA and 1BBB have a single winning case and a double winning case with a small player D, E1 or E2. On the other hand, the small role D, E1 or E2 has a single winning case. The conditional device including 1BBA or 1BBB drawn at RT4 is treated as a single winning of the small part D, E1 or E2. Therefore, the storage number for single winning combination of small part D in RT4 is “580” to “585” in total, and the storage number for single winning combination in small part E1 in RT4 is “1030” in total, The suffixes for single winning of the small winning combination E2 in RT4 are “310” to “370” in total.
Also, 1 BBB is set to the winning combination when the conditional device having the setting difference is won, and it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of 1 BBB, or to decide to add the advantageous section. There is nothing to do.

Also, Replay D is drawn only during 1BB operation. Furthermore, Replay E is drawn only at RT1. Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, after the end of the operation of 1 BBB, it shifts to RT1. Then, when the replay E is won in this RT1, the advantageous section is added (limited to the advantageous section). Therefore, in order to set so as not to appear in other RTs, a lottery for replay E is made only at RT1.
Furthermore, the small roles D and E1 are drawn only when the character is inactive and not when the character is active.
On the other hand, the small roles F and G are not drawn at the time of the non-operation of the item, but are drawn only at the time of the operation of the item.

  Further, in FIG. 17, although the sum of the number of single winning of 1BBA is “30”, in this embodiment, the number “20” determined to shift to the advantageous section in the normal section and the advantageous section It is divided into a unit number "10" which decides not to shift. That is, in the case where the single winning of 1 BBA is made, if the number of “20” is won, when the game is a normal section, the advantageous section is simultaneously won. On the other hand, in the case where the single BBA is won, if it is elected to the number "10", it will be non-winning of the advantageous section.

In addition, when a single BBA is won during the advantageous section, it is determined that the advantageous section is to be added to either of the units "20" and "10".
Similarly, although the combination number for the single winning combination E1 is "1000" in total, in the present embodiment, the combination interval "250" determined to shift to the advantageous interval in the normal interval and the advantageous interval It is divided into "750" which is decided not to shift to

The present invention is not limited to this, and the single winning combination number of the small combination E1 is set to one number “1000” (not divided into the number “250” and the number “750”), and when winning the small combination E1. Alternatively, whether or not to shift to the advantageous section may be determined by lottery separately. For example, it may be decided to shift to the advantageous segment with a probability of 25% and not decided to transition to the advantageous segment with a probability of 75%. As described above, although it is possible to provide a unit number to be elected to the advantageous section from the beginning and a unit number not to be elected to the advantageous section, the unit number itself is one value, and when elected to that unit number, transition to the advantageous section You may make it perform the lottery (two-step lottery) of whether to do or not.
Further, as described above, in this embodiment, when RT4 (inside), it is not determined to shift to the advantageous section, and the advantageous section is not added. Therefore, even at the time of winning the small part D or E1, when it is RT4, it is not decided to shift to the advantageous section, and the advantageous section is not added ("* 3" in FIG. 17). .

In FIG. 18, when the single winning of 1 BBB and the double winning of 1 BBB and the small winning combination D are achieved, the determination regarding the advantageous section is not performed. However, as described later, after the completion of the operation of 1BBB (after the transition to RT1), an opportunity to add an advantageous section is provided.
The small role E2 has a case of double winning with 1BBB and a case of single winning, but neither makes a decision regarding the advantageous section. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 17, when the small winning combination E1 is won, the determination regarding the advantageous section may be made in both the single winning combination of the small winning combination E1 and the double winning combination with 1BBA.

Also, as shown in FIG. 18, each condition device of Replay A, Replay B group, and Replay C group is common in setting, but it is not decided to shift to the advantageous section, and is added in the advantageous section. I do not decide.
However, the present invention is not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, it is decided to shift to an advantageous section (including a lottery) or to add an advantageous section (including a lottery) when the condition device of these replays is won. ) May be provided. Alternatively, in FIG. 18, in the Replay A, Replay B group, and Replay C group, the setting numbers are slightly different between Setting 1 and Setting 6 (for example, “1” is different), Replay A, Replay B Group, The Replay C group may be set separately.

  In FIG. 18, Replay A is drawn at all RTs when the character is inactive. Also, the replay B1 group is drawn only at RT2. Furthermore, Replay C group is drawn only at RT3. The small combination A, the small combination B group, and the small combination C group all have setting differences between setting 1 and setting 6, but the setting numbers are the same in all RTs.

Further, as shown in the table of “special role and small role” in FIG. 18, in the setting 1 and the setting 6, the winning probability of 1 BB and the small role is set higher in the setting 6. Therefore, in this respect, setting 6 is more advantageous than setting 1.
Furthermore, as shown in the "Replay" table, the winning probability of replay is the highest at RT3. And, in the advantageous section, because it is basically set to stay at RT3, not only increase the medals by the operation of the instruction function at the time of winning bell order, it will be a gaming state with a small reduction of medals by replay winning .

Further, the small combination A, the small combination B group, and the small combination C group are all set in the condition device having the setting difference. Here, the digit number difference between setting 1 and setting 6 of the small winning combination A is “250”, and the digit number difference between setting 1 and setting 6 of the small winning combination B group (whole) is “240 (20 × 12) ". Therefore, the small role A has a larger difference in unit number than the small role B group. As a result, by setting the number of small combination A having no prize difference according to the pushing order to a larger value, it is possible to reliably provide the difference in the payout rate according to the set value.
In addition, since the combination of symbols that can be won when winning a small winning combination A and the combination of symbols that can be won when the pressing combination is correct when winning a small winning combination B group are set the same (described later) The setting value can not be estimated by counting the number of winnings (winnings) of.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 18, the probability of winning in the small winning combination B group is set higher than the probability of winning in the small winning combination C group. Here, the maximum payout number is 9 when the prescribed number is 3, and during the advantageous section, the number of payouts is 9 (maximum payout number with 3 prescribed numbers) at least one of the indicated function operating games. Need to run once. Therefore, in the advantageous section, it is necessary to execute the instruction function activation game at least once when the small winning combination B is won. Therefore, by setting the winning probability of the small winning combination B group to be higher than the winning probability of the small winning combination C group, one-time instruction function operation game (small winning combination C, replay B, replay C) is won Can be reduced the expected number of times of the game in the advantageous section ending only with the played game). Furthermore, despite the fact that the game has been played a predetermined number of times, although it is an advantageous section, it is less likely that the advantageous section can not be ended because it has never won a small winning combination B during the predetermined number of times. be able to.

The explanation is returned to FIG.
The winning flag control unit 62 controls on / off of the winning flag corresponding to each combination based on the lottery result by the combination lottery unit 61. In the present embodiment, a winning flag is provided for each role for all roles. Then, when one of the condition devices is won in the lottery by the combination lottery means 61, the winning flag of the combination included in the condition device is turned on (a winning flag is set).

For example, in a non-internal game, when the player wins the replay B1, the two winning flags of Replay 01 and Replay 02 included in the condition device are turned on, and the winning flags of the other roles are turned off.
Similarly, in a non-internal medium game, when winning a small combination B1, the small combination 01, the small combination 03, the small combination 10, the small combination 11, the small combination 18, the small combination 19 and the small combination included in the condition device The seven winning flags of the role 26 are on, and the winning flags of the other roles are off.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, since the winnings of small winnings other than 1BB and replays are not carried over, even if the winnings for small playings or replays are made in the game this time and the winning flags of these playings are turned on, the game ends Sometimes the winning flag is turned off.
On the other hand, since the 1BB win is carried over, when the 1BB wins in the game this time and the win flag related to the 1BB won is once turned on, the on state is maintained until the 1BB wins, It will be turned off when 1BB wins.

  In addition, for example, when 1BBA and the small winning combination D are won by the combination lottery means 61, the winning flag of the small winning combination 35 corresponding to the 1BBA and the small winning combination D is turned on, and there is no case that both the combination wins in the game. Therefore, for example, when 1 BBA does not win, the on flag of 1 BBA is maintained and the win flag of small bonus 35 is turned off, regardless of whether or not the small winning combination 35 has or has not won.

Furthermore, for example, when the single lottery is won by the role lottery means 61, the winning flag of the 1BBA is turned on in the current game, and when the 1BBA is not won in the current game, the winning flag of the 1BBA is maintained .
Furthermore, in the next game, when the small winning combination A1 is won, in addition to the 1BBA carrying the winning, the small winning combination 01's winning flag is turned on, and when the 1BBA does not win at the end of the current game, 1BBA On of the winning flag of is maintained, and the winning flag of the small role 01 is turned off.

The pushing order instruction number selecting unit 63 selects the pushing order instruction number based on the lottery result of the condition device by the combination drawing unit 61. FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a push order instruction number table.
In either of the advantageous section and the normal section, the push order instruction number selecting unit 63 may select the push order instruction number, but not limited to this, for example, only in the advantageous section, The selection of the push order instruction number may be performed. In such a case, the pressing order instruction number is always "A0" during the normal section.
Further, the selected push order instruction number can be transmitted to the sub control board 80 only during the advantageous section (except that the push order instruction number “A0” is transmitted during the normal section). Therefore, even if the pushing order instruction number is selected by the pushing order instruction number selecting means 63 in the normal section, the pushing order instruction number is not transmitted to the sub control board 80.
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 19, each condition device is provided with a unique push order instruction number. For example, the push order instruction number corresponding to Replay A is “A0”, and the push order instruction number corresponding to Replay C3 is “A3”. The push order instruction number includes “A0” to “A3”.

FIG. 20 is a view showing the relationship between the push order instruction number, the push order corresponding to the push order instruction number, and the display contents 1 and 2. In FIG. The push order instruction number “A0” does not have a push order that is advantageous for the player (the push order does not result in an advantage / a disadvantage, that is, the push order does not matter).
The push order instruction numbers “A1” to “A3” each have a push order that is advantageous to the player. For example, an advantageous push order corresponding to the push order instruction number "A2" is the middle first stop.

The push order corresponding to the push order instruction number in the replay B group is set to the push order for winning a replay 02 (push order to promote RT).
Further, the pushing order corresponding to the pushing order instruction number in the replay C group is set in the pushing order for winning the replay 01 (maintaining RT).
Similarly, the pushing order corresponding to the pushing order instruction number in the small winning combination B group is set in the pushing order for winning the small winning combination 01 (9 sheets).
Further, the pushing order corresponding to the pushing order instruction number in the small winning combination C group is set in the pushing order for winning the small winning combination 02 (three sheets).

Further, in FIG. 20, “display content 1” indicates the content displayed by the operation of the instruction function (control of the main control board 50), and in the present embodiment, pressing order instruction information displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 It shows. In the present embodiment, the push order instruction numbers “A” and “0” to “3” correspond to the display of “=” and “0” to “3” of the LED (7 segments), respectively. "=
When displaying “7”, segments D and G in FIG. 4 are lighted in 7 segments (see FIG. 26 described later). In addition, in the case of the push order instruction number “A0”, no display may be performed (any segment is not lighted).

Furthermore, “display content 2” indicates the content displayed by the control of the sub control board 80, and in the present embodiment, it is the correct touch order to be displayed on the image display device 23.
"Activation of indication function" means display using the acquisition number display LED 78 by the main control board 50, and display by control of the sub control board 80 corresponds to "activation of indication function" of the present invention. Is not included.
For example, when winning a prize and replay condition device "11" in the advantageous section, the push order instruction number "A1" is selected, and "1" is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 by the operation of the instruction function. Ru. Further, the image display device 23 displays an image such as “1 ○”, for example, which allows the player to understand that the left stop is first.

In FIG. 19, the push order instruction number (* 1) at the time of winning the small combination A is as follows.
When the small winning combination A is won, since the small winning combination 01 wins with no pressing order, there is no advantageous pressing order. However, during the advantageous section, any one of “A1” to “A3” is selected as the dummy push order instruction number. The selectivity is “1/3”, respectively. By setting in this manner, when the small winning combination A in the advantageous section is won, the instruction function is activated to display push order instruction information. As a result, the player can not determine whether the small winning combination A or the small winning combination B has been won in the game. The reason for this setting is as follows.

  As shown in FIG. 18, the winning probability (number) of the small winning combination A is higher in setting 6 than in setting 1. Therefore, it becomes possible to estimate the set value by counting the number of times the small combination 01 has won in the game in which the instruction function does not operate during the advantageous section. In order to avoid such capture, when the small winning combination A is won during the advantageous section, the instruction function is activated to display dummy push order instruction information. Of course, by counting the number of times the small winning combination 01 was won in the game activated the indication function, it is not the case that the set value can not be inferred, but the number of times the small winning combination 01 won in the game not activating the indication function The number of trials is required more than when counting and estimating the setting value.

Furthermore, in FIG. 19, push order instruction information (* 2) at the time of winning the small winning combination E1 and E2 is as follows.
As shown in FIG. 17, when the small winning combination E1 is won during the advantageous section, the advantageous section is added. However, as described above, when 1 BB is won during the advantageous section and the inside becomes inside, the additional of the advantageous section is not performed. For this reason, in the advantageous section and the inside (during the game section where the advantageous section is not added), the winning combination of the small part E1 is made, and the combination of the symbols corresponding to the small part E1 (the combination of the symbols expected to be added the advantageous section) When a certain middle stage cherry tree is stopped, the player may be given an impression of wasting. Therefore, when the small winning combination E1 is won during the advantageous section and the inside, the push order instruction number “A3” is selected, the instruction function is operated, and “first right stop” is displayed.

  When the stop switch 42 is operated in the right first stop when the small winning combination E1 is won, as shown in FIG. This makes it difficult to notice the winning of the small combination E1. Note that since the small winnings 36 or 38 that can be won when the small winning combination E1 is won are both two, even if the first right stop is instructed, there is no disadvantage to the player.

Furthermore, as described above, the upper limit number of games is set in the advantageous section, and in this embodiment, it is set within 1,500 games. Therefore, even if there is a remaining game count of the advantageous section, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated unconditionally when the number of games from the start of the advantageous section reaches 1500 games.
In the case of having such a game feature, for example, when the small winning combination E1 is won when the game is close to 1500 games of the advantageous section and the middle row cherry is displayed, the player expects the additional of the advantageous section. Therefore, in the present embodiment, even if the small winning combination E1 is won after reaching 1400 games or more from the start of the advantageous section, the middle row cherries are not displayed as in the internal winning case. , Activate the indication function and display the right first stop.

In addition, when the small winning combination E2 is won, as shown in FIG. 18, the determination regarding the advantageous section is not performed. However, when the small winning combination E2 is won, if the stop switch 42 is operated at the left or middle first stop, the middle row cherry may be displayed. Therefore, when the middle row cherries are displayed when the game reaches 1,400 games or more from inside or from the start of the advantageous section, the player may mislead the player. , Display the right first stop.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the small winning combination E2 is won, since the determination regarding the advantageous section is not performed from the beginning, the above-described instruction function may not be operated, and the middle cherry may be displayed.

In FIG. 1, the effect group number selection means 64 is an effect group number corresponding to the winning condition device, and selects a number to be transmitted to the sub control board 80.
It is also conceivable to transmit the winning prize and replay condition apparatus number itself to the sub control board 80 as a result of the drawing of the condition apparatus. However, in the present embodiment, the winning winning and replay condition device number itself is not transmitted to the sub control board 80. As a result, on the side of the sub control board 80, it is not possible to know the winning and replay condition device number which has been won in the game this time.

  On the other hand, on the main control board 50 side, an effect group number corresponding to the winning condition device is determined in advance. Then, after the lottery of the condition device, the effect group number corresponding to the winning condition device is selected, and the effect group number is transmitted to the sub control board 80. When the sub control board 80 receives the effect group number selected in the current game, the sub control board 80 can select and output an effect corresponding to the effect group number.

FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a presentation group number table.
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 21, each condition device is provided with a unique effect group number. For example, the effect group number corresponding to the winning of the small role A, the small role B group, and the small role C group is defined as "5". The effect group numbers corresponding to the wins of the small role A, the small role B group, and the small role C group may be different, such as “5”, “6”, and “7”.

Therefore, the main control board 50 selects “5” as the effect group number when the small combination A, the small combination B group or the small combination C group is won as a result of the drawing of the condition device. Then, information of the selected effect group number “5” is transmitted to the sub control board 80.
Upon receiving the information that the effect group number is "5", the sub control board 80 knows that it has won any of the small role A, the small portion B group, or the small role C group in the current game. it can. Thereby, it is possible to output a bell winning effect.

However, even if the sub control board 80 receives information indicating that the effect group number "5" has been won, the correct control is pressed even when, for example, one of the small winning combination B group is won in the game. I can not know the order. In the present embodiment, the pressing order instruction number corresponding to the correct pressing order is transmitted to the sub control board 80 during the advantageous section, but not transmitted during the normal section or the standby section. Therefore, during the advantageous section, the sub control board 80 may output the effect pressing order corresponding to the winning combination to the small combination A, the small combination B group, or the small combination C group and the pressing order instruction number as an effect it can. On the other hand, in the normal section and the standby section, the sub control board 80 remains in the effect of having won the small part A, the small part B group, or the small part C group (bell), and Can not be output as an effect.

  Further, even if the same pressing order instruction number is transmitted to the sub control board 80, different effects can be output because the effect group numbers are different. For example, since the push order instruction number is "A1" (left first) when winning in replay B1, and the push order instruction number when winning in minor C1 is "A1" (left first), In either case, the same push order instruction number is transmitted to the sub control board 80.

  However, when the replay B1 is won, the effect group number "2" is transmitted, and when the small winning combination C1 is won, the effect group number "5" is transmitted. Therefore, when the effect group number "2" is transmitted, for example, it is possible to notify the correct pressing order using blue indicating replay, and when the effect group number "5" is transmitted, for example, the bell is transmitted. It is possible to notify the correct pressing order by using yellow indicating.

  In FIG. 1, the reel control means 65 starts rotation of all (three) reels 31 when receiving a rotation start instruction of the reels 31, particularly when the start switch 41 is operated in this embodiment. Control. Furthermore, the reel control means 65 refers to the on / off of the winning flag in the current game after the lottery of the condition device is performed by the role lottery means 61, and the stop position determination table corresponding to the on / off of the winning flag. And when the stop switch 42 is operated, based on the timing when the stop switch 42 is operated, the stop position of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 is determined, and the motor 32 is driven. Control is performed to stop the reel 31 at the determined position.

  For example, in a game in which at least one winning flag is on, the reel control means 65 sets a combination of symbols corresponding to winning combinations (combinations in which the winning flag is on) within the range of stop control of the reels 31. In addition to stop control of the reel 31 so as to be able to stop on the effective line, stop control of the reel 31 so as not to stop the combination of symbols corresponding to the roles other than the winning combination (combinations in which the winning flag is off) .

Here, "within the range of stop control of the reel 31" means the time from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated to the time the reel 31 actually stops or the amount of rotation of the reel 31 (number of moving pieces (symbols)) It means within the range.
In the present embodiment, the reel 31 is rotated at a speed of about 80 revolutions per minute at a constant speed.
When the stop switch 42 is operated, the time from when the stop switch 42 is operated to when the reel 31 is stopped is set within 190 ms. Thereby, in the present embodiment, the maximum moving number of frames from the symbol at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated to the time the reel 31 is stopped is set to four.

  For example, in FIG. 5, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the moment when the first "Replay" of the left reel 31 is positioned at the lower left stage (on the effective line), the fourth frame ahead, that is, the fifth "bell" Up to B "is the symbol that can be stopped at the lower left. Therefore, at the above operation timing, the symbols of No. 1 (bit stop) to No. 5 (4 komasubi) become symbols that can be stopped at the lower left stage.

However, the present invention is not limited to the above, and it is also possible to set the maximum moving frame number to four from the symbol next to the symbol located on the effective line at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated. In this case, for example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the moment when the first "Replay" of the left reel 31 is located at the lower left level, from the next symbol, that is, the second "blank", The symbol up to the 6th "Replay" which is the symbol of 4 frames ahead is the symbol that can be stopped at the lower left level. Therefore, at the above-mentioned operation timing, the symbols of No. 2 to No. 6 become symbols that can be stopped at the lower left stage.
In the following description, it is assumed that the maximum number of moving frames is four from the symbol located on the effective line at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated.

  First, at the moment when the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected, the stop switch 42 is operated when any of the symbols within the range of the stop control of the reel 31 is a symbol to be stopped at a predetermined effective line. In addition, the symbol is controlled to stop at a predetermined effective line.

  That is, when the reel 31 is immediately stopped at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated, the stop control of the reel 31 is performed until the reel 31 is stopped when the symbol relating to the winning combination is not stopped at the predetermined effective line. By controlling the rotational movement of the reels 31 within the range of (1), it is controlled to stop the symbol relating to the winning combination on a predetermined effective line as much as possible (retraction stop control).

Conversely, if the reel 31 is stopped immediately at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated, the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination will stop on the effective line, the reel 31 is stopped when the reel is stopped. By rotating and controlling the reel 31 within the range of stop control 31, control is performed so as not to stop the combination of the symbols corresponding to the winning combination not winning the winning line (kicking stop control).
Furthermore, in a game in which a plurality of winning combinations have been won, the priority of winning combinations is determined in advance according to the pressing order of the stop switch 42 and the operation timing of the stop switch 42. Perform the pull-in stop control of the most prioritized symbol.

Further, the reel control means 65 detects the pressing order (operation order) of the stop switch 42. The reel control means 65 detects which of the left, middle and right stop switches 42 is operated when the player operates the stop switch 42.
When the stop switch 42 is operated, a signal indicating that the stop switch 42 is operated is input to the reel control means 65. By determining this signal, the reel control means 65 detects which stop switch 42 has been operated. Then, the stop control of the reel 31 corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 is executed.

  Furthermore, the reel control means 65 is provided with a stop position determination table for each condition device. The stop position determination table defines the stop position of the reel 31 with respect to the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated. Then, in each stop position determination table, for example, when the stop switch 42 is operated at the moment when the first symbol ("Replay" in the case of the left reel 31) passes the lower left stage (on the effective line), The stop position is determined in advance, such as moving control only for the symbols (in what kind of kosbery) and stopping the number of symbols in the lower left stage.

Here, the symbol arrangement in the present embodiment will be described.
First, as shown in FIG. 5, four “Replays” are arranged at intervals of 5 symbols on all the reels 31. Thus, "Replay" of all the reels 31 is arranged as "PB = 1".
Similarly, in the left reel 31, one of "BELL A" and "BELL B" is arranged at five symbol intervals. Thereby, it is "PB = 1" arrangement | positioning by these 2 symbol totals.
Further, in the middle reel 31, four "bells C" are arranged at intervals of 5 symbols. Thereby, the "bell C" of the middle reel 31 is in the "PB = 1" arrangement.
Furthermore, in the right reel 31, one of "BELL A" and "BELL B" is arranged at five symbol intervals. Thereby, it is "PB = 1" arrangement | positioning by these 2 symbol totals.

Furthermore, in the right reel 31, four "cherrys" are arranged at intervals of 5 symbols. Thereby, the "cherry" of the right reel 31 is in the "PB = 1" arrangement.
Further, on the left reel 31, four "black 7" or "watermelon" are arranged at five symbol intervals. Thereby, it is "PB = 1" arrangement | positioning by these 2 symbol totals.
Similarly, in the middle reel 31, one of "Blue 7" and "Cherry" is arranged at five symbol intervals. Thereby, it is "PB = 1" arrangement | positioning by these 2 symbol totals.
Furthermore, similarly, any one of “black 7”, “blue 7”, “blank”, or “red 7” is arranged on the right reel 31 at five symbol intervals. Thereby, it is "PB = 1" arrangement | positioning in these 4 symbol totals.

On the other hand, in the left reel 31, "Cherry" is disposed at the third, eighth, and thirteenth positions, and therefore, it is not the "PB = 1" arrangement.
Similarly, for “watermelon”, the left and middle reels 31 are in the “PB ≠ 1” arrangement, and the right reel 31 are in the “PB = 1” arrangement.

Hereinafter, the stop position determination table corresponding to each condition device will be described based on FIGS. 13 to 16 described above.
First, the stop position determination table at the time of winning and replay condition device winning will be described.
The non-winning table is used in a non-winning game of a combination, and defines a combination of symbols when the reel 31 is stopped so that combinations of symbols corresponding to any combination do not stop on the effective line.

  The Replay A table is used when Replay A is won (Replay 01 single winning), and within the range of stop control of the reel 31, regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42, the Replay 01 is stopped at the active line, It defines 31 stop positions. The symbols of each reel 31 pertaining to Replay 01 and Replays 02 to 06 described later are arranged in “PB = 1” in all the reels 31. Therefore, at the time of winning the replay, the replay that is always won (when a plurality of replays are duplicately won, one of the replays that is doublely won) is always prized.

  The replay B1 table is used in the game when the replay B1 is won, and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, the replay 02 is stopped at the effective line at the time of the first left stop (the order of correct pressing) and the first left stop The stop position of the reel 31 is determined so as to stop the replay 01 at the effective line (refer to FIG. 13) except at the time (when the pushing order is incorrect).

First, in the game where the replay B1 table is used, “black 7” or “watermelon” is stopped in the lower left stage at the time of the first left stop (“PB = 1” as described above). In this case, "Replay" is stopped in the upper left column.
Next, at the time of the second middle stop, "replay" is stopped at the middle middle stage. Then, at the time of the third right stop, "Cherry" is stopped at the upper right stage. In this case, "Replay" is stopped at the lower right. As a result, "black 7 / watermelon"-"replay"-"cherry" is stopped on the effective line, and a replay 02 is won. Furthermore, "Replay"-"Replay"-"Replay" is stopped at "upper left row"-"middle middle row"-"lower right corner".

On the other hand, in the game in which the replay B1 table is used, at the first middle stop, "blue 7" or "cherry" is stopped at the middle middle stage ("PB = 1"). In this case, "Replay" is stopped at the middle and upper stages. After that, when the left reel 31 is stopped, “black 7” or “watermelon” is stopped in the lower left stage (“PB = 1”). At this time, as described above, “Replay” stops in the upper left row.
When the right reel 31 is stopped, "Replay" is stopped at the upper right corner ("PB = 1"). As a result, "Black 7 / watermelon"-"Blue 7 / Cherry"-"Replay" is stopped on the effective line, and Replay 01 wins. Furthermore, "Replay"-"Replay"-"Replay" is stopped in the "upper left row"-"middle upper row"-"upper right row".

In the game in which the Replay B1 table is used, the same control as at the middle first stop is obtained also at the first right stop.
Furthermore, with regard to the Replay B2 table at the time of Replay B2 winning and the Replay B3 table at the time of Replay B3 winning, the Replay 02 is awarded at the time of pressing correct and the Replay 01 is awarded at the time of incorrect pressing.

  The replay C1 table is used in the game when the replay C1 is won, and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, the replay 01 is stopped at the effective line when the left first stop (pushing order correct) and the left first stop Other than the time (when the pushing order is incorrect), the stop position of the reel 31 is determined so as to stop the replay 03 on the active line (see FIG. 13).

First, in the game in which the replay C1 table is used, the control to stop the replay 01 on the activated line at the time of the first left stop is the same as the replay B1 table, so the description will be omitted.
In addition, in the game in which the replay C1 table is used, “replay” is stopped in the middle to middle (“PB = 1”) at the first stop in the middle. After that, when the left reel 31 is stopped, “bell A” or “bell B” is stopped at the lower left stage (“PB = 1”). In this case, "Replay" stops in the middle left column. When the right reel 31 is stopped, "watermelon" is stopped in the upper right part ("PB = 1"). In this case, "Replay" stops at the middle right. As a result, "Belle A / Bell B"-"Replay"-"Watermelon" is stopped on the activated line, and Replay 03 is won. Furthermore, "Replay"-"Replay"-"Replay" is stopped in the "left middle row"-"middle middle row"-"right middle row".

In the game in which the replay C1 table is used, the control at the time of the first right stop is the same control as at the time of the first middle stop.
Furthermore, the Replay C2 table at the time of Replay C2 winning, and the Replay C3 table at the time of Replay C3 winning, also make Replay 01 win at the time of pressing order correct and Replay 03 at the time of incorrect order .

The Replay D table is used in the game when Replay D is won, and within the range of stop control of the reel 31, regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42, the stop position of the reel 31 is made to stop Replay 06 at the effective line. It was decided. Replay 06 is “PB = 1”.
In addition, the Replay E table is used in the game when Replay E is won, and within the range of stop control of the reel 31, regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42, the Reel 04 or 05 is stopped on the active line. It defines 31 stop positions. In this case, it is possible to stop either Replay 04 or 05 with “PB = 1”.

The small combination A table is used in the game when the small combination A is won, and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42, the small combination 01 is stopped so as to stop the small combination 01 at the effective line. It defines the stop position. The combination of symbols of small part 01 is "Black 7
/ Watermelon "-" bell C "-" replay ", and" PB = 1 "in all reels 31. Also, when "black 7 / watermelon" stops in the lower left row, "bell A / bell B" stops in the middle left row. Furthermore, when "Replay" stops in the upper right row, "Belle A / Bell B" stops in the middle right row. Therefore, at the time of winning of the small part 01, "Bell A / Bell B"-"Bell C"-"Bell A / Bell B" is stopped at "Left middle row"-"middle middle row"-"right middle row".

  The small combination B1 table is used in the game when winning the small combination B1, and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, the small combination 01 is stopped at the effective line when the left first stop (pushing order correct), Except at the time of the first stop (when the pushing order is incorrect), the one-piece combination included in the winning combination (one of the small combinations 03, 10, 11, 18, 19, 26 when the small combination B1 is won) The stop position of the reel 31 is determined so as to stop on the effective line or to stop any of the pattern symbols 01 to 03.

At the time of the first left stop in the game where the small winning combination B1 table is used (pressing order correct answer), since it is the same as the small winning combination A table, the explanation will be omitted.
When the following tables B2 to B12 are used, the same stop control as the table A is performed when the pressing order is correct.
As a result, when the winning combination of the small winning combination A and the small winning combination B is won, the small winning combination 01 always wins, and the "left middle row"-"middle middle row"-"right middle row", "Bell A / Bell B"-"Bell C"-"Bell A / Bell B" stops. Therefore, even if the small winning combination 01 is won in a game in which the instruction function is not activated, the player does not know whether the small winning combination A is won or the pressing order of the small winning combination B group is right.

Further, even during the advantageous section, when the small winning combination A is elected, if the instruction function is operated with a dummy as described above, it is the player whether the small winning combination A or the small combination B group is winning I do not know.
As described above, in the present embodiment, since the winning combination number of the small winning combination A has a setting difference, it is possible to estimate the setting value by counting the number of times of winning of the small winning combination A. However, if the stop number is made the same between the winning combination of the small winning combination A and the winning combination of the small winning combination B, only the number of winning combinations of the small winning combination A can not be counted. You will not be able to guess.

Further, in the game in which the small winning combination B1 table is used, more specifically, the following stop control is executed.
First, when the small winning combination B1 is won, as shown in FIG. 14, seven small winning combinations 01, 03, 10, 11, 18, 19, and 26 are won, and the combinations of the symbols are as follows.
Small role 01: "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Bell C"-"Replay" (9 sheets)
Small part 03: "Belle A"-"Belle A"-"Belle A" (1 sheet)
Small role 10: "Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Bell B" (1 sheet)
Small role 11: "Bell C"-"Bell A"-"Blue 7" (1 sheet)
Small role 18: "Red 7"-"Bell B"-"Red 7" (1 sheet)
Minor part 19: "Bell C"-"Blue 7"-"Bell A" (1 sheet)
Small role 26: "Red 7"-"Red 7"-"Bell B" (1 sheet)

Then, the following method can be mentioned as stop control of the reel 31 when a plurality of small winning combinations with different payout numbers are dually won.
As a first priority, when it is possible to stop all of the symbols (of the reel 31) constituting the combination of winning symbols on the effective line, the reel 31 is stopped at that position.

Next, when it is not possible to "stop all symbols that make up the combination of winning symbols on the activated line" (when it is not possible to adopt the first priority), the "number of sheets priority" is given as the second priority. The stop control of the reel 31 is performed by either "or number priority".
Here, “number priority” means that the symbols of the reel 31 that make up the combination of the symbols with the largest number of payouts among the combinations of the symbols winning in duplicate are preferentially stopped (drawn) in the effective line Say Therefore, at the time of winning the small winning combination B group, the small winning combination 01 corresponds to the combination of (9) symbols having the largest payout number.
On the other hand, "number priority" means stopping the symbols of the reel 31 on the effective line so that the number of combinations of symbols that can be stopped on the effective line is the largest.

  For example, when the small winning combination B1 is won and the middle first stop is made, it is not possible to simultaneously stop all the middle reels 31 associated with the winning combination on the activated line. While there are multiple types of symbols of the middle reel 31 of the winning combination, there is only one valid line, so only one type of symbol can be stopped on the valid line.

Therefore, when the small winning combination B is won, the reel 31 is controlled to stop by either the number priority or the number priority. In the present embodiment, the reels are stopped and controlled by giving priority to the number of sheets when the pressing order is correct, and the reels 31 are controlled to be stopped by giving priority to the number when the pressing order is incorrect. When stop control of the reel is given by number priority, the small winning combination 01 (9-piece winning combination) is configured such that one winning combination can be made without winning (it has a case of being dropped).
As described above, the operation mode of the stop switch 42 is performed such that the number of sheets is prioritized in the specific pushing order (the correct pushing order in the present embodiment) and the number priority is given in the other pushing order (the incorrect pushing order in the present embodiment). The number of sheets or the number of sheets is prioritized in accordance with.

In the above example, when giving priority to the number during middle first stop (pressing order incorrect answer), if either "BELL A" or "BELL B" is stopped on the valid line, it will stop on the valid line The number of possible symbol combinations is two each and is the maximum. For example, if "BELL A" is stopped on the active line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, the small winning combination 03 or 11 can be won. Since "Bel A" or "Bell B" of middle reel 31 is "PB = 1" in the 2 symbol addition, when middle reel 31 stops, either "Bell A" or "Bell B" is always stopped It can be done.
Here, it is assumed that “bell A” is stopped when the middle reel 31 stops. In this case, at this time, the small winning combination 03 or 11 can be won.

  Next, when stopping the left reel 31, priority is given to stopping "Bell A" or "Bell C" on the active line. As shown in FIG. 5, in the left reel 31, “bell A” is disposed at No. 15 and No. 0, and “bell C” is disposed at No. 18. For this reason, when the symbol of the left reel 31 at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated is 11th to 19th and 0th, "bell A" or "bell C" can be stopped on the effective line, When the number is 1 to 10, "BELL A" or "BELL C" can not be stopped at the valid line.

Therefore, when the left reel 31 is stopped at random (without aiming at a specific symbol), "bell A" or "bell C" stops on the effective line with a probability of "1/2". In particular, in the present embodiment, since "bell A" can be stopped without stopping "bell C", the symbols on the left reel 31 at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated are the 11th to 19th and 0th If so, always stop "BELL A" on the active line.
In this way, stopping "Bell A" without stopping "Bell C" enables display of pattern symbols described later when the winning combination is lost at the time of the third stop. This is because (when the "bell C" is stopped when the left reel 31 is stopped, the pattern pattern can not be displayed).

  On the other hand, when the "bell A" can not be stopped on the effective line when the left reel 31 is stopped, control is performed so as to stop any pattern pattern on the effective line. As shown in FIG. 12, among the pattern symbols in which the symbol of the middle reel 31 is “bell A”, the symbol of the left reel 31 is “black 7” or “watermelon”. Since "black 7" or "watermelon" of the left reel 31 is "PB = 1" in the two symbol addition, it is possible to always stop any of these symbols.

Therefore, at the time of the first stop in the middle and the second stop on the left, "bell A"-"bell A"-"rotating" or "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell A"-"rotating" .
Furthermore, when "bell A"-"bell A"-"rotating" before right third stop, when "bel A" can be stopped on the effective line when the right reel 31 is stopped, " Stop Bell A '. As shown in FIG. 5, in order to stop "BELL A" on the effective line, if the symbol on the effective line at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated is within the range of No. 4 to No. 13, stop "BEL A" If it is in the other range, it can not stop "Bell A". Therefore, when the right reel 31 is stopped at random, "bell A" stops on the effective line with a probability of "1/2". When "BELL A" is stopped on the effective line when the right reel 31 is stopped, "BELL A"-"BELL A"-"BELL A", and the small winning combination 03 is won.

On the other hand, in the case of "bell A"-"bell A"-"rotating", when "bell A" can not be stopped on the effective line when the right reel 31 is stopped, "cherry" is made effective. Stop it ("PB = 1"). As a result, the combination of symbols on the effective line becomes "bell A"-"bell A"-"cherry", and the pattern symbol 03 stops.
Also, in the case of "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell A"-"rotating", when the right reel 31 is stopped, "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped on the effective line ("PB = 1" ). Thereby, the combination of the symbols on the effective line becomes "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell A"-"bell A / bell B", and the pattern symbol 01 is stopped.

Next, it is assumed that “BELL B” is stopped on the activated line at the first stop (due to wrong order of pressing) when the small winning combination B1 is won. In this case, the small winning combination 10 or 18 can be won at this time.
Next, when the left reel 31 is to be stopped, priority is given to stopping “Bell B” or “Red 7”, which is a symbol related to the small winning combination 10 or 18, at the effective line. As shown in FIG. 5, in the left reel 31, “bell B” is disposed at the fifth and tenth, and “red 7” is disposed at the seventh. For this reason, when the symbol of the left reel 31 at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated is No. 1 to No. 10, "Bell B" or "Red 7" can be stopped at the effective line, otherwise In some cases, "Bell B" or "Red 7" can not be stopped on the active line.

  Therefore, when the left reel 31 is stopped at random (without aiming at a specific symbol), “Bell B” or “Red 7” stops on the effective line with a probability of “1/2”. In particular, in the present embodiment, since “bell B” can be stopped without stopping “red 7”, when the symbol of the left reel 31 at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated is 1 to 10 Will always stop "BELL B" on the active line.

  On the other hand, when "the bell B" can not be stopped to an effective line at the time of stop of the left reel 31, it controls so that one pattern symbol is stopped to an effective line. As shown in FIG. 12, the pattern symbol whose symbol on the middle reel 31 is “bell B” is “black 7” or “watermelon”. Since "black 7" or "watermelon" of the left reel 31 is "PB = 1" in the two symbol addition, it is possible to always stop any of these symbols.

Therefore, at the first stop in the middle and the second stop on the left, "bell B"-"bell B"-"rotating" or "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell B"-"rotating" .
Furthermore, when "bell B"-"bell B"-"rotating" before the third right stop, "bell B" can be stopped at the effective line when the right reel 31 stops. Stop Bell B '. As shown in FIG. 5, in order to stop "BELL B" on the effective line, the symbol of the effective line at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated should be in the range of 14th to 18th, or 19th to 3rd. For example, "bell B" can be stopped, and "bell B" can not be stopped in any other range. Therefore, when the right reel 31 is stopped at random, "bell B" stops on the effective line with a probability of "1/2". When "BELL B" is stopped on the effective line when the right reel 31 is stopped, "BELL B"-"BELL B"-"BELL B", and the small winning combination 10 is won.

On the other hand, in the case of "bell B"-"bell B"-"rotating", if "bell B" can not be stopped on the effective line when the right reel 31 is stopped, "cherry" is made effective. Stop it ("PB = 1"). Thereby, the combination of the symbols on the effective line becomes "bell B"-"bell B"-"cherry", and the pattern symbol 03 is stopped.
Also, in the case of "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell B"-"rotating", when the right reel 31 is stopped, "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped on the effective line ("PB = 1" ). Thereby, the combination of the symbols on the effective line becomes "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell B"-"bell A / bell B", and the pattern symbol 01 is stopped.

From the above, at the time of the first stop at the time of winning the small winning combination B1, the middle reel 31 can stop the symbol pertaining to one winning combination with “PB = 1”, and both the left and right reels 31 are “1 It is possible to stop the symbols related to one piece with the probability of / 2 ". Furthermore, when it is not possible to stop the symbol relating to one piece, it is possible to always stop the pattern symbol. Therefore, at the time of the first middle stop (when the pushing order is incorrect) at the time of winning the small winning combination B1,
One piece: 1/4 probability of winning pattern pattern: 3/4 probability of stopping.
Furthermore, at the time of winning a single role,
"Belle A"-"Belle A"-"Belle A" (small part 03)
"Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Bell B" (small role 10)
It will be either.

Next, when the small winning combination B1 is won, the case of the first right stop will be described. When giving priority to the number when the right reel 31 is stopped, the number of combinations of symbols that can be stopped on the effective line is 2 if either “BELL A” or “BELL B” is stopped on the effective line Become the largest. For example, if "bell A" is stopped on the active line when the right reel 31 is stopped, the small winning combination 03 or 19 can be won. Since “Bell A” or “Bell B” of the right reel 31 is “PB = 1” in the two symbol addition, it is possible to always stop “Bell A” or “Bell B” when the right reel 31 is stopped. it can.
First, it is assumed that "BELL A" is stopped on the effective line when the right reel 31 is stopped. In this case, the small winning combination 03 or 19 can be won at this time.

  Next, when the left reel 31 is to be stopped, priority is given to stopping the "bell A" or "bell C", which is a symbol related to the small part 03 or 19, on the effective line. Here, as in the above, priority is given to stopping the "bell A". "Bell A" can be stopped with the probability of "1/2". In addition, when "bell A" can not be stopped, "black 7" or "watermelon" is stopped ("PB = 1" in 2 symbol summation).

Therefore, at the time of the first right stop and the second left stop, "bell A"-"rotating"-"bell A" or "black 7 / watermelon"-"rotating"-"bell A" .
Furthermore, before the middle third stop, in the case of "bell A"-"rotating"-"bell A", when "bel A" can be stopped on the effective line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, " Stop Bell A '. As shown in FIG. 5, in order to stop "BELL A" on the effective line, if the symbol on the effective line at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated is within the range of No. 5 to 14, stop "BEL A" If it is in the other range, it can not stop "Bell A". Therefore, when the middle reel 31 is stopped at random, the "bell A" stops on the effective line with a probability of "1/2". When "BELL A" is stopped on the effective line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, "BELL A"-"BELL A"-"BELL A", and the small winning combination 03 is won.

On the other hand, in the case of "bell A"-"rotating"-"bell A", when "bell A" can not be stopped on the effective line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, "blue 7" or "cherry" Stop at the effective line ("PB = 1" in 2 symbol summation). As a result, the pattern symbol 02 is stopped at the effective line.
Further, in the case of "black 7 / watermelon"-"rotating"-"bell A", when the middle reel 31 is stopped, "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped on the effective line ("PB = 1" ). As a result, the pattern symbol 01 is stopped at the effective line.

Further, it is assumed that "BELL B" is stopped on the effective line when the right reel 31 is stopped at the first stop. In this case, the small winning combination 10 or 26 can be won at this time.
Next, when the left reel 31 is to be stopped, priority is given to stopping “Bell B” or “Red 7”, which is a symbol related to the small winning combination 10 or 26, at the effective line. Here, priority is given to stopping "BELL B". "Bell B" can be stopped with a probability of "1/2". In addition, when "bell B" can not be stopped, "black 7" or "watermelon" is stopped ("PB = 1" in 2 symbol summation).

Therefore, at the time of the first right stop and the second left stop, "bell B"-"rotating"-"bell B" or "black 7 / watermelon"-"rotating"-"bell B" .
Furthermore, before the middle third stop, in the case of "bell B"-"rotating"-"bell B", when "bel bell B" can be stopped on the effective line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, " Stop Bell B '. Here, when the middle reel 31 is stopped at random, "Bell B" stops on the effective line with a probability of "1/2". When "BELL B" is stopped on the effective line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, "BELL B"-"BELL B"-"BELL B", and the small winning combination 10 is won.

On the other hand, in the case of "bell B"-"rotating"-"bell B", when "bell B" can not be stopped on the effective line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, "blue 7" or "cherry" Stop at the effective line ("PB = 1" in 2 symbol summation). As a result, the pattern symbol 02 is stopped at the effective line.
Further, in the case of "black 7 / watermelon"-"rotating"-"bell B", when the middle reel 31 is stopped, "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped on the effective line ("PB = 1") ). As a result, the pattern symbol 01 is stopped at the effective line.

From the above, at the time of the first right stop at the time of winning the small winning combination B1, the right reel 31 can stop the symbol related to one winning combination with “PB = 1”, and both the left and right reels 31 are “1 It is possible to stop the symbols related to one piece with the probability of / 2 ". Furthermore, when it is not possible to stop the symbol relating to one piece, it is possible to always stop the pattern symbol. Therefore, at the time of the first right stop at the time of winning the small winning combination B1 (pressing order incorrect answer),
One piece: 1/4 probability of winning pattern pattern: 3/4 probability of stopping.
Furthermore, at the time of winning a single role,
"Belle A"-"Belle A"-"Belle A" (small part 03)
"Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Bell B" (small role 10)
It will be either.
The winning rate and the stopping rate of the pattern symbol are the same as in the middle first stopping.
Therefore, when the small winning combination B1 is won, the small winning combination 01 wins with “PB = 1” at the time of the first stop on the left (when the pressing order is correct). On the other hand, in the middle or right first stop (pressing order incorrect answer), one winning combination is won with a probability of "1/4", and the pattern symbol is stopped with a probability of "3/4". .

Even when the small winning combination B2 is won, the small winning combination B2 table is provided as in the small winning combination B1. The winning combination included when winning the small role B2,
Small role 01: "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Bell C"-"Replay" (9 sheets)
Small part 04: "Belle A"-"Belle A"-"Belle B" (1 sheet)
Small part 09: "Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Bell A" (1 sheet)
Small part 12: "Bell C"-"Bell A"-"Red 7" (1 sheet)
Small part 17: "Red 7"-"Bell B"-"Blue 7" (1 sheet)
Small role 20: "Bell C"-"Blue 7"-"Bell B" (1 sheet)
Small part 25: "Red 7"-"Red 7"-"Bell A" (1 sheet)
It is.

Then, at the time of the first left stop (when the pressing order is correct), the small winning combination 01 is awarded.
Next, at the time of the first first stop (when the pressing order is incorrect), "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped at the effective line by number priority.
First, when "bell A" is stopped at the middle first stop, priority is given to stopping either "bell A" or "bell C" at the time of left stop. Here, since "bell A" can be stopped when "bell C" can be stopped, "bell A" is stopped without stopping "bell C". In addition, when "bell A" can not be stopped, "black 7 / watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, it becomes either "bell A"-"bell A"-"rotating" or "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell A"-"rotating".

When "bell A"-"bell A"-"rotating", when "right" can stop "bell B", "bell B" is stopped. As a result, it becomes a winning of the small role 04. In addition, when "bell B" can not be stopped at the time of right stop, "cherry" is stopped. Thereby, the pattern pattern 03 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell A"-"rotating" is reached, "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped at the time of right stop. Thereby, the pattern pattern 01 is stopped.

  Next, it is assumed that the "bell B" is stopped at the middle first stop. In this case, at the time of left stop, priority is given to stopping either "bell B" or "red 7". Here, since “bell B” can be stopped when “red 7” can be stopped, “bell B” is stopped without stopping “red 7”. In addition, when "bell B" can not be stopped, "black 7 / watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, it becomes either "bell B"-"bell B"-"rotating" or "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell B"-"rotating".

When "bell B"-"bell B"-"rotating", when "right" can stop "bell A", "bell A" is stopped. As a result, it becomes a winning of the small role 09. In addition, when "BELL A" can not be stopped at the time of right stop, "CHERRY" is stopped. Thereby, the pattern pattern 03 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell B"-"turning", the "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped at the time of right stop. Thereby, the pattern pattern 01 is stopped.

Next, at the time of the first right stop at the time of winning the small winning combination B2 (pressing order incorrect answer), "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped on the effective line by number priority.
First, when "bell A" is stopped at the time of the first right stop, priority is given to stop either "bell B" or "red 7" at the time of left stop. Here, since “bell B” can be stopped when “red 7” can be stopped, “bell B” is stopped without stopping “red 7”. In addition, when "bell B" can not be stopped, "black 7 / watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, it becomes either "bell B"-"rotating"-"bell A" or "black 7 / watermelon"-"rotating"-"bell A".

When "bell B"-"rotating"-"bell A", "bell B" can be stopped when the "bell B" can be stopped at the middle stop. As a result, it becomes a winning of the small role 09. In addition, when "bell B" can not be stopped at the middle stop, "blue 7 / cherry" is stopped. Thereby, the pattern pattern 02 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "black 7 / watermelon"-"rotating"-"bell A", "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped at the middle stop. Thereby, the pattern pattern 01 is stopped.

  Next, it is assumed that "bell B" is stopped at the time of the first right stop. In this case, at the time of left stop, priority is given to stopping either "bell A" or "bell C". Here, since "bell A" can be stopped when "bell C" can be stopped, "bell A" is stopped without stopping "bell C". In addition, when "bell A" can not be stopped, "black 7 / watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, it becomes either "bell A"-"rotating"-"bell B" or "black 7 / watermelon"-"rotating"-"bell B".

When "bell A"-"rotating"-"bell B", "bell A" can be stopped when the "bell A" can be stopped at the middle stop. As a result, it becomes a winning of the small role 04. In addition, when "bell A" can not be stopped at the middle stop, "blue 7 / cherry" is stopped. Thereby, the pattern pattern 02 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "black 7 / watermelon"-"rotating"-"bell B", "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped at the middle stop. Thereby, the pattern pattern 01 is stopped.

From the above, when winning the small part B2, when the pressing order is incorrect,
One piece: 1/4 probability of winning pattern pattern: 3/4 probability of stopping.
Furthermore, at the time of winning a single role,
"Belle A"-"Belle A"-"Belle B" (small part 04)
"Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Bell A" (small part 09)
It will be either.

Even when the small winning combination B3 is won, the small winning combination B3 table is provided as in the small winning combination B1. The winning combination included when winning the small role B3 is
Small role 01: "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Bell C"-"Replay" (9 sheets)
Small part 05: "Belle A"-"Belle B"-"Belle A" (1 sheet)
Small role 08: "Bell B"-"Bell A"-"Bell B" (1 sheet)
Small role 13: "Bell C"-"Bell B"-"Blue 7" (1 sheet)
Small role 16: "Red 7"-"Bell A"-"Red 7" (1 sheet)
Minor part 21: "Bell C"-"Red 7"-"Bell A" (1 sheet)
Small part 24: "Red 7"-"Blue 7"-"Bell B" (1 sheet)
It is.

Then, at the time of the first left stop (when the pressing order is correct), the small winning combination 01 is awarded.
Next, at the time of the first first stop (when the pressing order is incorrect), "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped at the effective line by number priority.
First, when "bell A" is stopped at the middle first stop, priority is given to stop either "bell B" or "red 7" at the left stop. Here, the “bell B” is stopped without stopping the “red 7” as described above. In addition, when "bell B" can not be stopped, "black 7 / watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, it becomes either "bell B"-"bell A"-"rotating" or "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell A"-"rotating".

When "bell B"-"bell A"-"rotating", when "right" can stop "bell B", "bell B" is stopped. As a result, it becomes winning of the small role 08. In addition, when "bell B" can not be stopped at the time of right stop, "cherry" is stopped. Thereby, the pattern pattern 03 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell A"-"rotating" is reached, "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped at the time of right stop. Thereby, the pattern pattern 01 is stopped.

  Next, it is assumed that the "bell B" is stopped at the middle first stop. In this case, at the time of left stop, priority is given to stopping either "bell A" or "bell C". Here, "bell A" is stopped without stopping "bell C" as described above. In addition, when "bell A" can not be stopped, "black 7 / watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, it becomes either "bell A"-"bell B"-"rotating" or "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell B"-"rotating".

When "bell A"-"bell B"-"rotating", when "right" can stop "bell A", "bell A" is stopped. As a result, it becomes a winning of the small role 05. In addition, when "BELL A" can not be stopped at the time of right stop, "CHERRY" is stopped. Thereby, the pattern pattern 03 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell B"-"turning", the "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped at the time of right stop. Thereby, the pattern pattern 01 is stopped.

Next, at the time of the first right stop at the time of winning the small winning combination B2 (pressing order incorrect answer), "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped on the effective line by number priority.
First, when "bell A" is stopped at the time of the first right stop, priority is given to stopping either "bell A" or "bell C" at the time of left stop. Here, "bell A" is stopped as described above. In addition, when "bell A" can not be stopped, "black 7 / watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, it becomes either "bell A"-"rotating"-"bell A" or "black 7 / watermelon"-"rotating"-"bell A".

When "bell A"-"rotating"-"bell A", the "bell B" is stopped when the "bell B" can be stopped at the middle stop. As a result, it becomes a winning of the small role 05. In addition, when "bell B" can not be stopped at the middle stop, "blue 7 / cherry" is stopped. Thereby, the pattern pattern 02 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "black 7 / watermelon"-"rotating"-"bell A", "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped at the middle stop. Thereby, the pattern pattern 01 is stopped.

Next, it is assumed that "bell B" is stopped at the time of the first right stop. In this case, at the time of left stop, priority is given to stopping either "bell B" or "red 7". Here, "bell B" is stopped similarly to the above. In addition, when "bell B" can not be stopped, "black 7 / watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, it becomes either "bell B"-"rotating"-"bell B" or "black 7 / watermelon"-"rotating"-"bell B".

When "bell B"-"rotating"-"bell B", the "bell A" is stopped when the "bell A" can be stopped at the middle stop. As a result, it becomes winning of the small role 08. In addition, when "bell B" can not be stopped at the middle stop, "blue 7 / cherry" is stopped. Thereby, the pattern pattern 02 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "black 7 / watermelon"-"rotating"-"bell B", "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped at the middle stop. Thereby, the pattern pattern 01 is stopped.

From the above, when winning the small part B3, when the pushing order incorrect answer,
One piece: 1/4 probability of winning pattern pattern: 3/4 probability of stopping.
Furthermore, at the time of winning a single role,
"Belle A"-"Belle B"-"Belle A" (small part 05)
"Bell B"-"Bell A"-"Bell B" (small role 08)
It will be either.

Also when the small winning combination B4 is won, the small winning combination B4 table is provided as in the small winning combination B1 winning. The winning combination included when winning the small role B4 is
Small role 01: "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Bell C"-"Replay" (9 sheets)
Small part 06: "Bell A"-"Bell B"-"Bell B" (1 sheet)
Small role 07: "Bell B"-"Bell A"-"Bell A" (1 sheet)
Small role 14: "Bell C"-"Bell B"-"Red 7" (1 sheet)
Small part 15: "Red 7"-"Bell A"-"Blue 7" (1 sheet)
Small role 22: "Bell C"-"Red 7"-"Bell B" (1 sheet)
Small role 23: "Red 7"-"Blue 7"-"Bell A" (1 sheet)
It is.

Then, at the time of the first left stop (when the pressing order is correct), the small winning combination 01 is awarded.
Next, at the time of the first first stop (when the pressing order is incorrect), "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped at the effective line by number priority.
First, when "Bell A" is stopped at the middle first stop, priority is given to stopping either "Bell B" or "Red 7" at the left stop. Stop "Bell B". In addition, when "bell B" can not be stopped, "black 7 / watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, it becomes either "bell B"-"bell A"-"rotating" or "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell A"-"rotating".

When "bell B"-"bell A"-"rotating", when "right" can stop "bell A", "bell A" is stopped. As a result, it becomes a winning of the small role 07. In addition, when "bell B" can not be stopped at the time of right stop, "cherry" is stopped. Thereby, the pattern pattern 03 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell A"-"rotating" is reached, "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped at the time of right stop. Thereby, the pattern pattern 01 is stopped.

  Next, it is assumed that the "bell B" is stopped at the middle first stop. In this case, at the time of left stop, priority is given to stopping either "bell A" or "bell C". Here, "bell A" is stopped as described above. In addition, when "bell A" can not be stopped, "black 7 / watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, it becomes either "bell A"-"bell B"-"rotating" or "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell B"-"rotating".

When "bell A"-"bell B"-"rotating", when "right" can stop "bell B", "bell B" is stopped. As a result, it becomes a winning of the small role 06. In addition, when "bell B" can not be stopped at the time of right stop, "cherry" is stopped. Thereby, the pattern pattern 03 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell B"-"turning", the "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped at the time of right stop. Thereby, the pattern pattern 01 is stopped.

Next, at the time of the first right stop at the time of winning the small winning combination B4 (pressing order incorrect answer), "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped on the active line by number priority.
First, when "bell A" is stopped at the time of the first right stop, priority is given to stop either "bell B" or "red 7" at the time of left stop. Here, "bell B" is stopped similarly to the above. In addition, when "bell B" can not be stopped, "black 7 / watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, it becomes either "bell B"-"rotating"-"bell A" or "black 7 / watermelon"-"rotating"-"bell A".

When "bell B"-"rotating"-"bell A", "bell A" is stopped when "bell A" can be stopped at the middle stop. As a result, it becomes a winning of the small role 07. In addition, when "bell A" can not be stopped at the middle stop, "blue 7 / cherry" is stopped. Thereby, the pattern pattern 02 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "black 7 / watermelon"-"rotating"-"bell A", "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped at the middle stop. Thereby, the pattern pattern 01 is stopped.

  Next, it is assumed that "bell B" is stopped at the time of the first right stop. In this case, at the time of left stop, priority is given to stopping either "bell A" or "bell C". Here, "bell A" is stopped as described above. In addition, when "bell A" can not be stopped, "black 7 / watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, it becomes either "bell A"-"rotating"-"bell B" or "black 7 / watermelon"-"rotating"-"bell B".

When "bell A"-"rotating"-"bell B", the "bell B" is stopped when the "bell B" can be stopped at the middle stop. As a result, it becomes a winning of the small role 06. In addition, when "bell B" can not be stopped at the middle stop, "blue 7 / cherry" is stopped. Thereby, the pattern pattern 02 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "black 7 / watermelon"-"rotating"-"bell B", "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped at the middle stop. Thereby, the pattern pattern 01 is stopped.

From the above, when winning the small part B4, when the pressing order is incorrect,
One piece: 1/4 probability of winning pattern pattern: 3/4 probability of stopping.
Furthermore, at the time of winning a single role,
"Bell A"-"Bell B"-"Bell B" (small role 06)
"Bell B"-"Bell A"-"Bell A" (small part 07)
It will be either.

In the following, the detailed description of the small role B5 table to the small role B12 table at the time of winning the small portions B5 to B12 will be omitted, and only the outline thereof will be described.
In the small combination B5 table used when winning the small combination B5, the small combination 01 wins at the first stop in the middle of the pressing order correct time, and the small combination 03 or small at the probability of "1/4" The part 10 is won, and the pattern symbol is stopped with the probability of "3/4". That is, the small winning combination that can be won when the pushing order is incorrect is the same as when the small winning combination B1 is won.
In the small combination B6 table used when winning the small combination B6, the small combination 01 wins at the first stop in the middle of the press order correct time, and the combination of the small combination with the probability of “1/4” indicates the small combination 04 Alternatively, the small winning combination 09 is won, and the pattern symbol is stopped with the probability of "3/4". That is, the small winning combination that can be won when the pushing order is incorrect is the same as when the small winning combination B2 is won.

Furthermore, in the small combination B7 table used when winning the small combination B7, the small combination 01 wins at the first stop in the middle of the pressing order correct time, and the small combination with the probability of "1/4" at the pressing order incorrect solution 05 or small part 08 wins, the pattern design stops with probability of 3/4. That is, the small winning combination that can be won when the pushing order is incorrect is the same as when winning the small winning combination B3.
Furthermore, in the small combination B8 table used when winning the small combination B8, the small combination 01 wins at the first stop during the middle order which is the pressing order correct time, and the small combination with a probability of “1/4” at the pressing order incorrect solution 06 Alternatively, the minor player 07 wins, and the pattern symbol stops with the probability of "3/4". That is, the small winning combination that can be won when the pushing order is incorrect is the same as when the small winning combination B4 is won.

In the small combination B9 table used when winning the small combination B9, the small combination 01 wins at the first right stop which is the pressing order correct time, and the small combination 03 or small at the probability of "1/4" The part 10 is won, and the pattern symbol is stopped with the probability of "3/4". That is, the small winning combination that can be won when the pushing order is incorrect is the same as when the small winning combination B1 is won.
Further, in the small combination B10 table used when winning the small combination B10, the small combination 01 is won at the time of the first right stop which is the pressing order correct time, and when the pressing order is incorrect the small combination 04 with a probability of "1/4" Alternatively, the small winning combination 09 is won, and the pattern symbol is stopped with the probability of "3/4". That is, the small winning combination that can be won when the pushing order is incorrect is the same as when the small winning combination B2 is won.

Furthermore, in the small combination B11 table used when winning the small combination B11, the small combination 01 is won at the time of the first right stop which is the pressing order correct time, and the small combination with the probability of "1/4" 05 or small part 08 wins, the pattern design stops with probability of 3/4. That is, the small winning combination that can be won when the pushing order is incorrect is the same as when winning the small winning combination B3.
Furthermore, in the small combination B12 table used when winning the small combination B12, the small combination 01 is won at the time of the first right stop, which is the pressing order correct time, and the small combination 01 with a probability of "1/4" Alternatively, the minor player 07 wins, and the pattern symbol stops with the probability of "3/4". That is, the small winning combination that can be won when the pushing order is incorrect is the same as when the small winning combination B4 is won.

  As is apparent from the above, when the small winning combination B is selected, the winning combination in which the winning combination is incorrect, the single winning combination that can be won is the low winning combination 03 to the low winning combination 10. Therefore, the small winning combination other than the above included in each condition device does not win. What is set in this way relates to a one-piece combination that can be won when a small combination C-group winning, which will be described later, is won.

  The small combination C1 table is used in the game when the small combination C1 is won, and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, the small combination 02 is stopped at the effective line when the left first stop (pushing order correct) Except at the time of the first stop (when the pushing order is incorrect), the one-piece combination (one of the small combinations 03 to 10 when the small combination C1 is elected) included in the winning combination is stopped at the effective line. The stop position of the reel 31 is determined.

  At the time of pressing correct when winning the small winning combination C1 (same small winning combination C2 and C3 to be described later), as in the small winning combination B group winning, to win the small winning combination 02 (three-piece winning combination) by number priority Control. The combination of symbols corresponding to the small part 02, as shown in FIG. 7, is "bell A / bell B"-"blue 7 / cherry"-"watermelon", and "PB = 1" in all reels 31. . Therefore, the small winning combination 02 can always be won when the pushing order is correct.

  Further, at the time of winning the small winning combination C1 (in the middle or at the first right stop), control is made to win one winning combination (small winning combination 03 to 10) by number priority. Here, as shown in FIG. 8, the combination of symbols of the small part 03 to 10 is a combination of symbols of “bell A” or “bell B” for each reel 31. Furthermore, in any reel 31 among combinations of symbols of small part 03-10, "Bell A" is four, "Bell B" is four, and either "Bell A" or "Bell B" Even if stopped, the condition of number priority is met. In particular, at the time of winning the small combination C2 and the small combination C3, although including the small combination 21 and the small combination 22 respectively, even if these small combination is included in the winning combination, there is no change in the type of symbol priority. Moreover, in all the reels 31, "Bell A" or "Bell B" is "PB = 1" in the two symbol addition. Therefore, it is always possible to win one of the small winning combinations 03-10.

  From the above, at the time of winning the small winning combination C1, the small winning combination 02 (three winning combinations) wins ("PB = 1") when the pressing order is correct, and any of the small winning combinations 03 to 10 when the pressing order is incorrect (1 The winning combination ("PB = 1") is not won, and a drop-off (stopping of the pattern pattern) does not occur as in the case of winning the small winning combination B group.

  The same table as the small combination C1 table is also applied to the small combination C2 table and the small combination C3 table respectively used when the small combination C2 is elected and the small combination C3 is elected. As shown in FIG. 16, when the small winning combination C2 is won, the middle first stop is the correct pressing order, and when the small winning combination C3 is the right first first stopping is the correct pressing order. The stop control for winning the small role 02 or the small roles 03 to 10 is the same as when the small role C1 is won, so the explanation will be omitted.

  Therefore, the one-piece combination (small combination 03 to 10) that can be stopped at the wrong order in the winning combination of the small combination B group win (one small combination 03-10), and the one combination that can be stopped at the depression sequence of the small combination C group win ( Small roles 03-10) become the same. As a result, it is not possible to determine which of the small combination B group or the small combination C group was won in the game just by looking at the small combination winnings of the small combination 03-10.

  The small combination D table is used in the game when the small combination D is won, and the stop position of the reel 31 is determined so as to stop the small combination 35 on the effective line within the range of the stop control of the reel 31. In the small role D table, the pressing order of the stop switch 42 does not matter. The combination of symbols of the small part 35 is “watermelon” as shown in FIG. The “watermelon” is arranged at “PB ≠ 1” for the left and middle reels 31 and is arranged at “PB = 1” for the right reel 31. Therefore, in the game in which the small part D table is used, in the left and middle reels 31, if the stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the "watermelon" stops on the effective line, the "watermelon" stops on the effective line. When the stop switch 42 is operated at a timing when the "watermelon" does not stop on the effective line, the "watermelon" does not stop on the effective line, and the small role 35 is dropped.

  The small winning combination E1 table is used in the game when the small winning combination E1 is won, and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, the stopping position of the reel 31 is determined so as to stop the small winning combination 36 or 38 on the effective line. It is. Here, as shown in FIG. 16, when the stop switch 42 is operated at the left or middle first stop, it becomes so-called stop form of middle cherry (so that "cherry" stops at middle left) The stop position of the reel 31 is determined. On the other hand, when the stop switch 42 is operated at the first right stop, the stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that the middle cherry does not stop.

  It should be noted that the winning of the small combination E1 includes the small combinations 36 and 38 (and further includes the small combination 37 at the time of the small combination E2 winning described later), but since these small combinations both have two pieces, The above-mentioned number / number priority is not applied, and the reel 31 can be stopped by any predetermined stop control. Therefore, control is made to give priority to the winning of the small winning combination 36 at the left or middle first stop, and control is given to give priority to the winning combination of the small winning combination 38 at the right first stop.

  In FIG. 5, “cherry” of the left reel 31 is the third, the eighth, and the thirteenth (“PB ≠ 1”). Then, when "Cherry" is stopped in the middle left, "Blank" or "Red 7" stops in the effective line which is the lower left. Therefore, in this case, the symbol relating to the small winning combination 36 is stopped for the left reel 31.

For example, when the 7th "Red 7" is stopped at the lower left stage at the first left stop ("Cherry" stop in the middle left), "Blue 7" or "Cherry" is valid when the middle reel 31 is stopped. Stop at the line (“PB = 1”), and when the right reel 31 is stopped, one of “Black 7”, “Blue 7”, “Red 7” or “Blank” (4 symbols totaling “PB =” Stop 1)) on the active line. As a result, it becomes a winning of the small role 36.
Also, when the second reel or the 12th “blank” is stopped at the lower left stage when the left reel 31 stops (the “cherry” stops at the middle left stage), “when the middle reel 31 stops” in the same manner as above. "Blue 7" or "Cherry" is stopped on the effective line, and when the right reel 31 is stopped, "black 7", "blue 7", "red 7" or "blank" is stopped on the effective line . As a result, it becomes a winning of the small role 36.

The stop control is performed in the same manner as described above for the middle first stop. Therefore, the symbols relating to the small winning combination 36 stop at "PB = 1" for the middle and right reels 31, and there are cases where the "red 7" or "blank" stops for the left reel 31 and when it does not stop "PB ≠ 1").
However, when it is not possible to stop “red 7” or “blank” in the lower left stage at the left or middle first stop, “bell A” or “bell B” is stopped. The “bell A” or “bell B” can be stopped at “PB = 1”. The stop form in this case is "bell A / bell B"-"blue 7 / cherry"-"black 7 / blue 7 / red 7 / blank", and the small winning combination 38 is won.

On the other hand, in the game in which the small winning combination E1 table is used, priority is given to winning of the small winning combination 38 at the time of the first right stop. Therefore, in this case, "bell A / bell B"-"blue 7 / cherry"-"black 7 / blue 7 / red 7 / blank" stops, and the minor player 38 wins with "PB = 1". .
Furthermore, at the time of the first right stop, even if "Cherry" can be stopped at the left middle level when the left reel 31 is stopped, "Bell A" or "Bell" at the lower left level without stopping "Cherry" in the left middle level. B "(in this case," Cherry "non-stop in the left middle) is stopped.

The small combination E2 table is used in the game when the small combination E1 is won, and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, the small combination 36 or 38 (or the small combination 37) is stopped on the effective line, the reel 31 The stop position of the
Therefore, since the small winning combination E2 table can perform the same stop control as the small winning combination E1 table, it is possible to use the same stopping position determination table.

  Alternatively, in the case of the left first stop, “Replay” is made effective for the middle reel 31 only when “red 7” or “blank” can be stopped in the lower left stage (at the middle stage cherry stop). It may be stopped (“PB = 1”), and any one of “black 7”, “blue 7”, “red 7” or “blank” may be stopped for the right reel 31. As a result, the minor player 37 wins. Temporarily, if it carries out stop control in this way, it will become stop control which can distinguish whether it is at the time of small winning combination E1 at the middle stage cherry stop, or it is at the small winning combination E2 winning time.

The small part F table is used in the game when the small part F is won, and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, the stop position of the reel 31 is set so that any one of the small parts 01 to 39 can be stopped on the effective line. It was decided.
In the present embodiment, the small winning combination F is drawn only during 1BB operation.
Further, regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42, the small winning combination F table performs stop control with priority to the number of sheets. In this way, the small role 39 is always awarded. In addition, in the left reel 31, since it is "PB = 1" arrangement | positioning by 2 symbol totals of "Cherry" or "Bell C", the small winning combination 39 wins by "PB = 1."

  The small part G table is used in the game when the small part G is won, and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, the stop position of the reel 31 is determined so as to stop the small part 40 on the activated line. . The small winning combination 40 is a combination of symbols arranged in “PB = 1” for all the reels 31. Therefore, the small winning combination 40 can always be won in the game.

The 1BBA table is used when playing a game when the item condition device number "1" is won (1BBA alone), or when 1BBA is won before the previous game and is not won in the game this time, and stop control of the reel 31 In the range of, while stopping the combination of symbols corresponding to 1BBA on the effective line, and not stopping the combination of symbols corresponding to roles other than 1BBA on the effective line, determine the combination of symbols when the reel 31 is stopped It is
Since the symbol of 1BBA is "Red 7" on all reels 31 (PB) 1), "Red 7" can not be stopped on the effective line unless the eye is pushed.

Similarly, the 1 BBB table is used when the character condition condition device number “2” is won (1 BBB alone), or the 1 BBB is won before the previous game and is not won in the current game, and the reel 31 In the range of stop control of, while stopping the combination of symbols corresponding to 1 BBB on the effective line, and not to stop the combination of symbols corresponding to roles other than 1 BBB on the effective line, The combination is defined.
Since the symbol of 1BBB is “PB ≠ 1” for all reels 31 as in 1BBA, “red 7” and “black 7” can not be stopped at the effective line unless the eyes are pushed.

  In addition, although the detailed explanation is omitted, in the game in which 1BB and the small winning combination or replay are won twice or in the game in which 1BB is won before the previous game and the small winning combination or replay in this game is won, the following stop control Can be mentioned.

For example, first, priority is given to stopping symbols on both the winning 1BB and small winning combination or replay on the effective line, and when it is not possible to stop both symbols on the effective line, the winning small The stop control which gives priority to stopping the symbol of a role or a replay on an effective line is mentioned. In addition, the stop control to stop the symbols of both 1BB and the small winning combination or the replay on the effective line is up to the second stopping, and at the third stopping, it is controlled to win 1BB or the small winning combination or the replay The role of is not a duplicate prize.
Second, priority is given to stopping the winning 1BB and symbols for both the small part and the replay on the active line, and when it is not possible to stop both symbols on the active line, the winning 1BB There is a stop control (opposite to the above) that gives priority to stopping the symbol of the effective line.

  Furthermore, thirdly, although priority is given to stopping the winning combination or symbol of the replay on the effective line, when stopping the winning combination or symbol of the replay on the effective line, additionally, When it is possible to simultaneously stop the winning 1BB symbol on the activated line, stop control may be made to stop at that position.

When 1BB ("PB ≠ 1") and a small combination or replay of "PB = 1" are won twice (when they are simultaneously selected), the symbol of 1BB won and the combination or small combination or replay It is not necessary to perform control to stop both of the symbol and the effective line, and it is also possible to control to stop only the symbol of "PB = 1" or the symbol of the replay on the effective line. Therefore, since the small roles E1 and E2 are “PB = 1”, only the small roles E1 and E2 are respectively selected when the 1BBA and the small role E1 of this embodiment are double-wined, and when the 1BBB and the small role E2-double-wins. It is also possible to execute stop control to win a prize.

The explanation is returned to FIG.
The prize determination means 66 determines whether or not the combination of symbols of the reel 31 stopped at the effective line matches the combination of symbols corresponding to any of the combinations when the reel 31 is stopped (whether any combination has won Or not). The winning determination means 66 determines the symbol on the activated line by detecting, for example, the angle at which the motor 32 is stopped, the number of steps, and the like.

  The payout means 67 determines that the combination of symbols stopped on the active line when the reel 31 is stopped matches the combination of symbols corresponding to any of the combinations by the prize determination unit 66, and when the combination of the combinations is achieved A predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player according to the winning combination, or processing such as addition of credits is performed. In addition, at the time of winning a replay, control is performed such that the number of medals inserted in the game this time is automatically inserted without paying out medals.

The RT control means 68 determines whether or not the transition condition of RT is satisfied when stopping all reels 31 for each game, and controls to perform the transition of RT when it is determined that the transition condition of RT is satisfied. It is a thing.
FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an RT transition diagram in the present embodiment. As described above, the RT of the present embodiment includes non-RT, RT1 to RT4, 1BBA actuation (1BBA gaming), 1BBB actuation (1BBB gaming). Then, as shown in FIG. 17 and FIG. 18, the types (numbers) of the condition devices to be drawn and the winning probability thereof differ for each RT.

  In this embodiment, the transition timing of RT is set at the time of the stop display of the combination of symbols or the winning of the RT transition combination, that is, the complete stop (at the stop of all the reels 31). Therefore, for example, when the pattern symbol is stopped when all reels 31 are stopped during RT1, RT shifts from RT1 to RT2 when all the reels 31 stop. The transition from non-RT or RT1 to RT3 to RT4 may be made based on the winning of 1BB, or based on the fact that 1BB has not won in the game winning 1BB. It is also good. In the present embodiment, the process shifts to RT4 based on the fact that 1BB has not won in the game winning 1BB.

The non-internal medium game corresponds to non-RT, RT1, RT2 and RT3. In addition, inside during the game, corresponds to RT4.
In addition, during the advantageous section, control is basically made to stay at RT3 as control of the slot machine 10 side, but when a player's push switch mistake of the stop switch 42 or the like occurs, the case of staying at RT2 is also possible. is there. In the case of the advantageous section ending with only one instruction function operation game (except for the game winning the small winning combination C group, the replay B group, and the replay C group), it is not necessary to make it stay at RT3. That is, in the RT2, one command function operation game (excluding the game winning the small winning combination C group, the replay B group, and the replay C group) may be performed to end the advantageous section. Of course, basically, it may be made to stay at RT3.

In the non-RT, non-internal middle game of RT1 to RT3, the lottery of the article condition device is performed. When the player wins 1BB in these RTs and 1BB does not win, the RT control means 68 determines that the transition condition of RT is satisfied, and shifts to RT4 corresponding to the internal middle game.
In addition, when 1BB wins the game which is won by 1BB, in order to start the operation of 1BBA or 1BBB when the game is completely stopped this time, RT4 (internal game) is not passed in this case.

RT 4 is continued until the winning 1 BB wins. When it is determined that 1 BBA or 1 BBB has won in RT4, the RT control means 68 determines that the transition condition of RT is satisfied, and shifts to 1 BBA operation (1 BBA gaming) or 1 BBB operation (1 BBB gaming), respectively.
Once the 1 BBA is in operation, the operation is continued until the 1 BBA operation termination condition is satisfied. In the present embodiment, the operation termination condition of 1BBA is set to the fact that the number of dispensed sheets exceeds 150 sheets.

  The RT control means 68 determines whether or not more than 150 medals have been paid out during each game, 1 BBA operation, and when it is determined that more than 150 medals have been paid out, the termination condition of the 1 BBA operation It is judged that it will satisfy, and it controls to shift to non-RT from the next game.

The same applies to the 1BBB operation as described above. If transition is made during 1BBB operation, the operation is continued until the 1BBB operation termination condition is satisfied. In the present embodiment, the termination condition of the 1 BBB operation is set to the payout of more than 200 medals.
The RT control means 68 determines whether or not each game has been paid out more than 200 medals, and when it is determined that more than 200 medals have been paid out, it determines that the 1 BBB operation end condition is satisfied, From the next game, control to shift to RT1.

  Replay is not included in the counts of 150 or 200 during 1BB operation. As shown in FIG. 17, during the 1BB operation, there is a case in which Replay D may be won, but the automatic bet at the time of Replay winning is not counted in the number of payouts. Therefore, as the replay D is won, the number of games during the 1BB operation increases. Particularly in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17, since the winning probability of replay D during 1 BBA operation is set to 10 times that during 1 BBB operation, the expected value of the number of games during 1 BBA operation is 1 BBB operation. It will be more than the expected value of the number of games played.

During operation of 1BBA and 1BBB, as described above, continuous operation of RB is performed. The RB ends when either of the two winning combinations or two games is satisfied, and after that, the RB is operated again on the condition that the end condition of the 1BB operation is not satisfied.
Further, as shown in FIG. 18, the winning probability of the small winning combination E2 during the 1BBA operation is set higher in the setting 6 than in the setting 1. When the small winning combination E 36 is won and the small winning combination E 2 is won, the number of payouts is two. As a result, the number of games for setting 6 to reach the end condition (that exceeds 150 sheets) during 1 BBA operation is greater than that for setting 1. Therefore, during the 1 BBA operation in the advantageous section, the expectation value for winning the replay D is higher in the setting 6 than in the setting 1, so the probability that the advantageous section is added becomes high. Details of this point will be described in the control of the advantageous section described later.

  At the time of initialization of RWM53, the game starts from non-RT. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the RT may be maintained even when the RWM 53 is initialized. Here, for example, when the RWM 53 is initialized while carrying over the 1BB winning, the 1BB winning is also maintained (carried over).

In the non-RT mode, the RT control means 68 continues the non-RT mode until the pattern pattern is displayed. In the non-RT, a small winning combination B group is drawn, and one of the small winning combination B groups is won, and when the small winning combination is dropped, a pattern symbol is displayed. When the pattern symbol is displayed in the non-RT mode, the RT control means 68 determines that the transition condition of RT is satisfied, and shifts to RT2 from the next game.
In RT1, as in non-RT, RT1 is maintained until the pattern pattern is displayed. And if a pattern figure is displayed in RT1, it will transfer to RT2.

RT2 is an RT in which the staying rate is highest in the normal section. At RT2, when Replay B is won and Replay 02 is won, it is determined that the transition condition of RT is satisfied, and the next game is shifted to RT3.
On the other hand, in RT3, the pattern symbol is displayed or the Replay C group is won, and Replay 03 continues until it is won. When the pattern symbol is displayed or the Replay 03 wins in RT3, it is determined that the transition condition of RT is satisfied, and the next game is shifted to RT2.

  As described above, in the normal section (and in the non-inside), the RT2 and RT3 are generally moved back and forth, but the RT2 stay rate is the highest in probability. When one BB is won in RT2 and RT3 (including non-RT and RT1), the transition from the next game to RT4 (inside) is as described above.

  In addition, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section during the normal section, when the game decided to shift to the advantageous section is the RT3, the instruction function at the time of winning of the replay C group to maintain the RT3 To display the correct order of pressing the Replay 01. This prevents a fall to RT2. Further, when the small winning combination B is won, the correct pressing order for winning the small winning combination 01 is displayed by operating the instruction function. Similarly, when the small winning combination C group is won, the correct pressing order for winning the small winning combination 02 is displayed by operating the instruction function.

On the other hand, when the game decided to shift to the advantageous section is RT2, the correct answer for winning Replay 02 by activating the indication function at the time of Replay B group winning while activating the above indication function The pressing order is displayed, and control is made to shift to RT3.
In addition, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section when it is non-RT or RT1, it shifts to the advantageous section even during non-RT or RT1, but the indication function until the pattern pattern is displayed In the operable game (for example, at the time of winning the small winning combination B group), do not operate the instruction function, and wait until the pattern symbol is displayed. Then, the pattern symbol is displayed in non-RT or RT1, and when it shifts to RT2, the instruction function is operated in the same manner as described above.

The advantageous section control means 69 is a means for executing transition from a normal section to an advantageous section (including a standby section), determination of whether or not to end the advantageous section, addition in the advantageous section, operation control of the indication function, etc. is there.
First, the advantageous section control means 69 determines whether or not to shift to the advantageous section in the normal section and the non-internal middle game.
Further, the advantageous segment control means 69 determines whether or not to add the number of games in the advantageous segment in the advantageous segment and the non-internal middle game.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17, whether or not to shift to the advantageous section during the normal section is simultaneously selected as the advantageous section when a specific condition device is won in the lottery by the role lottery means 61. Decide to migrate. In addition, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, it is limited to not being inside, and it is not decided to shift from the normal section to the advantageous section inside.

Further, as described above, in the case of determining the transition to the advantageous section in accordance with the combination lottery result (condition device that has won), it is not possible to make the condition of winning of the condition device having a setting difference.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17, there is a case where the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section may be made on condition of winning of the condition device common to the setting.

As shown in FIG. 17, for example, at the time of single BBA winning, there are cases in which it is decided to shift to the advantageous section and cases in which it is not decided to shift. When the random number value included in the range of “20” is extracted out of “30” of the numbers allocated to single winning of 1 BBA, it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, and the number “10” When the random value included in the range of is extracted, it is decided not to shift to the advantageous section. The same applies to the single winning of “1BBA + small role D”, “1BBA + small role E1”, and small portion E1.

  In addition, when the condition device shown in FIG. 17 is won during the advantageous section, the advantageous section is added on each case. It should be noted that it is possible to perform an additional drawing lottery instead of uniformly adding an advantageous section when winning in these condition devices, or to draw a lottery whether or not to perform an additional drawing lottery. However, in the present embodiment, in order to simplify the explanation, the addition of the advantageous section is uniformly performed.

When it is determined to shift to the advantageous section in the normal section, the advantageous section of the predetermined number of games may be set, or the number of games of the advantageous section may be determined by lottery or the like. Alternatively, instead of determining the termination condition of the advantageous section by the number of games, the termination conditions other than the number of games (for example, the number of payouts, the number of differences, the number of wins of the small winning combination B group, the number of operations of the instruction function, etc.) may be determined. Good. In the present embodiment, when the condition device shown in FIG. 17 is won in the normal section, the process shifts to an advantageous section in which the end condition is set as follows.
Specifically, for example, the following may be defined.
1BBA single winning case (place number "20"): Initial value is counted after the end of 1BB game and it shifts to the advantageous section of 100 games 1BBA + small combination D duplicate winning case (place number "5"): initial value is 1BB After the end of the game count to shift to the advantageous section of 250 games 1BBA + small combination E1 when double winning combination (place number "20"): The initial value is counted after the end of the 1BB game and shift to the advantageous section of 200 games Small When combination D single winning (place number "50"): The advantageous section of the initial value 150 games small combination E1 when alone winning (place number "250"): the advantage section of the initial value 100 games, or one small role Of the advantageous sections ending with the operation of the instruction function at the time of winning the group B (it may be determined by the lottery, or included in the range of the number “120” of the number “250” Initial value is 10 when the When the random number value included in the range of “130” is extracted as an advantageous section of 0 game, it may be an advantageous section ending with the operation of the instruction function at the time of winning one small winning combination B group)

In addition, since the winning probability of the small winning combination D is lower than the winning probability of the small winning combination E1, in order to give a feeling of premiere when winning the small winning combination D, the number of games in the advantageous section when winning the small winning combination D is small It is set more than at the time of winning combination E1. The number of games in the advantageous section at the time of winning the small winning combination E1 may be set to be larger than that at the time of winning the small winning combination D.
In addition, even when the condition device shown in FIG. 17 is won during the advantageous section, for example, when 1BBA is elected alone, the number of games of the advantageous section is increased by “30”, and the small combination E1 is elected (place “250” Is determined by adding "50" to the number of games, "20" by adding the number of games when the small combination E1 alone is won (number "750"), and so on.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 17, in the normal section, when the small combination E1 alone is won, it is decided to shift to the advantageous section with a probability of “1⁄4” (“250” among all “1000”). Do.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 18, the single winning probability of the small winning combination E 2 is set higher for setting 6 than for setting 1.

Therefore, the higher the setting, the higher the appearance ratio of middle-stage cherries, but the probability that it is determined that the middle-stage cherry appears to shift to the advantageous section is higher in setting 1 than in setting 6.
That is, although there is no setting difference in the probability of deciding to shift to the advantageous section,
The player can be given the impression that there is a setting difference.
In contrast to this embodiment, setting 1 may be set higher than setting 6 for the single winning probability of the small winning combination E2 in FIG. 18.
In this way, the lower the setting, the higher the appearance probability of the middle cherry, but the lower the probability determined to shift to the advantageous section at the middle cherry appearance.
Further, during the advantageous section, when the small combination E1 alone is won, it is always added to the advantageous section. On the other hand, when the small winning combination E2 alone in the advantageous section is won, the advantageous section is not added. Therefore, the higher the setting, the higher the appearance ratio of middle-stage cherries, but the probability that the advantageous section is added when the middle-stage cherries appear is higher in setting 1 than in setting 6. Therefore, although there is no setting difference in the probability that the advantageous section is added, it is possible to give the player an impression that there is a setting difference.

In addition, 1 BBA is a special combination (except when 1 BBA and a small combination D are double-wined) common to set winning combinations, and 1 BBB is a special combination having a setting difference in winning combinations.
In this case, when the 1BBA is selected during the advantageous section and the 1BBA is activated, the advantageous section can be added during the operation of the 1BBA. On the other hand, when it wins 1 BBB which has a setting difference in an advantageous section, and it becomes in operation of 1 BBB, it is defined that it is not possible to add an advantageous section during operation of 1 BBB. It is defined that when 1BBA and minor player D having a set difference in the advantageous section are dually elected and 1BBA is in operation, it is not possible to add the advantageous section while 1BBA is in operation.

On the other hand, when setting 1 and setting 6 are compared during operation of 1 BBA, the winning probability of the small winning combination A is lower in setting 6 than in setting 1, and the winning probability of small winning combination E 2 is set in setting 6 Higher than. Therefore, since the operation termination condition of the 1BBA is set to a payout exceeding 150 sheets, the number of games (expected value) during 1BBA operation is larger in the setting 6 than in the setting 1.
Therefore, for example, if it is set to add the advantageous section when Replay D is won, the expected value of the number of times to win Replay D during 1 BBA operation is higher in Setting 6 than in Setting 1, so the higher the setting, the better. The advantageous section can be easily added.

Furthermore, during 1 BBA operation, when the number of times of playing reaches a predetermined number of times, it may be set to perform the addition of the advantageous section.
As described above, during the 1 BBA operation, the setting 6 has a larger expected value of the number of games played during the 1 BBA operation than the setting 1.
As described above, the operation termination condition of the 1BBA is set to the fact that there is a payout exceeding 150 sheets. On the other hand, the expected payout number per game during the 1 BBA operation is about “8.664” in setting 1 and about “8.557” in setting 6. Accordingly, the expected value of the number of games for which the number of payouts reaches 150 is approximately “17.3” in setting 1 and approximately “17.5” in setting 6.
Therefore, if the number of games reaches, for example, the 18th game during 1BBA operation, it is decided that the advantage section is unconditionally added, the higher the set value, the easier the advantage section is added be able to.
Furthermore, during the 1 BBA operation, it may be set to perform the addition of the advantageous section each time a certain number of games have passed. Also in this case, the higher the set value, the easier the addition of the advantageous section can be performed.

On the other hand, since 1 BBB is a special part having a set difference, it is not possible to add an advantageous section during 1 BBB operation.
Also, as shown in FIG. 22, when 1BBA is finished, it shifts to non-RT, and when it shifts to non-RT, it stays in non-RT until the pattern symbol is displayed, and the pattern symbol is displayed Migrate to RT2. That is, RT1 is not passed after the end of the operation of 1BBA.

  On the other hand, after 1 BBB operation ends, it shifts to RT1 and stays at RT1 until the pattern pattern is displayed. At RT1, a replay E is drawn, and as shown in FIG. 17, if RT1 is in the advantageous section, the advantageous section is added when the replay E is won. As a result, after completion of the 1 BBB operation, the probability of being added to the advantageous section becomes higher than after the completion of the 1 BBA operation. Then, by setting the number of additional games in the advantageous section at the time of Replay E winning to an appropriate value, it is possible to balance between after the end of the 1 BBA operation and after the end of the 1 BBB operation.

  Then, when maintaining the advantageous section and shifting to RT1, the pattern function is not activated in the game capable of operating the instruction function (for example, at the time of winning the small winning combination B group) until the pattern pattern is displayed, the pattern pattern Wait until is displayed. Then, the pattern symbol is displayed in RT1, and when it shifts to RT2, the indication function is operated. When the transition to RT1 with maintaining the advantageous section, during the advantageous section, by activating the instruction function at the time of winning the small combination B group, the small combination 01 wins (unless there is a push order mistake) pattern The symbol is never displayed. For this reason, when transitioning to RT1 during the advantageous section, it is possible to keep staying at RT1 until the advantageous section ends. The indication function is activated when the small winning combination B is won, not until the end of the advantageous section, but after the predetermined number of games, the indication function can be operated until the pattern symbol is displayed. For example, in the case of winning the small winning combination B (group B), the instruction function may not be activated, and the process may wait until the pattern symbol is displayed.

In addition, when it is decided to shift from the normal section to the advantageous section, the advantageous section control means 69 controls to turn on the advantageous section display LED 77 until the predetermined timing comes, and other than the advantageous section (usually When it is a section or a standby section), control is performed to turn off the advantageous section display LED 77.
First, when it is determined that the advantageous section control means 69 shifts to the advantageous section, after the end of the game determined to shift to the advantageous section (all reels 31 are stopped, and when there is a payout, medal Until the next game medal insertion (bet) after payout is possible, and when it has stored medals, until the operation of the settlement switch 46 (settlement processing operation) becomes possible, the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit Control.

Also, secondly, when the transition to the advantageous section is determined based on the winning of the condition device including 1BB capable of carrying over the winning information after the next game, until the combination of the symbols corresponding to 1BB is stopped, Control is performed to turn on the advantageous section display LED 77.
Therefore, if it is determined to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of the condition device that includes the special part, for example, the special part carries over the winning information to the next game like 1BB, 2BB, and RB. In some cases, the advantageous section display LED 77 may be lighted until the combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination is stopped (only in the case where a standby section is provided).

  On the other hand, when the special part is effective only in the game in which the special part has been won like SB, CB, and it is a special part that does not carry over the winning information to the next game, It is necessary to light the advantageous section display LED 77 until the next game medal insertion (bet) is possible and the operation of the settlement switch 46 is possible, as in the case of deciding the transition to the advantageous section based on that. is there.

FIG. 23 is a diagram showing timing 1 and timing 2 as the timing at which the advantageous section display LED 77 is lighted.
In the present embodiment, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, first, as the lighting timing of the advantageous section display LED 77, “After deciding to shift to the advantageous section, after the end of the current game (all Until the reel 31 is stopped and medals for the next game can be inserted (betted) when there is a payout, and the settlement switch 46 can be operated (hereinafter, this timing is referred to as “predetermined timing”). The advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on. Then, when the game start switch 41 is operated next time, the advantageous section starts. That is, in the present embodiment, in principle, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on before the advantageous section starts. This makes it possible to prevent the player from stopping the game without knowing after deciding to shift to the advantageous section.

  In FIG. 23, timing 1 shows an example in this case. In this example, when it is determined that the small winning combination E1 is (independently) and it is decided to shift to the advantageous interval based on the winning of the small winning combination E1, the advantageous interval display LED 77 is turned on by a predetermined timing. As in this example, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of the condition device that does not include the 1BB that can be carried forward after the next game, the winning information is always applied.

Also, secondly, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of the condition device including 1BB capable of carrying over the next game or later, the combination of symbols corresponding to 1BB is displayed By the time, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on. Then, when the start switch 41 of the next game of the game in which the combination of the symbols corresponding to 1BB is displayed is operated, the advantageous section starts. In the present embodiment, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on before the advantageous section starts.
In FIG. 23, timing 2 shows an example in this case. In this example, when 1BBA and the small winning combination E1 are dually won and it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on this double winning, the advantageous section display is performed by the time the symbol combination corresponding to 1BBA is displayed. Turn on the LED 77. Therefore, as long as the combination of symbols corresponding to 1BBA is displayed, the lighting timing may be before that, for example, timing 1 (in the case where a standby section is not provided, etc.).

  Therefore, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of the condition device that includes the special part that can be carried over after the next game, the combination of symbols corresponding to the special part is displayed uniformly. It may be determined to turn on the advantageous section display LED 77 when it is done. Alternatively, even if the transition to the advantageous section based on the winning of the condition device that includes the special role, it is uniformly decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of the conditional device that does not include the special role. Similar to the time, the advantageous section display LED 77 may be lighted by a predetermined timing.

Alternatively, the lighting timing may be determined by lottery or the like when it is determined to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of the condition device including the special part that can be carried over after the next game.
Also, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of the condition device that includes the special part that can be carried over after the next game, for example, other than timing 1 and timing 2 shown in FIG. In the next game of the game winning the special part, when the start switch 41 is operated, during rotation of at least a part of the reels 31, or when the third stop switch 42 is operated (regardless of presence or absence of winning of the part) It may be

In that case, when the start switch 41 of the next game of the game is operated, the advantageous section will start (the standby section will be ended in the next game of the game won by the special combination). In addition, after the next game after the game for which the special part is won, the game in which it is possible to win the special part, when the start switch 41 is operated, rotation of at least a part of the reels 31 It may be middle or at the time of operation of the third stop switch 42 (regardless of the presence or absence of the winning of the combination) or the like. In that case, when the start switch 41 of the next game of the game is operated, the advantageous section will be started (the standby section will be ended in the game where it is possible to win the special part) ).

Here, for example, at the time of winning of the small combination E1, it is possible to stop the "red 7"-"cherry"-"red 7" (Fig. 9) of the number 59 in the small combination 36. Then, it is assumed that "red 7"-"rotating"-"red 7" has stopped as a result of pinching in the game when 1 BBA is won. Next, the player aimed at "Cherry" at the time of stopping the middle reel 31, but when "Cherry" did not stop on the effective line (it was controlled to kick), the small player E1 was elected in the game concerned It can be seen that Then, in this case, if the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on by a predetermined timing, the player will know that it is a single winning of 1BBA, and in the next game of the 1BBA winning, the symbol of 1BBA It becomes possible to look at the combination of That is, the lighting of the advantageous section display LED 77 functions as a notification of winning of 1BBA. This is because it is not decided to shift to the advantageous section at the time of losing (when not winning). Conventionally, when 1BB is won, etc., there is a tendency to perform 1BB election notification after performing continuous effects (effect to ask if 1BB is won or not), but the advantageous section display LED 77 is displayed by a predetermined timing. If it is turned on, such continuous effects are wasted.
Therefore, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of the condition device that includes the 1BB that can be carried over after the next game, the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned on until the winning 1BB wins. To have.

On the other hand, when it is determined to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of “1 BBA + small winning combination E1”, if priority is given to the winning combination of the small winning combination E1 in the game, the 1 BBA does not win in the game.
On the other hand, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the single winning combination of the small winning combination E1, it is necessary to turn on the advantageous section display LED 77 by a predetermined timing (since a standby section can not be provided) ).
Therefore, when it is decided to shift to the advantage section based on the winning of "1 BBA + small winning combination E1," if it is made not to light the advantageous section display LED 77 until the winning 1 BBA wins, the small winning combination E1 When the advantageous section display LED 77 is lighted up by a predetermined timing at the time of winning a prize, the player knows that 1 BBA has not been won twice.

  Therefore, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of “1 BBA + small combination E1”, when the advantageous section display LED 77 is lighted by the predetermined timing (the timing 1 shown in FIG. 23), A case (timing 2 shown in FIG. 23) is provided in which the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned on even after the timing has passed. Which section to use is, for example, distributed according to the unit number at the time of winning "1BBA + small combination E1", or advantageous period at the time of winning "1BBA + small combination E1" (only when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section) A lottery (two-step lottery) may be performed to determine whether the display LED 77 is to be lighted immediately (whether or not a standby section is provided). As a result, even if the advantageous section display LED 77 is lighted by the predetermined timing, it does not mean that 1 BBA is not repeatedly won, and the player's expectation can be continuously felt.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the small combination E1 is set to “PB = 1”, the small combination E1 is always selected either when “1 BBA + small combination E1” is won or when the small combination E1 alone is elected. The small part E1 (small part 36 or 38) is won in the game.
However, it is also possible to set the small combination included in the condition device of the small combination E1 to “PB ≠ 1”. Then, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section when the “1 BBA + small combination E1” is won when the small combination included in the condition device of the small combination E1 is set to “PB ≠ 1”, At the time of winning, the advantageous section display LED 77 is lighted by a predetermined timing, but when the small winning combination E1 is not winning, it is possible to control the advantageous section display LED 77 not to light even after the predetermined timing has passed.

  However, not limited to the above, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of the condition device that includes the special part that can be carried over after the next game, the advantageous section display LED 77 always by a predetermined timing. May be turned on (always at the timing 1 shown in FIG. 23), or the advantageous section display LED 77 may not always be turned on even after the predetermined timing has passed (always shown in FIG. 23). Timing 2).

In addition, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section at the time of single winning of the small winning combination D and at the single winning of the small winning combination E1, it is necessary to light the advantageous section display LED 77 by a predetermined timing (provide a standby section It can not be done), so it becomes a so-called prompt notification and can not meet the expectations of the player.
Therefore, as described above, at the time of single winning of the small combination E1, 2 of the advantageous interval continuing until the predetermined number of games have been digested, and the advantageous interval ending by the operation of the instruction function at the time of one small combination B group winning Provide a type. Then, after turning on the advantageous section display LED 77, during the first winning combination of the small combination B group, an effect that beats the expectation (it is an advantageous section that continues until it digests the predetermined game frequency as a final result By outputting a continuous effect indicating whether or not the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on by a predetermined timing, it is possible to satisfy the expectation of the player thereafter. Even if the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on, it is not known at the time of turning on whether the advantageous section continues until the predetermined game number of times is reached.

It should be noted that even when the small winning combination E1 is won alone, when the transition to the advantageous section is not made, the advantageous section display LED 77 is not lighted at all, so it is necessary to output a continuous presentation Absent.
In addition, when the above-mentioned condition device is won, it is not set to one winning combination of small winning combination B group (one indication function operation game) or a predetermined number of games, but an indicating function at the winning combination of small winning combination B group It is also possible to determine the number of times of operation by lottery, for example, within the range of 1 to 50 times, or the like.

  As a specific process for lighting the advantageous section display LED 77, the eighth bit of the segment data for displaying the digit 2 is changed from "0" to "1". Since segment data for displaying the digit 2 is stored in the RWM 53, the segment data is changed. For example, data obtained by ORing “10000000” with segment data up to that point is stored in the RWM 53 as new data. Thus, in the segment data of digit 2, the value corresponding to the segment DP becomes "1".

Also, as described above, the digit of the present embodiment is provided with a total of nine digits 1 to 9. As a method of lighting these digits, control as follows can be mentioned.
The main control board 50 executes an "interruption process" every 2.235 ms in parallel with the main process, in addition to "the (main process) main process" which is a process repeated every game. In this interrupt processing, lighting control of the LED, drive control of the reel 31, transmission processing of an external signal, and the like are performed. Then, in the present embodiment, dynamic lighting is performed on the digits 1 to 9 so that one digit is lit for each interrupt processing. For example, only the digit 1 is turned on in the current interrupt processing, and the digit 2 is turned on in the next interrupt processing. By repeating this, one digit is lit at a rate of once in nine interrupt processing. Not limited to such dynamic lighting, static lighting may be performed in which a signal line is connected to each digit.

Accordingly, when it is time to light the advantageous section display LED 77, the segment data is changed as described above. After the change, when the lighting timing of the digit 2 comes by the interrupt processing, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on.

  Further, in the game in which the instruction function should be operated during the advantageous section, the advantageous section control means 69 obtains the number of winnings by operating the instruction function separately from the notification of the correct pressing order by the sub control board 80 described later. The display order information is displayed on the display LED 78. For example, when the small winning combination B1 is won, pressing order instruction information "= 1" corresponding to the pressing order instruction number "A1" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. This control corresponds to the “operation of the indication function” in the present embodiment.

It is to be an indication function operation game during the advantageous section,
1) Non-RT and RT1: When the small winning combination C is won (when the small winning combination B is won, there is no operation of the instruction function since the pattern symbol is desired to be displayed)
2) RT2: Replay B group winning, Small winning combination B winning, and Small winning combination C winning 3) RT3: Replay C winning combination, Small winning combination B winning, and Small winning combination C winning .

Furthermore, as described above, when the small winning combination A is won, the instruction function is activated as a dummy. When winning the small role A, since the small portion 01 wins with no order of pressing, it is not disadvantageous to the player no matter which order of pressing is indicated, so even if a specific pressing order is displayed, the game is played It does not harm the fairness of
Specifically, when the small winning combination A is won, it is possible to select any one of the push order instruction numbers “A1” to “A3” by lottery using random numbers and the like.

  Further, when the small winning combination E1 is won when approaching the upper limit of the advantageous section, the advantageous section control means 69 selects the pushing order instruction number "A3" and displays the pushing order of the right first stop. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the middle stage cherry from appearing when approaching the upper limit of the advantageous section.

  In the present embodiment, during the advantageous section, the advantageous section is added when the small combination E1 is won, and the advantageous section is not added when the small combination E2 is elected, so always when the small combination E2 is selected during the advantageous section The first right stop may be displayed so that the middle row cherry is not displayed. In particular, since the advantageous section is always added when the small winning combination E1 in the advantageous section is won, it is possible to give the player an impression that the advantageous section is added by the middle row cherry being displayed. Therefore, when it is not desired to display the middle row cherry in a game in which the advantageous section is not added (when the small winning combination E2 is won), the right first stop is displayed.

  In addition, for example, when approaching the upper limit of the advantageous section (when the advantageous section can not be added), it is either of the winning of the small combination E1 and the winning of the small combination E2 to prevent the middle row cherry from being displayed. Also, the right first stop is displayed by the operation of the instruction function, and the middle row cherry is not displayed.

In the present embodiment, the upper limit game number of the advantageous section is set to “1500 games”. Therefore, for example, when the small winning combination E1 (and E2) is won when the number of games since the start of the advantageous section is "1400 games" or more, the right first stop is displayed by operating the instruction function .
As described above, the "operation of the indication function" in the present invention refers to the display of the operation mode of the stop switch 42 which is advantageous to the player, but in the present embodiment, the appearance of the middle stage cherry is avoided The display of the order of pressing is also included in the "operation of the indication function". Of course, such a case may not be included in the "operation of the indication function", and the display of the order of pressing may be performed only on the image display device 23.

In the present embodiment, as a counter for counting the number of games regarding the advantageous section, an advantageous section counter 69a and an upper limit counter 69b are provided (see FIG. 1).
When it is determined to shift to the advantageous section, the advantageous section counter 69a sets an initial value of the number of times of playing (for example, “100”) determined at that time. Then, every time one game is consumed, the count value is decremented, and when it becomes "0", the advantageous section is ended. The decrement may be performed from the game shifted to the advantageous section, or may be performed after the end of the 1BB game. In addition, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, the advantageous section counter 69a does not have to set the initial value of the number of games (for example, "100") determined at that time, and after the end of the 1BB game The initial value may be set.
Furthermore, when the advantageous section is added during the advantageous section, a value corresponding to the added value is added to the current count value of the advantageous section counter 69a.

  For example, when the count value of the advantageous section counter 69a is "55", it is determined to add the advantageous section, and when the number of added games is "30", the count value is set from "55" to "55". Update to "85". Then, every time one game is digested, "84", "83", etc. are decremented one game at a time.

  In addition, when it becomes during 1 BBA operation (except those based on the double winning of 1 BBA and small part D), although it continues the count with the advantageous section counter 69a, when 1 BBB becomes active, the advantageous section counter 69a Stop counting by. In this embodiment, in this embodiment, it is possible to add an advantage section during 1 BBA operation (except for those based on double winning of 1 BBA and a small player D), but during 1 BBB operation, it is possible to add Since the addition is not performed, in order to balance the two (as during the 1BBB operation during the advantageous section is not extremely disadvantageous to the player than during the 1BBBA operation) is set as described above. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the counting by the advantageous section counter 69a may be continued during any of 1BBA and 1BBB, or during any of 1BBA and 1BBB, the advantageous section counter. The counting by 69a may be interrupted.

  On the other hand, after winning 1BBA or 1BBB during the advantageous section, counting by the advantageous section counter 69a is continued until 1BBA or 1BBB is won (inside), respectively. When the 1BB is won or when it is notified that the 1BB is won, the counting by the advantageous segment counter 69a may be interrupted at that time. Even when it is decided to interrupt the counting by the advantageous section counter 69a when 1BB is won, the number of remaining games of the advantageous section displayed on the image display device 23 is until it is notified that 1BB has been won. Alternatively, one game may be decremented.

It should be noted that there is a case in which a condition device in which 1BB is included in the normal section is won (for example, a double winning of 1BBA and a small winning combination E1) and transition to an advantageous section is made based on the selection of the condition device. In this case, the standby section is started from the next game (only when the standby section is provided), and the inside of the 1BB is reached.
On the other hand, when the conditional device in which the 1BB is included in the advantageous section is won, the advantageous section and the inside of the 1BB are included, and the addition of the advantageous section is not performed during the inside of the 1BB in the advantageous section.

Therefore, when the condition device including 1BB is won in the normal section and the transition to the standby section is made and the transition to the advantageous section has not been made yet, it is notified that the longer lingering effect (1BB is elected or not It is considered that, even if, for example, a continuous effect for a plurality of games is output, it is not so disadvantageous to the player. During the waiting period, since it is not in the advantageous period, the counting (decrement) by the advantageous period counter 69a and the counting (decrement) of the upper limit counter 69b described later are not performed.
On the other hand, when the conditional device in which 1BB is included in the advantageous section is won and the inside becomes internal, even after being inside, the count (decrement) by the advantageous section counter 69a and the upper limit counter 69b described later Count (decrement) is performed. In this case, since it is not possible to add an advantageous section, it is preferable to early notify of the 1BB winning without performing a long-turn effect longer than necessary.
Specifically, for example, it is possible to set the average number of games for the former to a beat effect, and set the average number of games for the toe effect to 2 games.

  On the other hand, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section in which the instruction function is activated at the time of one small winning combination B group winning in the small winning combination E1 alone, in the present embodiment, the advantageous interval counter 69a is counted. Do not set the value. In this case, regardless of the count value of the advantageous section counter 69a, the advantageous section is continued until the small winning combination B is won. When the small winning combination B is won and the instruction function is activated, it is determined that the termination condition of the advantageous section is satisfied in the present game, and the advantageous section is ended.

  When the number of operations of the instruction function at the time of winning the small winning combination B group is given in advance as the termination condition of the advantageous section, a counter (decrement counter) for counting the number of games at the time of winning the small winning combination B group is provided. "1" may be set. Then, once activating the instruction function at the time of winning the small winning combination B group, the count value becomes “0”, and it may be determined that the termination condition of the advantageous section is satisfied.

It should be noted that it is possible to determine whether or not the current game is an advantageous section by providing something like an advantageous section flag and turning "on" during the advantageous section.
However, in the present embodiment, the eighth bit in the segment data of digit 2 plays the role of the advantageous interval flag. As described above, when it is determined that the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied in the game this time, or when the count value of the advantageous section counter 69a becomes "0", the eighth bit in the segment data of the digit 2 is "0. Execute the process to

  In addition, when it is elected to the small winning combination E1 alone and it is decided to shift to the advantageous segment, it shifts to the advantageous segment of fixed number of times of playing, or by the operation of the indication function at the time of one small winning combination B group winning A lottery is made to decide whether to shift to an advantageous section (a so-called fake advantageous section) that ends. Here, how to allocate the probability between the former and the latter is arbitrary.

Then, for example, when it is decided to win the small winning combination E1 alone and to shift to the advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on by a predetermined timing, and an effect is output to show which advantageous section has been shifted. (It may be continued until the small winning combination B is won). Next, when the small winning combination B is won, after activating the instruction function in the game, if it is an advantageous section ending with the operation of one instruction function, the advantageous section ends with the current game (advantage Turn off the zone display LED 77). On the other hand, when shifting to the advantageous section of the predetermined number of games, the advantageous section is continued even after the next game (the lighting of the advantageous section display LED 77 is maintained).
In the above example, it is assumed that the small winning combination B is won before the predetermined number of games is reached from the start of the advantageous section.

Also, the upper limit counter 69b always starts counting (when it is determined to shift to the advantageous section or at the start of the advantageous section, "1500" is set) when the advantageous section is started, and then the advantageous Until the end of the section, the count value is decremented by one for each game without interrupting the count in any case. Also, for example, counting is continued even during 1BB operation. This point is different from the advantageous interval counter 69a. Note that the advantageous section counter 69a and the upper limit counter 69b may increment the count value from "0" every "1" every one game.

  And, when the value of the upper limit counter 69b becomes "0", the advantageous section control means 69 sets the advantageous section in the current game even if the count value of the advantageous section counter 69a exceeds "0". Forced to end (update the count value of the advantageous section counter 69a to "0"), turn off the advantageous section display LED 77 (update the 8th bit in the segment data of digit 2 to "0"). Thus, the count value of the upper limit counter 69b is given top priority in the advantageous section, and when the count value of the upper limit counter 69b becomes "0", the advantageous section is ended even if 1BB is in operation.

In addition, during the advantageous section, it is necessary to execute at least once an instruction function operation game in which the number of payouts is nine (the maximum number of payouts in a specified number of three). Therefore, in the advantageous section, it is necessary to execute the instruction function activation game at least once when the small winning combination B is won, but when the value of the upper limit counter 69 b becomes “0”, the small winning combination B is performed only once. Even if the command function operation game has not been executed at the time of winning the group, or even if it has not won the small role B group at least once, the advantageous section is terminated (forced) in the game this time, and the advantageous section display LED 77 Turn off the light.
Further, with reference to the values of the advantageous section counter 69a and the upper limit counter 69b, the number of remaining games or the number of digested games may be displayed as an image in the image display device 23.

In FIG. 1, the external signal transmission unit 70 transmits an external signal to the external concentrated terminal board 100. The external signal is a signal indicating the start of the advantageous section, the end of the advantageous section, the start of the 1BB operation, the end of the 1BB operation, and the like.
The main control board 50 executes a game end check process for each game, and updates the external signal control number at the game end check process.
In the present embodiment, the “external signal control number” is a number that takes different values according to the start of the advantageous section, the end of the advantageous section, the start of the 1BB operation, and the end of the 1BB operation.

  Also, when the start switch 41 is operated, the external signal flag is updated so as to have a value corresponding to the external signal control number. Then, after the external signal flag is updated, the external signal transmission unit 70 transmits an external signal corresponding to the external signal flag from the output port 52. This external signal is transmitted to the hall computer 200 when input to the external concentrated terminal plate 100. Then, the external signal is output to, for example, a data counter.

The control command transmission unit 71 transmits information (control command) necessary for the effect output from the sub control substrate 80 to the sub control substrate 80.
The control command includes, for example, a first control command and a second control command. Each of the first control command and the second control command is, for example, 8-bit 1-byte data. One control command is a pair of the first control command and the second control command. Furthermore, the first control command is data indicating a type of control command, and the second control command is data indicating a parameter (variable).

For example, in the case of a control command indicating RT, the first control command is “33 (H)” (00110011 (B)) in the present embodiment. Further, when the parameter of RT is, for example, RT1, it becomes “00000001 (B)” in the present embodiment. Therefore, 2-byte data combining these, “00110011/00000001” (“/” indicates between the first control command and the second control command, and is not actually) is a control command of RT. As, the main control board 50 is transmitted to the sub control board 80.
As for the push order instruction number (only in the advantageous section), the effect group number, and the item condition device number, the first control command is the type data and all the second control commands are RWM 53 as in the case of the RT. Data stored in the

  The control command transmission unit 71 does not transmit the winning and replay condition device numbers to the sub control board 80. For example, when the pushing order bell is won, there is a possibility that the wrong pushing order may be known based on the winning and replay condition device number due to the injustice. On the other hand, the item condition device number has no risk of such fraudulent acts as described above. Therefore, for example, when 1 BBA has been won, an item condition device number "1" is transmitted to the sub control board 80.

In addition, when the player wins a conditional device having an order of correct answer pressing during an advantageous section, an order-of-pressing instruction number corresponding to the order of correct answer pressing is acquired and stored in RWM 53. On the other hand, when the conditional device which is in the advantageous section and does not have the correct pressing order is elected, acquisition of the pressing order instruction number and storage in the RWM 53 are not performed. Here, at the start of each game, the data of the push order instruction number of RWM 53 is cleared, but the data after the clear is "A0". Therefore, the data of the push order instruction number of the RWM 53 is “A0” except during the advantageous section and when the condition device having the correct push order is won.
In addition, during the normal section or the standby section, even if the condition device having the correct touch order is won, the acquisition of the push order instruction number and the storage in the RWM 53 are not performed.

Then, at the time of winning of the condition device in the advantageous section and having the correct touch order, the control command transmission unit 71 transmits a push order instruction number to the sub control board 80.
The control command transmission unit 71 transmits information of “A0” as a push order instruction number except in the advantageous section and at the time of winning of the condition device having the correct touch order.
Furthermore, when not in the advantageous section, the control command transmission unit 71 does not transmit the push order instruction number to the sub control board 80. When not in the advantageous section, the control command transmission unit 71 may uniformly transmit the push order instruction number of “A0”, but in the present embodiment, the push order instruction is not issued in the advantageous section The number is not transmitted to the sub control board 80.

In FIG. 1, the sub CPU 85 of the sub control board 80 includes an effect output control unit 91.
As described above, the effect output control means 91 controls the control command transmitted from the main control board 50, specifically, each control such as the RT number, push order instruction number, effect group number, role condition condition device number, etc. Based on the command, at what timing (when operating the start switch 41, when operating each stop switch 42, etc.), what effect is to be output (how to turn on, blink or extinguish the lamp 21) The specific effect contents such as what kind of sound is to be output from the speaker 22 and what kind of image is displayed on the image display device 23 are determined by lottery.

  And the effect output control means 91 controls the output of the effect lamp 21, the speaker 22, and the image display apparatus 23 according to the determination. In addition, during the 1BB operation and during the advantageous section, the number of games acquired, the number of games (the number of remaining games or the number of digested games) and the like are displayed as an image. Furthermore, during the advantageous section, when the instruction function is activated, the correct pressing order is notified (image display). For example, when the small winning combination B1 is won in the game during the advantageous section and the control command corresponding to the push order instruction number "A1" is received, the correct push order "First stop left" or "1- ○ The player informs the player of contents that the player can easily know the pressing order, such as “-○” and the like. In the advantageous section, when the push order instruction number of “A0” is received, the push order is not notified.

Furthermore, it can be said that the control command of the effect group number does not include information on which condition device has actually been won, but includes rough win information. For example, when the control command corresponding to the effect group number "5" is received, the sub control board 80 can not know whether the small combination A, the small combination B or the small combination C is won. . However, it is possible to know whether the player has won the small combination A, the small combination B or the small combination C. Therefore, it is possible to output effects such as displaying a symbol of "bell" or lighting a frame lamp with "yellow" that is a corresponding color of "bell".

Here, when the small winning combination A is won, the small winning combination 01 always wins even when the stop switch 42 is operated in any pressing order, so immediately after the start switch 41 is operated, that is, the first stop switching It is possible to perform a bell (yellow) effect before the is operated.
On the other hand, when the small winning combination B or small winning combination C is won during the normal section, the bell (yellow) effect may be performed when the small winning combination 01 is decided, that is, after the first stop switch 42 is operated. preferable. Of course, it may be after the operation of the second stop switch 42 or after the operation of the third stop switch 42.

However, if the output timing of the effect when winning the small winning combination A and the output timing of the effect when winning the small winning combination B group or the small winning combination C group are different, based on the difference in the timing, Since it is possible to determine whether the winning combination has been won or the small winning combination B or small winning combination C, it is possible to count the number of winning combinations of the small winning combination A, and it is possible to estimate the set value.
Therefore, when the small winning combination A is won in the normal section, the same timing as the pressing order correct answer at the small winning combination B or small winning combination C group start, for example, the bell effect output starts immediately after the operation of the first stop switch 42 If so, it can be made impossible to determine which of the small combination A, the small combination B and the small combination C has been won. In particular, in the present embodiment, when the player wins any of the small role A, the small role B group, or the small role C group, the control command corresponding to the same effect group number “5” is transmitted. . Thus, on the side of the sub control board 80 which has made the same effect group number ("5") of the small role A, the small portion B group, and the small role C group and received the effect group number, for example, the first stop switch If the effect is designed to be output at the timing immediately after the 42 operations, the effect group numbers of the small player A, the small player B group, and the small player C group are made different (“5” to “7”) Design that is more efficient than in the previous case (in the latter case, even when any of the effect group numbers “5” to “7” is received, the effect is output immediately after the operation of the first stop switch 42, for example) It is inefficient because it must be designed to

FIGS. 24 and 25 show the timing of transmitting the control command of the push order instruction number, the effect group number, and the item condition device number, and the display of push order instruction information by the acquisition number display LED 78 ) And the notification (the notification on the sub side) of the pressing order of the correct answer by the image display device 23). FIG. 24 and FIG. 25 show four examples 1 to 4.
In FIG. 24 and FIG. 25, first, when the start switch 41 is operated by the player, the lottery of the condition device is performed by the combination lottery means 61, and the effect group number corresponding to the condition device which has won is determined. In addition, when it is in the advantageous section, the pushing order instruction number corresponding to the winning conditional device is determined.

  Furthermore, the main control board 50 transmits, to the sub-control board 80, control commands of the push order instruction number (only during the advantageous section), the effect group number, and the feature condition device number. When the sub control board 80 is in the advantageous section, the sub control board 80 notifies the correct pressing order based on the received pressing order instruction number. On the other hand, when the main control board 50 is in the advantageous section, the pressing order instruction information corresponding to the pressing order instruction number is displayed by the operation of the instruction function.

In the “example 1” of FIG. 24, when the pushing order instruction number is determined, the pushing order instruction information is first displayed by the operation of the instructing function by the main control board 50. Thereafter, the push order instruction number is transmitted, and then the effect group number and the feature condition device number are transmitted. Next, the sub control board 80 determines that the start switch 41 has been operated in response to the reception of the item condition device number, and notifies the correct pressing order based on the received pressing order instruction number. The display of the pressing order instruction information and the notification of the correct pressing order are performed before the reel 31 reaches the constant speed rotation.

  Further, as in the present embodiment, when the correct pressing order is the so-called 3 choice (first stop), the notification of the correct pressing order by the image display device 23 operates the first (first) stop switch 42. Until On the other hand, for example, when the correct answer pressing order is a so-called six option, the notification of the correct answer pressing order by the image display device 23 is until the third (last) stop switch 42 is operated. As in the present embodiment, even if the correct pressing order is a so-called three choice, it is needless to say that notification of the correct pressing order may be continued until the third (last) stop switch 42 is operated. is there.

  In the present embodiment, when the first stop switch 42 is operated, the control command is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80 as described above, so the sub control board 80 receives this control command. Thus, it can be determined that the first stop switch 42 has been operated. When the first stop switch 42 is operated, the notification of the pressing order of the correct answer by the image display device 23 is ended. It is a matter of course to continue the effects other than the correct touch order, for example, the image display (display of a character, etc.) peculiar to the advantageous section.

Furthermore, the display of the pressing order instruction information by the number-of-acquisitions display LED 78 is until a winning determination is made on the main control board 50. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the correct touch order is 3 options as in the present embodiment, the display of the push order instruction information may be performed until the first stop switch 42 is operated.
The display of the acquisition number display LED 78 after the display of the push order instruction information is “00” (upper digit and lower digit indicate “0”), “* 0” (upper digit is off (*), lower digit is “ “0” is displayed, “**” (upper digit and lower digit are unlit), “−−” (both upper digit and lower digit are lighting segment G only), and the like.

  In "Example 2" of FIG. 24, after the push order instruction number is transmitted to the sub control board 80 by the main control board 50, the push order indication information is displayed on the number-of-gains display LED 78 by operation of the indication function. Send the number and item condition device number. After receiving the effect group number and the character article condition device number, the sub control board 80 notifies the correct pressing order.

  In the “example 3” of FIG. 25, after the main control board 50 transmits the pressing order instruction number, the effect group number, and the feature condition device number, the sub control board 80 performs the correct pressing order with the image display device 23. After notification, the main control board 50 displays pressing order instruction information by the operation of the instruction function at the moment (or immediately before) the reel 31 has been rotated at a constant speed. In Examples 1 and 2 described above, the operation of the instruction function by the main control board 50 (display of push order instruction information) is performed at a timing earlier than notification of the correct push order by the sub control board 80. . On the other hand, in the third example, the notification of the pressing order of the correct solution by the sub control board 80 is performed at a timing earlier than the operation of the instruction function by the main control board 50 (display of pressing order instruction information).

“Example 4” in FIG. 25 is to perform operation of the instruction function by the main control board 50 (display of push order instruction information) and notification of the correct push order by the sub control board 80 at substantially the same timing. . When performing control in this manner, for example, the indication function is activated after “N” ms has elapsed since the push order indication number or the character article condition device number is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80 (push order indication The display of information is started, and the sub control board 80 controls to start notification of the correct push order after “N” ms has elapsed since the push order instruction number or the character article condition device number is received. Can be mentioned.

Although four examples are shown in FIG. 24 and FIG. 25, it is preferable that the operation of the instruction function (display of push order instruction information) is performed after the start switch 41 is operated until the reel 31 reaches constant speed rotation. . Moreover, it is preferable to perform the pushing order notification by the sub control board 80 side after the operation of the instruction function by the main control board 50 side. By setting in this manner, the main control board 50 transmits an incorrect push order instruction number to the sub control board 80, or the sub control board 80 reports a push order different from the received push order instruction number. Even in this case, since the main control board 80 has already displayed the pressing order instruction information, the player notices an error in notification by the sub control board 80, and the player also suffers a disadvantage. Absent.
In addition, although the operation of the instruction function (display of push order instruction information) by the main control board 50 side is performed until the winning determination time, it may be until the third reel 31 is stopped.

  Subsequently, the operation of the instruction function (display of push order instruction information) and the case of performing notification of the correct press order will be described more specifically. FIG. 26 is a diagram for explaining the flow of the game (flow from top to bottom in the drawing), the display of the number-of-ears display LED 78, and an example of notification by the image display device 23. The example of FIG. 26 corresponds to the timing of “example 1” of FIG.

In the command function operation game during the advantageous section, first, when the start switch 41 is operated, the main control board 50 operates the command function and displays the pressing order command information on the number-of-gains display LED 78. The example of FIG. 26 shows an example in which the small winning combination B1 is won. Therefore, the acquisition number display LED 78 displays push order instruction information corresponding to the push order instruction number “A1”, that is, “= 1”.
Then, before the reel 31 reaches constant speed rotation, the image display device 23 notifies the correct pressing order. The example of FIG. 26 shows an example in which “1 ○” is displayed.

Next, when the first (first) stop switch 42 is operated and the left stop switch 42 is operated, that is, when it is the correct pressing order, the effect that the pressing order is correct by the image display device 23 Output (correct answer effect). On the other hand, when the pressing order is incorrect, the image display of the correct pressing order is deleted.
In this embodiment, since the pressing order correct / incorrect answer is determined by the operation of the first stop switch 42, the notification (image display) regarding the correct pressing order is ended when the first stop switch 42 is operated. In the case of 6 options, it is possible to continue to notify the correct pressing order until the second stop switch 42 is operated or until the third stop switch 42 is operated.

  Further, in the example of FIG. 26, the operation of the instruction function (display of push order instruction information) continues to be displayed until the winning determination is made (the same applies to Example 1 of FIG. 24). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the incorrect pressing order is reached, the operation of the instruction function (display of the number-of-acquisitions display LED 78) may be ended as in the notification of the correct pressing order by the image display device 23. . Further, as in the present embodiment, when the correct pressing order is 3 options, when the first stop switch 42 is operated, an instruction (even if the first stop switch 42 is operated in the correct pressing order) The function may be terminated.

  However, it is desirable to end the operation of the instruction function after the notification by the image display device 23 is stopped. This is to prevent the pressing order notification from being performed on the sub control board 80 side even though the instruction function is not operated on the main control board 50 side. However, of course, the operation of the instruction function may be ended simultaneously with the end of the notification by the image display device 23, or the operation of the instruction function may be ended before the end of the notification by the image display device 23.

Of course, even if the pressing order is incorrect, the notification of the pressing order may be continued for the image display device 23 as well.
However, if the pressing order notification by the image display device 23 is stopped when the pressing order is incorrect, it is possible to switch to another effect.

  When all the reels 31 stop, a winning determination is made. Here, when the small part 01 gets a prize and nine medals are paid out, the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 shows that nine medals have been paid out from the display “1” of the pressing order instruction information. It changes to "09" shown. When one winning combination is won due to a pushing order error or the like, “01” is displayed, and when the combination is dropped, “00” (or “**”) is displayed. It should be noted that "= 1" → "00" (in order to temporarily reset the display, "00" is displayed from "= 1" of the push order instruction information to the display of the medal payout number "09". ) → "09" may be displayed.

Alternatively, “= 1” → “**” (the upper digit and the lower digit are turned off to temporarily reset the display) → “09” may be displayed.
Furthermore, when the player operates the bet switch 40 or the medal is placed after the maintenance of the medal, and the medal is bet, the display content is changed to "00" to clear the content of the acquired number displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 Allow ("**" may be used).

In FIG. 1, the management information control unit 72 is a unit that controls (stores, calculates, displays, etc.) management information displayed on the management information display LED 74.
In the present embodiment, the information to be displayed on the management information display LED 74 is
(1) Ratio of advantageous intervals (total)
(2) Continuous role ratio (6000 games (15 sets in total))
(3) Character ratio (6000 games (15 sets total))
(4) Continuous role ratio (total)
(5) Role ratio (total)
(See FIG. 38 described later).

First, “percentage of advantageous section (percentage of stay in advantageous section)” means the ratio of advantageous sections to all game sections (normal section + standby section + advantageous section) Ratio). For example, in the gaming section of "10000" number of times of playing, when the number of times of playing of the advantageous section is "7000", the advantageous section ratio is "70 (%)".
Further, in the present embodiment, one set is set as the "400" game frequency. Then, the total of 15 sets, that is, the "6000" number of games is set as the "total", and each ratio in the "6000" number of games is calculated.

  Furthermore, “total” refers to the sum of the numerical values that have been continuously counted so far, and in the present embodiment, it is counted for the purpose of becoming at least “175000” game times or more. Then, when the cumulative total is less than the "175000" number of games, the cumulative value is displayed by blinking display, for example, and when it is equal to or more than the "175000" number of games, the cumulative value is displayed by lighting, for example. The cumulative total continues to be added until the value (upper limit value) which can be stored in the predetermined address of the RWM 53 is reached even after the number of times “175000” is reached or more.

“Continuous role ratio” refers to the ratio of the number of medals obtained when the first type special role (RB) is activated to the total number of medals obtained. Therefore, in the present embodiment, “the number of medals acquired during 1BB operation with respect to the total number of medals acquired”.
For example, when the medal acquisition number in the "6000" game number is "2000", and the medal acquisition number in the "type I special role (RB)" operation is "500" among them,
The "continuous character ratio (6000 games)" is "25 (%)".

Also, the “feature ratio” refers to the ratio of the number of medals obtained at the time of feature operation to the total number of medals obtained. Here, in addition to the above-mentioned first-class special features, the "features" means second-class special features (CB), 2BB (second-type continuously acting device, CB continuously operating), SB (Single bonus) is included.
And in this embodiment, since CB, 2BB, and SB are not provided, a character item ratio becomes the same value as a continuous character ratio.

  FIGS. 27 to 31 (FIG. 31 shows a modification of FIG. 29) is a view showing a partial storage area of the RWM 53 controlled by the management information control means 72. In the figure, the four-digit numerical value starting with "F" indicates the address of RWM 53. For each address, a buffer (storage area) of 1 byte (8 bits) data is provided.

  First, FIG. 27 shows a buffer for storing data concerning the advantageous section. As information regarding the advantageous section, there are three storage areas of the advantageous section game number corresponding value, the total number of games, and the advantageous section ratio. And the memory area of the advantageous section game frequency corresponding value is 4 bytes ("F004" to "F001"), the memory area of the total game frequency is 3 bytes ("F007" to "F005"), and the advantageous zone ratio The storage area of is one byte ("F008").

In the present embodiment, the total number of games is updated so that the value of the total number of games is incremented by one every time one game is digested.
On the other hand, during the advantageous section, a value obtained by multiplying the value of the advantageous section game count by 100 (referred to as "the advantageous section game number corresponding value") is added every time one game is digested. Therefore, a 3-byte storage area is provided for the total number of games, and a 4-byte storage area is provided for the advantageous section game number corresponding value.

In the present embodiment, the total game number is intended to store at least “175000” times or more. This is to display the advantageous interval ratio, the continuous character ratio, and the character ratio when the total number of games is “175000” or more.
Here, since "175000 (D)" has "18" digits in binary number, it can be stored in 3 bytes of "24" digits.

In addition, assuming that all the game numbers “175000 (D)” are in the advantageous section, the advantageous section game number corresponding value is “175000 × 100” (D), and this value is “25 digits in binary number. Therefore, although 3 bytes of "24" digits are not enough, storage is possible with 4 bytes of "32" digits.
For the above reasons, the storage area of the total number of games is 3 bytes, and the storage area of the advantageous section game numbers corresponding value is 4 bytes.

In addition, about total game frequency, although "1" is added for every one game, it is not limited to this but adds numerical values (total game frequency corresponding value) other than "1" and It is also good.
On the other hand, since the advantageous section ratio is “100 (D)” at the highest value, the value has “7” digits in binary number, so that storage is possible with 1 byte of storage capacity.

The total number of games continues to update the number of games every game, and when the 3-byte storage area reaches the upper limit (3 bytes full, ie, “FFFFFF (H)”, approximately 16.78 million in decimal), At the point in time, the count ends and the number of games is not updated from the next game.
In the advantageous section game frequency corresponding value, "+100" is added for each game during the advantageous section, but the value of the total game frequency becomes 3 bytes full even if all games are assumed to be the advantageous section It is possible to count up to. Then, when the count of the total number of games is finished, the count of the advantageous section game number corresponding value is also finished.

The advantageous section ratio is a value calculated by "the advantageous section game number corresponding value / total number of games" (as will be described later, subtraction is actually performed and division is not performed). Since the advantageous section game frequency corresponding value is a value obtained by multiplying the advantageous section game frequency by 100, the ratio itself can be calculated by the above calculation. The main CPU 55 of this embodiment uses an assembler, can not handle decimal points, and can not perform division using a value exceeding 2 bytes, so adopting the above-described calculation method Calculation is possible.
Further, in the present embodiment, an advantageous interval ratio stores an integer and discards the decimal part. For example, when the total number of games is "1100 (D)" and the advantageous section game number corresponding value is "56000 (D)", the advantageous section ratio is "50 (D)", and "F008" 00110010 (B) is stored.

  In addition, although the advantageous section rate can be updated every game, for example, when there is a display request for the advantageous section percentage, the advantageous section percentage is calculated from the value corresponding to the advantageous section game number and the total number of games, It may be stored in "F008". And the numerical value of the decimal number based on the value memorize | stored in "F008" is displayed as an advantageous section ratio.

FIG. 28 is a diagram showing a buffer for storing data on the total payout number. When the medal is paid out by the small winning combination, the value stored in the predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 is updated.
As shown in FIG. 28, there is provided a ring buffer in which 15 storage areas (01 set to 15 sets) of 2-byte data (for example, "F012 (upper digit)" and "F011 (lower digit)") are provided.
And, in each 2 byte data, the payout number during the 400 games is stored. For example, when nine winning combinations are won and nine payouts are made, "9 (D)" is added to the total payout number.
Here, in the regular slot machine, the maximum payout number in one game is determined to be “15” or less, and assuming that there is 15 games per game, “6000” in 400 games. It becomes. Since "6000 (D)" has 13 digits in binary, it can be stored in 2 bytes (16 digits).

Furthermore, when there is a payout from the first game to the 400th game, the number of payouts is stored in the 01-th set ("F012" and "F011"). From the next 401st game to the 800th game, the payout number is stored in the second set ("F014" and "F013").
In this way, 400 games are considered as one set, and values are stored in different buffers for each set.

In addition, a storage area (3 bytes) of total payout number of 15 sets (6000 games) is provided (in FIG. 28, "F031" to "F02F"). This storage area is for storing 15 sets, that is, the total number of payouts during 6,000 games.
In addition, assuming that 15 pieces of payout have been made in all 6000 games, it is necessary to store up to the value of "90000 (D)", but "90000 (D)" has 17 digits in binary, so It can be stored in 3 bytes (24 digits).

For example, up to the first fifteenth set, the total number of payouts in the number of games which does not satisfy 6000 games is stored in "F031" to "F02F".
Then, when reaching the 6000th game, the number of payouts for 400 games is stored in all the buffers of 01st set to 15th set (each 2 bytes), so the total payout number of 15 sets (6000 games) in total is also stored. In addition, it becomes the total value of 6000 game minutes.
Next, when it shifts to the 6001 game, it clears the 2-byte data ("F012" and "F011") of the 01 set, and stores the total number of payouts from the 6001 game to the 6400 game in this buffer. Go. In addition, from 6000 games to 6399 games, the total payout number (3 byte data) of 15 sets in total is maintained without changing.

Then, when it becomes the 6400 game, and addition to the 2-byte data of the 01 set is completed, the total payout number for 15 sets is calculated (total 2-byte data from 01-st set to 15-th set is added), The calculated total payout number for 15 sets is updated.
Similarly to the above, after 6401 game, when it is shifted to 6401 game, the 2-byte data ("F014" and "F013") of the 02 set is cleared, and in this buffer, 6401 game ~ 6800 game The total number of payouts up to is stored.
In the above method, the total payout number of 15 sets is updated every 400 games, but when all 15 sets are replaced with new data, the total payout number of 15 sets is calculated. It may be updated to that value.

The total payout number (total) ("F034" to "F032") is a 3-byte storage area storing the total number of payout numbers. The cumulative total of the payout numbers is determined in order to calculate each ratio (a continuous winning product operation ratio, etc. described later) when there are 175,000 games or more. However, the cumulative payout number continues to be stored even after 175000 games have passed, and the update is terminated when the 3-byte storage capacity reaches the upper limit (3-byte full).
Assuming that 175,000 games are paid out and 15 medals are paid out, the binary number has 22 digits, so it can be stored with 3-byte storage capacity.

FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a buffer for storing data on the number of payouts related to the continuous role among the RWM 53.
As shown in FIG. 29, the ring buffer is provided with 15 storage areas each consisting of 3-byte data (for example, the 01th set includes "F043 (most significant digit)" to "F041 (most significant digit)"). .

Then, in each 3-byte data, a value obtained by multiplying the number of medals paid out at the time of the continuous combination product operation by 100 (referred to as "payout number corresponding value") is stored. For example, when the 10-piece winning combination is won at the time of continuous-services operation and there are 10 payouts, “+1000” is set as the payout number corresponding value.
The reason for storing the value multiplied by 100, not the value of the payout number itself, is the same reason as the value corresponding to the number of times played in the advantageous section game, and the ratio is an integer To be calculated.

Further, in each 3-byte data, a payout number corresponding value at the time of continuous bonus product operation during 400 games is stored. Specifically, from the first game to the 400th game, when there is a payout number at the time of continuous combination product operation, the payout number corresponding value is stored in the 01th set ("F043" to "F041") Do. From the next 401st game to the 800th game, the payout number corresponding value is stored in the second set ("F046" to "F044").
In this way, 400 games are considered as one set, and values are stored in different buffers for each set.
In addition, assuming that 15 medals have been paid out for each game in 400 consecutive games, the payout number corresponding value is “600000 (D)”, which is 20 digits in binary, so 3 bytes Can be stored in

In addition, a storage area (3 bytes) corresponding to the continuous combination product payout number corresponding value of 15 sets (6000 games) is provided ("F070" to "F06E"). This storage area is a storage area for storing 15 sets, that is, a payout number corresponding value for 6000 games.
In addition, assuming that 15 medals have been paid out in every 6,000 games, the payout number corresponding value is “9000000 (D)”, which is 24 digits in binary, so 3 bytes It can be stored.

For example, up to the first fifteenth set, “F070” to “F06E” store the value corresponding to the number of consecutive bonus product payouts in the number of games less than 6000 games. Then, when the 6000th game is reached, the payout number corresponding value in the 400th game is stored in all the buffers of the 01st set to the 15th set (3 bytes each). In addition, the continuous bonus game payout number corresponding value of 15 sets (6000 games) in total is a total value for 6000 games.
Then, when it shifts to the 6001 game, it clears the 3-byte data ("F043" to "F041") of the 01 set, and in this buffer, the number of payouts during the continuous role operation from the 6001 game to the 6400 game Remember the corresponding value. In addition, from 6000 games to 6399 games, the corresponding value corresponding to the number of consecutive bonus items paid out for 15 sets in total is maintained without being changed.

  Then, when it becomes 6400 game eyes and 3 byte data of 01 set is decided, it calculates the corresponding value corresponding to the number of consecutive prizes paid out in 15 sets, and calculates 3 byte data of each of 01 set to 15 set Addition) Update the calculated value corresponding to the number of continuous-service-work-outs for the total of 15 sets calculated.

Similarly to the above, after 6401 game, when it is shifted to 6401 game, clear 3-byte data ("F046" to "F044") of the 02 set, and in this buffer, 6401 game to 6800 game Up to, update 02 bytes of 3-byte data.
In the above method, the 15-minute total continuous-service-paid-out number corresponding value is updated every 400 games, but when all 15 sets are replaced with new data, the total of 15 sets is continuous It is also possible to calculate and update the value corresponding to the number-of-payouts-on-time-outs.

Cumulative continuous role product payout number corresponding value (“F074” to “F071”) is a storage area for storing the cumulative total of the continuous character function payout number corresponding value, and the cumulative payout amount corresponding value is calculated Is to calculate a continuous bonus operating ratio when there are 175,000 games or more. However, the cumulative value corresponding to the number of consecutive serving items paid out continues to be stored even after 175000 games have passed, and updating ends when the 4-byte storage capacity reaches the upper limit (4-byte full).
Assuming that each game and 15 medals continue to be paid out, each game “1500 (D)” continues to be added, so that 4 bytes can store up to about 286,000 games.

  In addition, the continuous role product operation ratio (6000 games) ("F075"), "total game number corresponding to the continuous game operation of 6000 games (" F070 "~" F06E ") / total payout number of 6000 games (Figure 28 Middle, it is a buffer which stores the value of "F031"-"F02F").

In addition, the continuous combination product operation ratio (total) ("F076"), "total continuous combination product payout number corresponding value (" F074 ~ "F071") / cumulative total payout number (F034 in Figure 28, " “To“ F 032 ”) is a buffer for storing values.
The above ratio stores up to the maximum value "100 (D)" in decimal notation, and can be stored in one byte.
In addition, although it is possible to update each game, it is also possible to update the continuous combination product operation ratio (6000 games) and the continuous combination product operation ratio (total), but for example, calculation is performed when there is a display request of these ratios. The calculation result may be stored in each storage area ("F075" or "F076"), and the value may be displayed.

  FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a buffer for storing data on the number of payouts of bonus products in the RWM 53. Although it is clear if FIG. 30 and FIG. 29 are compared, it is provided also about the buffer which memorize | stores the delivery number corresponding | compatible value of a role similarly to the buffer which memorize | stores the delivery number corresponding | compatible value of continuous combination. The buffer storing the payout amount corresponding value etc. of the prize has the same configuration as the buffer storing the payout amount corresponding value etc. of the continuous role.

That is, for every 400 games, a storage area for 15 sets capable of storing 3-byte data as a payout number corresponding value at the time of bonus operation and a bonus amount corresponding number of bonus games at 6000 games (15 sets) A 3-byte buffer to be stored and a 4-byte buffer to store a cumulative value of the bonus game payout number corresponding value. In addition, as a buffer (1 byte) for storing the bonus operation ratio, there are provided two types, for 6000 games and for cumulative use.
The method of storage in each of these buffers is the same as that during continuous service operation, so the description will be omitted.

In addition, since the continuous winning combination corresponds to 1BB (including RB) of the present embodiment, when the medal is paid out during 1BB operation, it is stored in the continuous winning combination at-action payout number corresponding value shown in FIG.
In addition, when medals are paid out during operation for all the prizes including the successive prizes, the prizes are stored in the figure corresponding value at the time of prize actuation shown in FIG.
Here, in the present embodiment, only 1BB (and RB), which is a continuous character, is provided as the character, in such a case, the value stored in the buffer shown in FIG. The values stored in the buffer shown in FIG.

FIG. 31 is a view showing a modification of the ring buffer, and in this example, a modification of FIG. 29 is shown.
In FIG. 29, a ring buffer consisting of 3-byte each of the 01th set to the 15th set is provided, and 15 sets of total values are stored.
On the other hand, in the example of FIG. 31, the point of calculating 15 sets of total values is the same as that of FIG. 29, but 16 sets are provided as ring buffers.

In FIG. 31, the points corresponding to the number-of-payouts are stored in three bytes of 01 set to 15 sets from 1 game to 6000 games, as in FIG.
Here, when it is desired to calculate the total payout number corresponding value for the first game to the 6000th game, each 3-byte data from 01 set to 15 sets is added and calculated.

Next, the payout number corresponding values from the 6001th game to the 6400th game are stored in the sixteenth set of 3-byte buffers ("F070" to "F06E").
Then, when it comes to the 6401 game, it clears the 3-byte data ("F043" to "F041") of the 01 set, and the payout number corresponding value from the 6401 game to the 6800 game to the 3-byte data of the 01 set. I will remember.

When calculating the payout number corresponding value of 6000 games (15 sets) in total between 6401 game eyes to 6800 game eyes, each 3-byte data of 02 set to 16 sets is added and calculated.
Furthermore, when 6800 games are reached, when calculating the payout number corresponding value of 6000 games (15 sets) in total, calculation is performed by adding each set of 3-byte data of 1 set to 15 sets.
In this way, one of the 16 sets of 3-byte buffers is used as the 3-byte buffer currently being updated, and the other 15 sets of 3-byte buffers are used to calculate the payout amount corresponding value for the total of 15 sets. Used when

The data stored in the storage area of the RWM 53 shown in FIGS. 27 to 30 is not initialized only by turning on / off the power switch 11, and the data is maintained.
Further, even in the initialization of the predetermined storage area at the time of setting change (at the time of RAM clear), the storage area of RWM 53 shown in FIGS. 27 to 30 becomes an exception of the initialization, and the data is maintained without being initialized. Ru. Here, to shift to the setting change mode, it is based on turning on the power switch 11 under a situation where the setting key switch 12 is turned on (rotated 90 degrees to the right) when the power switch 11 is off. Migration is possible. Further, the initialization of the predetermined storage area at the time of the setting change described above is executed before the setting value becomes changeable (setting change mode) based on the operation of the setting switch 13.

However, when the non-returnable error occurs, the above data is initialized upon the return of the error. On the other hand, when a recoverable error occurs, the data is not initialized but is maintained.
Here, the “non-returnable error” refers to a serious error that can not be returned unless the power is turned off and the above-described setting change mode is entered. For example,
1) If the read setting value is not within the setting 1 to 6 range (setting value error),
2) When a symbol (kicking symbol) that should not be displayed originally is displayed as a result of determining the stop symbol (symbol combination error),
3) Update error of random number determined for each interrupt processing,
4) When the power failure recovery data is not a normal value, etc. may be mentioned.

  When a non-returnable error occurs, the power switch 11 is turned off, the setting key is inserted, the setting key switch 12 is turned on by rotating the setting key clockwise 90 degrees, and then the power switch 11 is turned on. As a result, a predetermined range of RWM 53 (data of each buffer in FIGS. 27 to 30, setting value information, RT information, and winning condition apparatus information) is cleared. Then, the setting value is set, and if there is no other error, return processing is performed.

On the other hand, “returnable error” refers to an error that can be recovered without turning on / off the power switch 11 or the like. For example, medal clogging error, medal retention error, medal illegal passage error, abnormality of passage sensor 43a, abnormality of insertion sensor 44, abnormality of payout sensor 37, medal abnormal insertion error, etc.
When a recoverable error occurs, the error contents are displayed and the main processing is stopped. However, if the store clerk executes the error release operation (removes the cause of the error) and operates the reset switch 14, the error is released If it is determined that the error has been canceled, processing is resumed.

Subsequently, the update processing of the advantageous section game number corresponding value and the total game number will be described. In the flowcharts of FIG. 32 to FIG. 37 below, the advantageous section game frequency corresponding value is abbreviated as “favorable section corresponding value”.
FIG. 32 shows an example of updating the advantageous section game frequency corresponding value and the total game frequency using the register. Further, FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing a specific example 1 of the part surrounded by a dotted line in FIG. 32, FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing a specific example 2 of the part surrounded by a dotted line, and FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the example 3 of a part. Further, FIG. 36 is an example of updating the advantageous section game frequency corresponding value and the total game frequency without using the register.

  FIG. 32 is executed every game, for example, at the end of the game. Further, in the method of using the registers, in the chip of this embodiment, the A, B, C, D, E, H and L registers (seven registers) can be used at the time of operation. In particular, since the advantageous section game frequency corresponding value ("F004" to "F001") is 4 bytes, and the total game frequency ("F007" to "F005") is 3 bytes, it becomes 7 bytes in total, and can be used. The number of registers matches the number of bytes.

In FIG. 32, in step S101, the upper 1 byte (data of "F007" in FIG. 27) of the total number of games is set in the A register. In the next step S102, the lower 2 bytes of the total number of games (data of "F006" and "F005" in FIG. 27) are set in the DE register.
Further, in step S103, the upper two bytes (data of "F004" and "F003" in FIG. 27) of the advantageous section game number corresponding value are set in the BC register. In the next step S104, lower 2 bytes (data of "F002" and "F001" in FIG. 27) of the advantageous section game number corresponding value are set in the HL register.

In step S105, "1" is added to the total game number lower 2-byte register, that is, the DE register value in this example. In the next step S106, it is determined whether or not a digit overflow has occurred in the lower 2 bytes of the total number of games by adding "1" in step S105. For example, when the lower 2 bytes of data is "FFFF (H)" before the start of this flowchart, an overflow occurs due to the addition of "1" in step S105 (flag register (F register built in main CPU 55) The carry flag of) becomes "1"). If it is determined that the digit overflow has occurred, the process proceeds to step S107, and if it is determined that the digit overflow does not occur (the carry flag ≠ "1"), the process proceeds to step S109. Note that after “1” is added in step S105, it is determined in step S106 whether a digit overflow has occurred. Therefore, at step S106, the DE register value when the digit overflow occurs is “0. It is ".
In the present embodiment, the "0" bit of the F register (flag register) is set to the carry flag. The carry flag is a flag that is set to "1" when a carry occurs or a carry (also referred to as a carry overflow) occurs by an operation using a register.

  In step S107, “1” is added to the total game number upper one byte register, ie, the A register value in this example. In the next step S108, it is determined whether the total number of games has reached the upper limit. Here, “upper limit” means the upper limit of the count. Since the total number of games in this embodiment is counted in 3 bytes, when 3 bytes are full, specifically, when the value becomes "FFFFFF (H)", no more additions can be made. , Judge that the upper limit has been reached. It should be noted that after “1” is added to the A register value in step S107, it is determined that the upper limit is reached when there is a current overflow in the A register value (when the carry flag is “1”). is there. It can be reworded as when the A register value becomes "0" (zero flag = "1"). If it is determined that the upper limit has been reached, the processing according to this flowchart is ended, and if it is determined that the upper limit has not been reached, the process proceeds to step S109.

  Therefore, when the total number of games according to the present embodiment becomes 3 bytes full, and the number of decimals becomes about 16.78 million times, the total number of games is not added more than that. However, even when 3 bytes are full, the flow of FIG. 32 is executed every game, but every game, “Yes” is determined in step S108, and this flowchart is ended.

If it progresses to step S109 from step S106 or step S108, it will be judged whether a game is in an advantageous section this time. In addition, it is possible to determine whether or not the current game is an advantageous section by providing an advantageous section flag that is turned on during the advantageous section, and determining on / off of the advantageous section flag. Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, it can be determined whether or not the advantageous section is in the advantageous section by determining whether the eighth bit of the segment data of the digit 2 is “1”. It is.
If it is determined in step S109 that it is in the advantageous section, the process proceeds to step S110. If it is determined that the advantageous section is not in progress, the advantageous section game number corresponding value is not updated, and the process proceeds to step S114.

  In step S110, "100 (D)" is added to the lower 2-byte register value of the advantageous section game number corresponding value, that is, the HL register value in this example. Then, the process proceeds to step S111, and it is determined whether a digit overflow has occurred. In the present embodiment, since “100 (D)” is added during the advantageous section, it is “100 (D)” in “FFDC (H) (65500 (D))” that overflow occurs in 2 bytes. ) Is added to become “0040 (H) (65600 (D))”. If it is determined that a digit overflow has occurred, the process proceeds to step S112, and if it is determined that no digit overflow has occurred, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S112, "1" is added to the upper 2-byte register of the advantageous section game number corresponding value, that is, the BC register in this example. Then, the process proceeds to step S113, and the updated BC register value and HL register value are written to "F004" to "F001" in FIG. Thereby, the advantageous section game number corresponding value (RWM 53) is updated. Further, in the next step S114, the updated A register value and DE register value are written to "F007" to "F005" in FIG. Thereby, the total number of games (RWM 53) is updated. Then, the processing according to this flowchart is ended.

  In the flowchart of FIG. 32, before the total number of games reaches 3 bytes full, the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games does not become 4 bytes full. As described above, although the total number of games can count about 16.78 million games, assuming that all of the total games are in an advantageous segment, even if the value of about 16.78 million is multiplied by 100, Because it does not reach 4 bytes full. Therefore, even if “1” is added to the upper 2-byte register value of the advantageous section game frequency corresponding value in step S112, correct arithmetic processing can be realized without making a determination as to whether or not the digit overflow has occurred. It becomes possible to realize simplification of arithmetic processing.

  Further, in the flowchart of FIG. 32, each data of the RWM 53 is set (copied) in a register and calculation is executed, and when it is determined in step S108 that the total game number has reached the upper limit, the total game number is The processing according to this flowchart ends without returning the set register value to the RWM 53. Therefore, the total number of games stored in RWM 53, that is, 3-byte data stored in "F 007" to "F 005" of RWM 53 remains "FF FFFF (H)", before and after the start of this flowchart. There is no change in the data of the total number of games played.

Next, in FIG. 32, a specific example of the process of steps S109 to S114 will be described.
FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a specific example 1 of the steps in between. In FIG. 33, steps S109 to S112 are the same as in FIG. In FIG. 33, when it is determined “No” in step S109, the process proceeds to step S123.

After step S112, if it progresses to step S121, the value of upper 2 bytes of the advantageous section game frequency corresponding value will be updated. Specifically, the value of the BC register is written to "F004" and "F003" in FIG. In the next step S122, the value of the lower 2 bytes of the advantageous section game number corresponding value is updated. Specifically, the value of the HL register is written to "F002" and "F001" in FIG.
Next, in step S123, the total number of games is updated collectively for 3 bytes. Specifically, in FIG. 27, “A register value” and “DE register value” are respectively “F 007” and “F 006”.
And "F005".

FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a second specific example of steps S109 to S114 in FIG. Steps S109 to S112 in FIG. 34 are the same as those in FIG. In FIG. 33, when it is determined “No” in step S109, the process proceeds to step S123.
After step S112, if it progresses to step S131, the advantageous section game frequency corresponding value will be updated collectively for 4 bytes. Specifically, the BC register value and the HL register value are respectively written in "F004", "F003", "F002", and "F001" in FIG. And if it progresses to step S123, the total game frequency will be updated collectively for 3 bytes similarly to the example 1.

FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a specific example 3 of steps S109 to S114 in FIG. In FIG. 35, when it is determined “No” in step S109, the process proceeds to step S141.
Each step of FIG. 35 is the same as that of FIG. In FIG. 35, the difference from FIG. 34 is that even if it is determined that the advantageous section is not in progress in step S109, the process proceeds to step S131, and the advantageous section game number corresponding value is updated. That is, in this case, the advantageous section game number corresponding value is not added "100 (D)", but based on the BC register value and the HL register value set in step S103 and step S104 in FIG. In FIG. 27, "F004", "F003", "F002", and "F001" are written. In this case, the same value as in the previous game is written again.

The examples of FIGS. 32 to 35 described above are examples of updating (using) the total game count and the advantageous section game count corresponding value via the register.
On the other hand, FIG. 36 is an example in which the total game number and the advantageous section game number corresponding value are updated without passing the register in principle.
In FIG. 36, in step S201, "1" is added to the lower 2 bytes of the total number of games. Specifically, "1" is added to the data of "F006" and "F005" in FIG.

  In the next step S202, it is determined whether an overflow has occurred in the addition in step S201. That is, it is determined whether the carry flag has become "1" by adding "1" to the data of "F006" and "F005". It may be determined whether or not the data of "F006" and "F005" has become "0000 (H)". If it is determined that a digit overflow has occurred, the process proceeds to step S203, and if it is determined that no digit overflow has occurred, the process proceeds to step S207.

  In step S203, "1" is added to the upper 1 byte of the total number of games. Specifically, “1” is added to the data of “F007” in FIG. In the next step S204, it is determined whether the total number of games has reached the upper limit. The determination here is that “F007” is overflowed by adding “1” in step S203, and it is determined whether or not the carry flag has become “1”, and the carry flag becomes “1”. It is determined that the upper limit has been reached. Note that it may be determined whether the data of "F007" has become "0 (H)", and when it has become "0 (H)", it may be determined that the upper limit has been reached. If it is determined that the upper limit has been reached, the process proceeds to step S205, and if it is determined that the upper limit is not reached, the process proceeds to step S207.

In step S205, "1" is subtracted from the upper 1 byte of the total number of games. When the process proceeds to step S205, a digit overflow also occurs in the upper one byte in the addition in step S203, and "0 (H)" is obtained. The data before adding "1" is returned to "FF (H)".
Next, proceeding to step S206, “1” is subtracted from the lower 2 bytes of the total number of games. Thereby, the values of "F006" and "F005" become "FFFF (H)". Then, the process according to this flowchart is ended.

  On the other hand, when the process proceeds from step S202 or step S204 to step S207, it is determined whether or not the current game is in the advantageous section. This determination is the same as step S109 in FIG. Then, when it is determined that the advantageous section is not in progress, there is no need to update the advantageous section game number corresponding value, so the processing according to this flowchart is ended. On the other hand, when it is judged that it is in the advantageous section, it progresses to step S208. In step S208, "100 (D)" is added to the lower 2 bytes of the advantageous section game number corresponding value, that is, "F002" and "F001" in FIG. Here, since the assembler can not directly add the value of "100 (D)" to the RWM 53, first, the data of "F002" and "F001" are stored in the HL register. Then, the data of "F002" and "F001" is updated by storing the result of adding the value of "100 (D)" to the HL register in "F002" and "F001".

  In the next step S209, it is determined in the calculation of step S208 whether an overflow has occurred. Here, it is determined whether or not the carry flag has become "1", and when the carry flag has become "1", it is determined that a digit overflow has occurred.

  If it is determined in step S209 that a digit overflow has occurred, the process proceeds to step S210, and if it is determined that a digit overflow has not occurred, the processing according to this flowchart ends. In step S210, "1" is added to the upper 2 bytes of the advantageous section game number corresponding value, that is, "F004" and "F003" in FIG. Then, the process according to this flowchart is ended.

Next, the calculation processing of the advantageous section ratio will be described.
In the present embodiment, since the total number of games and the advantageous section game number corresponding value are stored, in order to calculate the advantageous section ratio, simply by “the advantageous section game number corresponding value / total game number” It can be calculated. However, in the slot machine 10, with a chip that satisfies the rule, only 2-byte operation can be performed, and division of 2-byte or more numeric values can not be performed. Therefore, the ratio is calculated by the following subtraction.

Specifically, when the advantageous section game number corresponding value = x and the total game number = y, “x ÷ y” can be calculated by repeating the following subtraction.
xy = a (> 0)
a−y = b (> 0)
b-y = c (> 0)
c-y = d (<0)
As described above, since the number of times "> 0 (greater than" 0 ")" is "3" as a result of repeatedly subtracting the total game number y, the quotient of "x」 y "is" 3 ". It can be calculated that there is. And in this embodiment, since a decimal part is round off, in the above-mentioned example, an advantageous section rate is computed with "3".

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the calculation processing of the advantageous section ratio.
First, in step S301, data of RWM 53 is acquired in a register. Similarly to the above, seven registers of A, B, C, D, E, H and L are used.
In this step S301, each data of "F001" to "F007" shown in FIG. 27 is stored in the register. Specifically, it is as follows.
A register: stores data of "F007" D register: stores data of "F006" E register: stores data of "F005" B register: stores data of "F004" C register: stores data of "F003" H register: Stores data of "F002" L register: Stores data of "F001"

Next, the process proceeds to step S302, and the advantageous section ratio (RWM 53) is initialized. In this processing, the data stored in “F008” in FIG. 27 is cleared (“0”).
Then, the process proceeds to step S303, where the lower byte is subtracted. This process subtracts the data (lower 2 bytes of the total number of games played) stored in the DE register from the data (lower 2 bytes of the advantageous section game frequency corresponding value) stored in the HL register, and calculates the operation result Store in HL register.

Next, proceeding to step S304, it is determined whether a borrow has occurred. If the result of the operation of step S303 (result of subtracting the value of DE register from the value of HL register) and the carry flag is not set (when the carry flag is "1"), it is determined as "No".
If it is determined that the carry flag is set (if there is a borrow), the process proceeds to step S305. If it is determined that there is no borrow, the process proceeds to step S307.

In step S305, it is determined whether the upper 2 bytes of the advantageous section game number corresponding value, that is, the BC register value is "0". When it is “0”, since the subsequent subtraction can not be performed, the processing according to this flowchart ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not "0", the process proceeds to step S306.
In step S306, "1" is subtracted from the upper byte of the advantageous section game number corresponding value. Specifically, “1” is subtracted from the BC register value, and the operation result is stored in the BC register.

In the next step S307, the upper byte is subtracted. Specifically, the A register value (upper 1 byte of the total game number) is subtracted from the BC register value (upper 2 bytes of the advantageous section game frequency corresponding value), and the calculation result is stored in the BC register. Then, the process proceeds to step S308, and it is determined whether the calculation result at step S307 is less than "0", that is, whether the carry flag is set or not by the calculation at step S307. If the carry flag is set, "Yes" is determined in the step S308, and further subtraction can not be performed, so the processing according to the flowchart is ended. On the other hand, when it is judged as "No" by step S308, it progresses to step S309.
In step S309, the HL register value is stored in the stack area (a part of the storage area of the RWM 53).

In the next step S310, the data (ratio of advantageous sections) stored in "F008" is stored in the HL register, and "1" is added to the data stored in the address (F008) indicated by the HL register. In step S311, the data stored in the stack area in step S309 is stored in the HL register. After step S311, the process returns to step S303, and the above process (subtraction) is repeated.
By the above processing, the total game count is subtracted from the advantageous section game count corresponding value, and the advantageous section percentage is incremented by one each time one subtraction is performed. Therefore, after the processing of FIG. 37, the advantageous section percentage value calculated from the advantageous section game number corresponding value and the total game number stored in “F001” to “F007” is stored in “F008”.
As is apparent from the above, each time the processing in steps S303 to S311 in FIG. 37 is executed once, the advantageous section proportion is incremented by one. That is, the number of times of execution (the number of repetitions) of steps S303 to S311 is the advantageous segment ratio.

  In addition, although the quotient of the number of times corresponding to the advantageous section game frequency (the value obtained by multiplying the advantageous section game frequency by 100) and the total number of games is calculated above, and it is regarded as the advantageous section percentage (%) Calculate the continuous character ratio (6000 games (15 sets)), character ratio (6000 games (15 sets)), continuous character ratio (total), and character ratio (total) by (repeating subtraction) be able to.

  More specifically, the corresponding value corresponding to the number of continuous game operations paid out for 6000 games (15 sets) ("F070" to "F06E" in FIG. 29), and the total number of payouts for 6000 games (15 sets) (Fig. 28). , “F031” to “F02F”), by repeating the same subtraction as described above, calculate the quotient of “the value corresponding to the number of payouts for continuous combination of 6000 games and the total number of payouts for 6000 games”, A value is memorize | stored in "F075" in FIG. 29 as a continuous bonus item operation ratio (6000 games).

  In addition, from the total number of consecutive rolled product payouts corresponding values ("F074" to "F071" in FIG. 29) and the total payout number of cumulative totals ("F034" to "F032" in FIG. 28), " The quotient of the total number of consecutive rolled product payouts corresponding to the total number of paid-out total rolled sheets is calculated, and the value is stored in “F076” in FIG. 29 as a continuous rolled product operating ratio (total).

  Similarly, based on the bonus game payout number corresponding value of 6000 games ("F0B0" to "F0AE" in FIG. 30) and the total payout number of 6000 games ("F031" to "F02F" in FIG. 28) , Calculate the quotient of "the value corresponding to the number of bonus game payouts of 6,000 games / the total payout number of 6,000 games", and store the value as "FYB5" in FIG. 30 as a bonus game operating ratio (6000 games). .

  Also, based on the cumulative value of the number of payouts corresponding to the number of payouts ("F0B4" to "F0B1" in FIG. 30) and the total payout number of cumulative totals ("F034" to "F032" in FIG. 28) The quotient of the number-of-payouts-corresponding-to-the-off-pieces value / the total number of paid-out sheets in total is calculated, and the value is stored in “F0B6” in FIG.

FIG. 38 shows the "interest rate ratio" calculated as described above, "continuous character ratio (6000 games (15 sets))", "character ratio (6000 games (15 sets))", "continuous characters" It is a figure which shows the example of a display of a ratio (cumulative | total) and a "character-object ratio (cumulative)." These five pieces of information are displayed by an information type and a numerical value, and are displayed on the management information display LED 74.
The five pieces of information shown in FIG. 38 are merely examples, and the present invention is not limited to these pieces of information, and information other than these may be displayed, or part of the information shown in FIG. Only information may be displayed. Further, the display order is not limited to the order shown in FIG. 38, and the display order is arbitrary.

The reason for displaying the management information as described above is as follows.
In the gaming machines, those that conform to the type test prescribed by the Winding Law are permitted to set up a hall. Here, in the type test, the character ratio and continuous character ratio when carrying out 6000 games do not exceed predetermined values (70% for character ratio and 60% for continuous character ratio) There is a defined rule.
In addition, at the time of type testing, a document will be attached that describes the average value of the game item ratio and continuous character item ratio of the applied gaming machine (In the future, the average value will also be described for the advantageous segment ratio. May be asked).

In this case, a clerk or a third party in the hall can easily check whether the gaming machine installed in the hall has the same specification as the one that conforms to the specification (whether or not it is tampered with) It is desirable to
For example, with regard to a gaming machine having a compatible gaming machine and a separated numerical value, there is also a possibility that the gaming machine may differ from the conforming gaming machine. Fraud, etc. can be confirmed early.
Therefore, if a function for calculating and displaying management information is provided as in the present embodiment, it can be easily and reliably confirmed whether the information conforms to the suitable one.

  In this embodiment, when the front door of the slot machine 10 is opened (thereby, the door switch 15 is turned on), and the setting key is inserted and rotated 90 degrees clockwise, the setting key switch 12 is turned on. . This state is under so-called setting confirmation. Therefore, the current setting value is displayed on the setting value display LED 73. Since the setting change is different during the setting confirmation, the setting value is not changed even if the setting switch 13 is operated.

Then, in the present embodiment, when the setting switch 13 is pressed once during this setting confirmation, the "advantage ratio" is displayed on the digits 6 to 9 in FIG. First, the digits 6 and 7 display the information type. In the example of FIG. 38, the advantageous section ratio is displayed as "U7". Also, in this example, assuming that the advantageous segment ratio is “50 (%)”, digits 7 and 8 are displayed as “50”. Therefore, "U750" is displayed on the management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9).
In addition, when displaying the numerical value of management information, it is a decimal notation.

Next, when the setting switch 13 is pressed once more, "Continuous role ratio (6000 games (15 sets))" is displayed, and "y6" is displayed as the type of this information. In this example, the ratio is "45". "(%)" Is displayed.
Further, when the setting switch 13 is pressed once more, “character ratio (6000 games (15 sets))” is displayed, and “y7” is displayed as the type of this information. In this example, the ratio is “60 (% Is displayed.

Similarly, when the setting switch 13 is pressed once more, "Continuous role ratio (total)" is displayed, and "A6" is displayed as the type of this information. it's shown.
Furthermore, in the same manner, when the setting switch 13 is pressed once more, "character item ratio (total)" is displayed, and "A7" is displayed as the type of this information. it's shown.
Further, when the setting switch 13 is pressed again, the display is returned to the first display, and the advantageous section "U750" is displayed.
Further, the display of the management information may be turned off when the setting switch 13 is not operated for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). After the light is turned off, when the setting switch 13 is pressed, the advantageous section proportion "U750" which is the first display is displayed.

Further, while the opening of the front door is detected by the door switch 15, the management information is continuously displayed (each digit 6 to 9 is kept lit), and it is detected that the front door is closed by the door switch 15. At this time, the digits 6 to 9 may be turned off.
In this case, when the opening of the front door is detected by the door switch 15, the advantageous section "U750" may be displayed before the setting key switch 12 or the setting switch 13 is turned on, or the door switch 15 If the opening of the front door is only detected by the key, the digits 6 to 9 are not lighted, and the setting key switch 12 and the setting switch 13 are turned on,
The advantageous section "U750" may be displayed.

In addition, regardless of whether the front door is detected to be open by the door switch 15 or not, after the power switch 11 is turned on, a predetermined cycle (for example, every about 3 seconds (the number of interrupt processing is 1,500 for each interrupt) 38) may be displayed on the management information display LED 74 sequentially.
Here, the management information shown in FIG. 38 includes information whose ratio depends on the setting value such as the continuous winning product ratio.
On the other hand, there is a high possibility that the front door will be opened while the hall is open (when the player can play a game),
a) An error that occurs when it is determined that the medals in the hopper 35 are empty,
b) An error that occurs when it is determined that the medal has stagnated in the medal selector,
c) An error that occurs when it is determined that the medal has stagnated at the dispensing port of the hopper 35,
d) An error occurs when the medal 35 is full in the hopper 35 (provided at the side of the hopper 35 and the sub storage box for storing the medals overflowing from the hopper 35 is full) (all can be restored as described above) Errors that belong to errors).

When such an error occurs, if the person in charge of the hall opens the front door, the player may see the management information and may infer the set value. In order to solve such a problem, when at least one of all the errors a) to d) or the errors a) to d) occurs, the management information display LED 74 does not perform lighting display. It is desirable to configure (to turn off). The present invention is not limited to the above-described errors a) to d), and can be configured not to perform lighting display by the management information display LED 74 even when another error occurs.
Also, if the above-mentioned unrecoverable error occurs, there is a doubt about the reliability of the displayed management information, or after clearing the unrecoverable error, clear the data that is the basis of the displayed management information It is desirable not to display it.

  In order to view the management information displayed on the main control board 50, the front door must be opened, and if the front door is opened, the door opening error always occurs, but management is performed by operating the various switches described above. It is safe to display the information.

In addition, the above information types "U7", "y6", "y7", "A6" and "A7" are exemplification, and an arbitrary display is performed by a 2-digit alphabet, a symbol, or a numerical value, or a combination thereof. be able to.
In the above example, different numerical examples are shown for the continuous character ratio and the character ratio, but when only the continuous characters are included as in this embodiment, the continuous character ratio and the character ratio have the same value. It becomes.

  When the above display is performed, for example, when the door switch 15 is turned on, the setting key switch 12 is turned on, and the setting switch 13 is turned on, the control information display mode is entered, and "U7 The segment data displaying “proportion” is read and displayed on digits 6 and 7. Specifically, if "U7" is displayed, the segment data will be "00111110 (B)" and "00100111 (B)".

  Furthermore, when displaying a numerical value, for example, if it is an advantageous section ratio, the data of "F008" in FIG. 27 described above is read and converted into segment data. When the advantageous section ratio is "50 (D)", the data stored in "F008" is "00110010". When the value is converted into segment data, it becomes “01101101 (B)” and “00111111 (B)”.

  Further, when displaying the advantageous section percentage, the total number of games ("F007" to "F005") is read to determine whether the total number of games has reached "175000 (D)". When it is determined that the total number of games has not reached the "175000" game, the numerical value of the advantageous section percentage is displayed in a blinking manner. On the other hand, when it is determined that the total number of games has reached the "175000" game, the numerical value of the advantageous section percentage is lit and displayed. In this way, the display pattern is made different depending on whether or not the total number of games has reached "175000 games".

As a specific example to be blinked and displayed, for example, displaying in a pattern of repeating turning off and lighting at intervals of "0.5 seconds", turning off time repeating "0.5 seconds", and lighting time repeating "one second" It can be listed as a pattern. When the lighting time is longer than the lighting-off time as compared with the case where the lighting-off time and the lighting time are set to the same time, the display time of the management information can be made longer and the illumination such as a hole is dim The visibility can be improved even under the circumstances.
The display pattern may be made different so that it can be determined whether or not the "175000" game has been reached. Therefore, not only blinking or lighting, for example, the display of "U7" of the information type is "U7"(" The display different from 175000 "game or more), for example," U1 "(less than" 175000 "game) may be displayed. Alternatively, when the game is less than the “175000” game, “U7” may be displayed in a blinking manner, and the numerical value may be displayed in a lit state.

Similarly to the above, when displaying the continuous character ratio (6000 games) and the character ratio (6000 games), when the total number of games has not reached "6000" game, the continuous character ratio and Flashes and displays the character ratio. On the other hand, when the total number of games has reached the "6000" game, the numerical values of the continuous symbol ratio and the symbol ratio are respectively lit and displayed.
Therefore, when displaying the continuous character ratio (6000 games) and the character ratio (6000 games), the value of the total number of games ("F007" to "F005") in FIG. It is read and it is determined whether or not the "6000" game has been reached, and the display pattern is made different according to the result.

Furthermore, similarly, when displaying the continuous character ratio (total) and the character ratio (total), when the total number of games has not reached the "175000" game, the continuous character ratio (total) and each The figure of the character ratio (total) is displayed blinking. On the other hand, when the total number of games has reached the "175000" game, the numerical values of the continuous character ratio (total) and the character ratio (total) are respectively lit and displayed.
Therefore, when displaying the continuous character ratio (total) and the character ratio (total), the values of the total number of times played ("F007" to "F005") are read in FIG. It is determined whether or not it has reached, and the display pattern is made different according to the result.

In particular, it is possible to distinguishably indicate whether or not the advantage section ratio, the continuous character product ratio, and the character product ratio are 6000 games or more and 175000 games or more (such as making the display mode different) , Has the following advantages.
For example, when it is determined whether or not the gaming machine is an unauthorized gaming machine based on the management information of the currently displayed advantage section ratio, the continuous part ratio, and the part ratio, the number of times of the management information By referring to whether the value is a value for, it is possible to more accurately determine whether or not the game is an unauthorized gaming machine.

For example, it is assumed that the design value (average value) of the advantageous segment ratio was 55 (%) at the time of type application of the gaming machine.
At this time, for example, when the ratio of the advantageous section in 1000 games is 80 (%) and when the ratio of the advantageous section is 80 (%) in 175000 games or more, the judgment as to whether it is incorrect or not is different. . As for the advantageous section ratio in 1000 games, the possibility that the value has not yet converged is also considered sufficiently. On the other hand, since the advantageous section ratio in 175000 games is a value for a sufficient number of games, it is considered that the value has converged. Therefore, the latter can be judged to have a high possibility of fraud.

As described above, even if the value is the same, as the number of games increases, the numerical value converges to the design value. Therefore, if the number of games and the numerical value are combined to determine whether it is an unauthorized gaming machine, More accurate judgment can be made.
In addition, as described above, when the total number of games has not reached the predetermined number of games (6000 games or 175000 games), the blinking display is made, and when the predetermined number of games has been reached, the lighting display is displayed. Conversely, when the total number of games has not reached the predetermined number of games, the display may be lit, and when the predetermined number of games has been reached, the blinking may be displayed.

  In the above example, the digits 6 to 9 are mounted on the main control board 50 and the management information display LED 74 is provided. However, for example, management information may be displayed using the storage number display LED 76 or the acquisition number display LED 78. It is possible. This setting results in cost reduction since it is not necessary to provide the digits 6 to 9 separately.

FIG. 39 is a diagram showing an example of displaying management information using the storage number display LED 76. As shown in FIG.
In the example of FIG. 39, the example which has nine medals as a credit is shown. For this reason, initially, the display of the stored number display LED 76 is “09”.
Then, even if the front door is opened and the door switch 15 is turned on, there is no change in the display of the stored number display LED 76 (in order to display the door open error by the acquired number display LED 78 described later).

  Then, when the setting switch 13 is pressed once, the storage number display LED 76 displays “U7” indicating that it is an advantageous section ratio. Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed, “50”, which is a numerical value of the advantageous section ratio, is displayed. If this state is left, "U7" and "50" are displayed alternately every two seconds.

Then, when the setting switch 13 is pressed next, the stored number display LED 76 displays “y6” indicating that it is “continuous role ratio (6000 games)”. Then, when the predetermined time has elapsed, the numerical value "45" of the "continuous role ratio (6000 games)" is displayed. Then, as in the above, when this state is left, “y6” and “45” are alternately displayed every 2 seconds.
In the example of FIG. 39, an arrow is shown to shift from the display of “50” to the display of “y6”, but even if the setting switch 13 is pressed while “U7” is displayed, “y6” is displayed. Of course (the same applies to the other figures).

  In addition, when the setting switch 13 is pressed during the display of "y6" or "45", the stored number display LED 76 displays "y7" indicating that it is "feature ratio (6000 games)", When the predetermined time has elapsed, a numerical value "60" of "character ratio (6000 games)" is displayed. Then, similarly to the above, when this state is left, “y7” and “60” are alternately displayed every 2 seconds.

Furthermore, when the setting switch 13 is pressed during the display of “y7” or “60”, the stored number display LED 76 displays “A6” which indicates that “continuous character ratio (total)”. When the fixed time has elapsed, the numerical value "48" of the "continuous character ratio (total)" is displayed. Then, in the same manner as described above, when this state is left, "A6" and "48" are alternately displayed every two seconds.
Furthermore, similarly, when the setting switch 13 is pressed during the display of "A6" or "48", the storage number display LED 76 displays "A7" indicating that it is a "character / character ratio (total)". When the predetermined time has elapsed, the numerical value "52" of the "character and character ratio (total)" is displayed. Then, similarly to the above, when this state is left, “A7” and “52” are alternately displayed every 2 seconds.

Further, when the setting switch 13 is further pressed in this state, the display returns to the display of the first advantageous section proportions “U7” and “50”.
When the display as described above is performed, when the front door is closed and the door switch 13 is turned off, the display is switched to the storage number display "09".

FIG. 40 is a diagram showing an example in which management information is displayed using the acquisition number display LED 78.
The example of FIG. 40 shows an example in which "09" is displayed as the number of acquisitions.
Then, when the front door is opened and the door switch 15 is turned on, a door open error is detected. As a result, the acquisition number display LED 78 displays “dE” indicating a door open error. In this state, when the setting switch 13 is pressed once, the acquisition number display LED 78 displays "U7" indicating that it is an advantageous section ratio. Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed, “50”, which is a numerical value of the advantageous section ratio, is displayed. If this state is left, "U7" and "50" are displayed alternately every two seconds.

  Thereafter, as in the example of FIG. 39, each time the setting switch 13 is operated, predetermined management information (information type and numerical value) is displayed. Next, the front door is closed, and when the door switch 15 is turned off, the error content "dE" is displayed again (a door open error can not be resolved only by closing the front door). Then, in order to eliminate this error display, an error release operation is performed. For example, the door key is inserted into a keyhole provided in the front door, and the error is eliminated by turning the door key counterclockwise, for example. When the error release operation is performed in this manner, the number of acquisitions “09” before the display of “dE” is displayed again on the acquisition number display LED 78.

  In the example of FIG. 39 and FIG. 40, when the continuous character ratio (6000 games) and the character ratio (6000 games) do not reach the total number of games played "6000", at least one of the information type and the numerical value blinks indicate. Similarly, when the continuous character ratio (total) and the character ratio (total) do not reach the total number of times played "175000", at least one of the information type and the numerical value is displayed in a blinking manner.

Second Embodiment
Subsequently, a second embodiment of the present invention will be described.
In the second embodiment, the management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9) mounted on the main control board 50 (in the case where the main control boards 50A and 50B are divided, the main control board 50) , Lights up.
There are various ways to display the five pieces of information shown in FIG. 38 when constantly lit, but, for example, updating of the management information to be displayed can be mentioned every five seconds. Specifically, “U750” (displayed for 5 seconds) → “y645” (displayed for 5 seconds) →... “A752” (displayed for 5 seconds) → “U750” (displayed for 5 seconds) →. Can be mentioned. A digit turn-off time of about 0.5 to 1 second may be provided between each information display.

FIG. 41 is an external perspective view showing the base portion 1 of the slot machine 10. As shown in FIG. In FIG. 41, the front door is not shown. The front door opens / closes the front surface of the base portion 1 with the "front door opening / closing axis" (left side in the figure) as the support axis in FIG. Moreover, although FIG. 41 is used by description of 2nd Embodiment, the structure of 1st Embodiment is also the same as FIG.
As shown in FIG. 41, a power supply unit including a power switch 11, a medal payout device including a hopper 35, a symbol display device including three reels 31 and the like are accommodated in the base unit 1.
Further, the sub control substrate 80 is attached to the left side surface on the inner surface side of the base unit 1. On the other hand, the substrate case 16 and the main control substrate 50 accommodated in the substrate case 16 are attached to the inner back of the inner surface of the base 1. Furthermore, the substrate case 16 and the main control substrate 50 are attached above the symbol display device so that when the front door is opened, the condition of the caulking portion 16a of the substrate case 16 can be easily confirmed visually. In order to do this, it is mounted at a relatively easy-to-see position in the base portion 1.
For this reason, the management information display LED 74 mounted on the main control board 50 can also be checked relatively easily visually.

In the slot machine 10, in addition to a method in which medals are automatically replenished to the hopper 35a when the medals in the hopper 35 are exhausted, a store clerk in the hall opens the front door each time the hopper 35 is exhausted. There is known a method of replenishing the hopper 35 with medals.
However, when the front door is opened, the management information is always displayed on the management information display LED 74 mounted on the main control board 50, so that the player can view the management information. . As a result, it is possible to know the advantageous section ratio of the table on which the player is currently playing, the continuous character ratio, and the like. Therefore, there is a possibility that the set value can be estimated based on these values.
Therefore, in the second embodiment, the management information is always displayed on the management information display LED 74 mounted on the main control board 50, but it is not easily seen from the player.

FIG. 42 is a view showing the substrate case 16 and the main control boards 50 (50A and 50B) in the second embodiment, and is a view corresponding to FIG. 3 of the first embodiment. In FIG. 42, Example 1 of (a) shows an example in which one main control board 50 is formed, and Example 2 of (b) is formed of two main control boards 50A and 50B. An example is shown (this point is the same as FIG. 3 of the first embodiment).
42A, the management information display LED 74 is different from the first embodiment in that the management information display LED 74 is disposed as close to the left as possible as viewed from the front of the main control board 50. In FIG. 41, since the opening and closing axis of the front door is provided on the left side when viewed from the front in the figure, if the management information display LED 74 is disposed on the left as far as possible viewed from the front, the front door is opened. , It becomes difficult for the player to see.

  Further, in the example of FIG. 3B, the arrangement of the main control boards 50A and 50B is reversed from that of FIG. 3B. Then, the management information display LED 74 is mounted on the main control board 50B, but in the board case 16, it is positioned to the left.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, the distance (distance) between the management information display LED 74 and the caulking portion 16a is made longer. In FIG. 42, assuming that the position of the management information display LED 74 is closer to the left, when the caulking portion 16a of the substrate case 16 is moved away from the management information display LED 74, as shown in FIG. Is the right end of the substrate case 16.
In this way, even when the caulking portion 16a is broken and the main control board 50 (50A and 50B) is accessed, the management information display LED 74 is scratched or damaged when the caulking portion 16a is broken. Can be prevented more effectively.

The caulking portion 16a is for breaking when the substrate case 16 is opened, but in addition to the caulking portion 16a, a body caulking portion (not shown) for fixing the gaming machine and the substrate case 16 is You may have. At this time, when removing the substrate case 16 from the gaming machine, it is also necessary to destroy the body caulking portion. Also in this case, as with the caulking portion 16a, the first position for providing the body caulking portion is to prevent the management information display LED 74 from being accidentally damaged or broken when the body caulking portion is broken. When the position (for example, the upper end portion of the substrate case 16), the position where the management information display LED 74 is provided is the second position away from the first position (for example, the lower portion with respect to the central portion of the main control substrate 50, right It is desirable to provide it on the side or left side).

As described above, by arranging the management information display LED 74 in a position direction different from the position direction in which the caulking portion 16 a and / or the body caulking portion is provided, it is possible to effectively prevent the damage and the like of the management information display LED 74. it can.
In addition, although the position of the caulking part 16a is made into the right end part, it is not restricted to this, For example, it can also design as an upper end part. At this time, the management information display LED 74 is a lower portion, a right side portion, or a left side portion with reference to the central portion of the main control board 50, so that the management information display LED 74 is damaged by mistake when the caulking portion 16a is broken. And can be prevented from being damaged.

As mentioned above, although one Embodiment of this invention was described, this invention is not limited to the said embodiment, For example, the following various deformation | transformation are possible.
(1) The upper limit value of the number of games in the advantageous section is set to 1,500, but it is not limited to this. For example, 3000 payouts, 2000 differentials, an instruction function operation game (when winning small group B) It is also possible to set using a variable other than the total number of games, such as the number of games 100 times. Alternatively, it is also possible to set a plurality of conditions such as 1500 games or 3000 sheets, and determine that the upper limit has been reached when any one of the conditions is satisfied.

(2) Although the advantageous section display LED 77 uses the segment DP of the storage number display LED 76, the present invention is not limited to this, and a dedicated display (such as an LED) may be provided to display whether or not it is an advantageous section. However, cost can be reduced if it can be covered by the existing LED as in the above embodiment.
Here, the advantageous section is managed by the main control board 50 (main management), and the sub control board 80 does not manage the advantageous section. Therefore, the lamp for displaying the advantageous section needs to be electrically connected to the main control board 50. For example, the effect lamp 21 electrically connected to the sub control board 80 displays the advantageous section. It can not be a lamp.
However, even a lamp that appears to be a kind of effect lamp can be used as a lamp for displaying an advantageous section, as long as the lamp is controlled by the main control board 50.

  Further, although the advantageous section display LED 77 is configured from the segment DP of the digit 2 of the storage number display LED 76, it may be configured from the segment DP of the digit 4 of the acquisition number display LED 78, for example.

Furthermore, when the player ends the game, the menu button 25 may be operated to display a game history (two-dimensional code). Therefore, by arranging the advantageous section display LED in the vicinity of the menu button 25, it is possible to make the player notice that it is in the advantageous section at the end of the game. For example, even if storage number display LED 76 (segment DP of digit 2 is set as advantageous section display LED 77) or acquisition number display LED 78 (segment DP of digit 4 is set as advantageous section display LED 77) near menu button 25 Good. Of course, as shown in FIG.
Providing 7 is also effective. Furthermore, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, by turning on the advantageous section display LED 77 before the menu button 25 becomes operable, the player can recognize the transition to the advantageous section without making the menu button 25 Can be prevented (displaying a game history (two-dimensional code)).

  (3) When the power switch 11 is turned off while the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit, the advantageous section control means 69 turns on / off the power when the power switch 11 is turned on again. In order to maintain the advantageous section before and after, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on again. Therefore, for example, when closing the store with the advantageous section display LED 77 lit in the hall, if it is desired to turn off the advantageous section display LED 77 at the start of business the next day, the setting is changed (including resetting of the same set value) Can be mentioned. By changing the setting, the predetermined area of the RWM 53 is initialized, and the display data of the storage number display LED 76 (data of the advantageous section) is also initialized. It becomes ".

  (4) During the advantageous section, in the game in which the condition device capable of operating the instruction function is won, the instruction function is operated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is not necessary to activate the instruction function even in a game in which the condition device capable of activating the instruction function is won during the advantageous section. The advantageous section is a game section in which the operation of the instruction function is "possible". Therefore, after shifting to the advantageous section, whether or not to execute the instruction function operation game, or the number of times of the instruction function operation game is determined by lottery or the like, and the instruction function operation game is executed for the determined number of times It is also good. And, even if the number of times of the game is over, if the continuation condition of the advantageous zone is satisfied, it is possible to continue staying in the advantageous zone and again determine the number of times of executing the instruction function operation game by lottery or the like It is. Furthermore, during the advantageous section, the lottery that falls from the advantageous section to the normal section is won based on winning every game or a specific condition device (for example, a common set such as a small winning combination D or a small winning combination E1). It may be determined.

(5) In the present embodiment, the advantageous section game number corresponding value stores a value obtained by multiplying the game number by 100. Similarly, the value corresponding to the number of consecutive paid-out coins at the time of continuous serving and the corresponding value for the number of paid-out payouts at the combination are each stored a value obtained by multiplying the number of paid-out sheets by 100. However, it is possible to store the number of times of playing itself and the number of payouts itself without being multiplied by 100 depending on the advantageous section ratio, the continuous character ratio, and the calculation method of the character ratio (CPU used). It is not necessarily limited to storing the value multiplied by 100.
Similarly, although the value of the total number of games is stored the number of games itself, it is not limited to this, depending on the convenience of the calculation, a value obtained by adding a predetermined number to the total number of games or a predetermined value The corresponding value may be stored.
In this case, when the advantageous section ratio, the continuous character product ratio, and the character product ratio are calculated, the number of games itself and the storage area data in which the number of payouts is stored is multiplied by 100 and the above-mentioned subtraction processing is repeatedly executed. By performing the process (for example, FIG. 37), it is possible to calculate.

  (6) The advantageous section ratio, the continuous product operation ratio, and the product operation ratio are calculated every game or every predetermined number of games regardless of the presence or absence of display of the management information, and stored in the predetermined area of RWM 53 respectively You may leave it. On the other hand, the advantageous section ratio, the continuous product operation ratio, and the product operation ratio are calculated when displaying the management information (when display is requested), and the calculation result is stored in a predetermined area of RWM 53 and the calculation The results may be displayed.

(7) In the above embodiment, each time the setting switch 13 is pressed, the management information is displayed in order. However, the switch is not limited to the setting switch 13 and may be another switch, for example, the bet switch 40 or the like, or a switch dedicated to display of management information may be separately provided.
Moreover, although the setting switch 13 and the reset switch 14 are separately provided in the present embodiment, it is conceivable to configure the setting switch and the reset switch from one switch as the setting change / reset switch. In this case, if the operation of the setting change / reset switch does not overlap with the reset (initialization) operation, management information can be displayed by the operation of the setting change / reset switch. In the case where the setting switch 13 and the reset switch 14 are separately provided as in the present embodiment, the same applies to the case where the management information is displayed by the operation of the reset switch 14.

Specifically, when an error is detected, the mode is not shifted to the display mode of the management information, and the mode is shifted to the display mode of the management information on condition that no error occurs.
For example, when a medal retention error occurs in the medal selector among the recoverable errors, the mode is not shifted to the management information display mode unless the error is eliminated.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the management information is displayed each time the setting switch 13 is pressed. That is, after the setting switch 13 is turned on, even if the operator releases the operation switch 13, the management information remains displayed. On the other hand, the management information may be displayed only while the setting switch 13 is pressed, and when the operator releases the setting switch 13, the display of the management information may be ended. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 3, when the setting switch 13 is pressed first, the first management information "U750" is displayed, but when the user releases the setting switch 13, the display is ended (digits 6 to 6). Turn off 9). Next, when the setting switch 13 is pressed, the second management information “y 645” is displayed. However, when the hand is released from the setting switch 13, it is also possible to control to end the display. When the switch for displaying the management information is a switch other than the setting switch 13, the same control as described above is possible.

Thus, various switches are used as a switch for displaying the management information, and how the relationship between the operation of the switch for displaying the management information and the display pattern (displaying time) is used. Is not limited to what is shown in the present embodiment.
Furthermore, for example, when the management information display LED 74 is mounted on the main control board 50, as a display pattern of management information,
a) Display pattern for constantly displaying management information b) Pattern for displaying management information when the front door is opened (when the door switch 15 is turned on) c) Open the front door, and a predetermined switch D) open the front door, insert the setting key, turn on the setting key switch 12, and select a pattern that displays the management information when the user operates a predetermined switch. Be
However, when an operation for transitioning to the setting change mode is performed and transitioning to the setting change mode, the transition to the management information display mode is not made, and the management information is not displayed. That is, in the setting change mode, the digit 5 is turned on, but the digits 6 to 9 are turned off.

(8) In the present embodiment, the total number of games is counted until the count value of the total number of games reaches 3 bytes full ("FFFFFF (H)"). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the total reaches a predetermined value, the counting may be ended even if the upper limit of the storage capacity is not reached.
Also, when the total number of games reaches a predetermined value, the data value of the total number of games is cleared, and again,
You may start counting the total number of games.
The above is also true for the total payout number.

  (9) The slot machine 10 of the present embodiment is designed such that the advantageous section ratio is "70" (%) or less. Therefore, in the market, it is not assumed that the percentage of favorable segments exceeds “70” (%). However, for example, when a goto act is performed, the possibility that the advantageous section ratio exceeds “70” (%) can not be denied. Therefore, for example, the data value of "F008" storing the advantageous section ratio is monitored, and when the value exceeds "70 (D)", some kind of warning is output or the display of the advantageous section ratio Different from normal times (displaying that it is abnormal) may be mentioned. For example, among the displays of the information type "U7" of the advantageous section percentage, there is a method in which the upper digit "U" and the lower digit "7" are alternately flashed at high speed.

Similarly, in the case where the upper limit of the design value is set to, for example, "60 (%)" also for the continuous character ratio or the character ratio, if the continuous character ratio or the character ratio exceeds the design value upper limit, There is a method of outputting a warning or displaying the display of the information type as described above.
Alternatively, the information of the advantageous interval ratio etc. may be transmitted to the hall computer 200 using the external signal transmission means 70, and for example, when the advantageous interval ratio exceeds "70" (%), the information related to the warning may be transmitted. It can be mentioned.

(10) As described above, if the advantageous section ratio is set to "70" (%) or less for all the game sections, the other can be set relatively freely.
In addition, the winning of the advantageous section from the normal section may be set to less than "1/32".
Furthermore, as described above, during the advantageous section, the indicator function may be activated whenever the indicator function wins the condition device that can be activated, but the transition to the advantageous section does not activate the indicator function, and the instruction is issued The instruction function may be activated when the player has won the lottery whether to activate the function. Alternatively, when transitioning to an advantageous section, it is always set as an advantageous section that activates the indication function or is set as an advantageous section that activates the indication function only when winning the lottery whether to activate the indication function , May be determined by lottery or the like.

  Furthermore, the transition from the advantageous section to the normal section (end of the advantageous section) may be shifted when the number of games determined in advance is absorbed at the time of transition to the advantageous section, or without determining the number of games It is also possible to make a transition (fall) lottery from an advantageous section to a normal section every game or when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and to shift from the advantageous section to the normal section when winning this lottery. However, when the count value reaches the upper limit by the upper limit counter 69b, control is performed to end the advantageous section and shift to the normal section unconditionally.

  (11) In FIG. 3, the management information display LED 74 provided on the main control board 50 is composed of four digits, but may be composed of, for example, two digits. Then, for example, as shown in the examples of FIG. 39 and FIG. 40, when the setting switch 13 is pressed, the information type “U7” is displayed, the numerical value “50” is displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and thereafter the predetermined time "U7" and "50" may be alternately displayed repeatedly as time elapses.

(12) As the advantageous section ratio, the continuous character product ratio, and the character product ratio have been calculated by rounding off the decimal point, accurate values may not always be displayed. In that sense, the advantage section ratio, the continuous character item ratio, and the character item ratio respectively correspond to (equivalent to) a value corresponding to the advantageous character area ratio, the value corresponding to (corresponding to) the continuous character product ratio, to (part ) Is also referred to as
In addition, the ratio of the advantageous section, the ratio of consecutive items, and the ratio of items are not limited to the numbers rounded off after the decimal point, but the numbers rounded off after the decimal point, the numbers rounded up after the decimal point, the last digit is "5" or " It may be a numerical value or the like converted into 10 'increments.

(13) In the present embodiment, the combination of symbols stopped on the activated line is the same between when the small winning combination E1 is won and when the small winning combination E2 is winning. For example, at the time of the left or middle first stop at the time of the small winning combination E1 or E2 winning, it becomes possible to stop the middle cherry (stop for the small winning 36), and when the right first stop, the middle cherry does not appear It will be (a winning combination of 38 minor roles) Therefore, regardless of the presence or absence of the middle stage cherry, it was not possible to determine which of the small roles E1 and E2 was won.
However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the middle row cherry is not caused to appear, the stopping points may be made different.
For example, when the small winning combination E1 or E2 is won, the middle cherry is made to appear when the left or middle first stop, and when the middle cherry appears, the player determines which of the small winning combination E1 or E2 is won. Make it impossible.

  On the other hand, at the time of the first right stop at the time of winning the small winning combination E1 or E2, similarly to the above, control is made not to appear middle cherry, and instead of not appearing middle cherry, It is possible to cause the player to make a stop appearance which allows the player to determine which one has been won.

Specifically, for example, control may be performed as follows.
First, the minors included in the winning of the minor E1 are the minors 36 and 38, as in the above embodiment.
On the other hand, the minors included in the winning of the minor E2 are minors 36 and 41 (smaller 41 is newly added).
Then, when the small combination E1 or E2 is won, the small combination 36 (middle cherry) can be stopped at the left or middle first stop when the small combination E1 or E2 is selected, and the small combination 38 is stopped at the right first stop when the small combination E1 is won. On the other hand, the small winning combination 41 is stopped at the time of the first right stop when the small winning combination E2 is won.

  As a combination of the symbols of the small part 41, for example, "bell A / bell B"-"replay"-"black 7 / blue 7 / red 7 / blank" are used. As a result, the symbol of the middle reel 31 is different between the stop of the small winning combination 38 and the stop of the small winning combination 41. While “replay” does not stop on the middle reel 31 when the small role 38 stops, “replay” always stops on the middle reel 31 when the small role 41 stops. Thereby, it is possible to determine the winning of the small role 38 (small portion E1) or the small portion 41 (small portion E2).

  Furthermore, regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42, the small combination 38 is stopped when the middle row cherry is not stopped when the small combination E1 is won, and the small combination 41 is stopped when the middle row cherry not stopped when the small combination E2 is won. May be In this way, it is possible to determine which of the small combination E1 or the small combination E2 is won when the middle stage cherry is not stopped even at the left or middle first stop.

Other examples include the following method.
The small winning combination included in the winning of the small winning combination E1 is the low winning combination 36 and 38, as in the above embodiment. Further, the small winning combination included in the winning of the small winning combination E2 is also set to the small winning combination 36 and the small winning combination 37 and 38 as in the above embodiment. When the small combination E1 or E2 is won, the small combination 36 (middle cherry) can be stopped at the left or middle first stop, and at the right first stop when the small combination E1 is won, the small combination 38 is operated by the operation timing of the stop switch 42. At the time of the first right stop at the time of winning the small winning combination E2, the small winning combination 38 is stopped by the operation timing of the stop switch 42.
Then, when the small combination 38 is dropped when the small combination E1 or E2 is won, the combination of different symbols is stopped. Thereby, the small winning combination E1 or E2 may be determined.

  (14) When winning the 1BBA + small winning combination E1 and lighting the advantageous section display LED 77 before the predetermined timing of the game comes next time, the effect (such as continuous effect) on whether to shift to the advantageous section is not output Is preferred. Because the advantageous section display LED 77 is on, it is known that the player has shifted to the advantageous section. However, it is possible to output continuous rendering whether or not 1 BBA (special role) is won. In addition, when it is decided that the 1BBA + small winning combination E1 is won and it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED 77 is not always turned on even after the predetermined timing has passed (always At timing 2) shown in 23, the small section E1 is independently elected by turning on the advantageous section display LED 77 by the time the predetermined timing of the next game of the game in which the small combination E1 is won comes, and to the advantageous section In such a case, it is not necessary to output an effect or the like asking whether or not 1BB has been won, since it is understood that it has been decided to shift.

(15) In the present embodiment, it is possible to win one winning combination at the time of incorrect pressing order when the small winning combination B is won. However, the present invention is not limited to this, the small combination that can be won at the time of pressing the wrong combination when winning the small combination B group may be a combination of any number. Furthermore, although the dropout rate at the time of pressing wrong order at the time of winning the small winning combination B group is 75% in this embodiment, it is not limited to this and can be set variously such as 50%.
Further, even when the winning combination in the small winning combination C group winning is incorrect, it is possible to set the winning combination to be dropped with a certain probability as in the small winning combination B group winning.

(16) In the above embodiment, during 1 BBA operation, the number of games (expected value) for setting 6 is increased relative to setting 1, and it is advantageous, for example, when the number of games during 1 BBA operation reaches a predetermined number. I tried to add the section.
However, conversely to the above, during 1 BBA operation, the probability of winning a small winning combination of setting 6 with respect to setting 1 is increased and the winning probability of small winning combination E2 is decreased, so that the game with a smaller setting 6 is It may be the number of times (expected value). In this case, for example, when the operation of 1 BBA is completed with a small number of games (setting 6 is easier to achieve than setting 1), it is possible to add an advantageous section.

  (17) In the present embodiment, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section at the time of the single winning of the small winning combination E1, for example, the conditional device which does not include the special winning combination which can carry over the winning is advantageous by the predetermined timing The section display LED 77 is turned on. Here, the “predetermined timing” is not limited to the timing shown in the above embodiment, and can be set variously. For example, in the game when the small winning combination E1 is won, when the winning determination is finished, when there is a payout of medals in the game, the payout of medals is finished, and the like.

  In addition, although it does not occur in the present embodiment, for example, when it is determined to shift to an advantageous section in a game in which the replay is won, the automatic bet is ended based on the replay win, or the next game (replay) starts. When the switch 41 is operated, lighting the advantageous section display LED 77 may be mentioned.

(18) When “1 BBA + small winning combination E1” is won, if the small winning combination 36 can be won by operating the stop switch 42 at the left or middle first stop, the middle row cherry can appear. However, when the winning flag is only the small winning combination E1, the middle row cherry is allowed to appear, and when the 1 BBA winning flag is also set, the middle row cherry does not appear in any pushing order (all, the small winning combination 38 is made to win) You may stop control.
When controlled in this manner, there is a disadvantage that the middle row cherry can not be displayed and the player can not be beaten even when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section when "1 BBA + small combination E1" is won.

On the other hand, even when the small winning combination E1 alone is won after being inside the 1BBA, the standing winning flag is "1BBA + small winning combination E1", so the same stop control as described above can be adopted.
As described above, since it is not possible to determine the transition to the advantageous section in the inside, after the player knows that the inside is inside, even if the player wins the small part E1 and the middle cherry appears, the player is not , I have the impression that I wasted. On the other hand, if the stop control as described above is performed, since the middle cherry does not appear at all inside, it is possible to avoid giving the player the impression of having made a waste draw.

In particular, there are "Belle A / Bell B"-"Cherry"-"Black 7 / Blue 7 / Red 7 / Blank" (Fig. 11) as a combination of symbols of small part 38, and this combination of patterns and patterns The pattern 02 "bell A / bell B"-"cherry"-"bell A / bell B" is similar. Therefore, by causing the combination of the above-mentioned symbols of the small winning combination 38 to appear, it is possible to show a dropout at the time of the small winning combination B group winning (do not show the rare combination).
The above is also true when the player wins the small winning combination E1 after winning the small winning combination E1 after being in the inside of the 1 BBB or winning the small winning combination E2 after being in the inside of the 1 BBB. It is.

  (19) As shown in FIG. 17, the winning probability of replay is the same (number of units is “8978”) for non-RT and RT1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the winning probability of replay of RT1 may be set higher than the winning probability of replay of non-RT.

  (20) In the present embodiment, after the 1 BBB operation is finished, it is shifted to RT1, and the lottery of Replay E is performed in RT1, and the winning of Replay E is performed to add the advantageous section. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when it is shifted to RT1 during the advantageous section, it is possible to set the advantageous section as an additional specialization zone (a state in which the frequency of additional addition is high, a state in which the number of additional games increases). Then, the pattern symbol is displayed, and the additional specialization zone is continued until it shifts to RT2, and the addition of the advantageous section is executed each time a predetermined condition is satisfied in this RT1 (not limited to the winning of replay E). It is also good.

  (21) In the present embodiment, RT after the end of 1 BBA operation is non-RT, and RT after the end of 1 BBB operation is RT1. However, instead of shifting to different RTs in this way, it is also possible to shift to the same RT. For example, it may be transitioned to non-RT after the end of 1 BBB operation. In this case, after the 1 BBB operation in the advantageous section is completed, the advantageous section may be set as an additional specialization zone.

(22) In the present embodiment, as the management information, the advantageous section ratio (total), the continuous character ratio (6000 games and total), and the character ratio (6000 games and total) are displayed. It is also possible to calculate and display management information, for example, a payout rate.
As a calculation method of the payout rate, for example, the following method may be mentioned.
a) "Total number of payouts x 100" 総 "Total number of games excluding replays after replay win"
b) "(total payout number + number of replay winnings x 3) x 100" ÷ "total number of games"
And when adopting a), each buffer which memorizes "the total payout number x 100" and "the total number of games excluding the replay after the replay winning" is provided. Further, when adopting b), a buffer for storing “(total payout number + replay winning number × 3) × 100” is provided. Note that buffers of “total payout number × 100” and “replay winning number × 300” may be separately provided, and the values of both may be added.

In addition, "3" of "the number of times of replay winning × 3" means the number of bets of the game when the replay is won. For example, when the bet number fluctuates depending on the gaming state etc., it is not limited to "3", and a value bet on the game when the replay is won (for example, "2" or "1") There may be a game to play.
In addition, it has a storage area for storing the total number of games itself, the total number of payouts itself, the number of replay winnings itself (which may be "the number of replay winnings × the value bet on the game when the replay wins"). When calculating, the value may be multiplied by 100 and then calculated.

Furthermore, as the calculation method of a) and b), a method of repeating subtraction is adopted as in the above-described calculation method.
Then, the payout rate is displayed as one of the management information, and if it is compared with the designed payout rate, it is possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine is unauthorized. Furthermore, in this case as well, if the lighting mode is made different depending on whether the total number of games is 6000 games or more and 175000 games or more, it is more accurately an illegal gaming machine or not It becomes possible to determine the
The display of the information type indicating the payout rate may be any display as long as it can be distinguished from other management information. For example, digit 6 is displayed as "P.", and digits 7 to 9 are displayed. The payout rate (three figures) can be displayed using.

(23) In the present embodiment, it has been described that the upper limit counter 69b may be a decrement counter or an increment counter. Here, adopting the increment counter as the upper limit counter 69b has the following merits.
When the count value of the upper limit counter 69b becomes the upper limit value, for example, when the count value becomes "1500" when it is an increment counter, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated, so various parameters related to the advantageous section (stored in RWM 53) Initialize the value). The parameters to be initialized include, for example, the number of games played during the advantageous section counter 69a, the upper limit counter 69b, and the indication function activation game (when the indication function is activated when the small winning combination B is won). And "0" is optimal as the value at the time of initialization. Furthermore, it is preferable that the addresses of the RWM 53 which store parameters to be initialized be continuous. Specifically, for example, "F100", "F101", "F102", and so on.

This is simple because, similar to the initialization process of RWM 53 accompanying the setting change, the process of putting "0" in the address of RWM 53 within a predetermined range can be performed by repeatedly performing the process while shifting the address one by one. It is because it can execute by the processing which The parameter cleared with the advantageous section as the upper limit value is also initialized at the time of setting change.
Note that the address of RWM 53, which stores parameters to be initialized, is assigned with regularity (for example, "F100", "F102", "F104", etc.), and the address is "0". Even when the initialization process is performed by repeatedly performing the process of entering while shifting the address by a predetermined value (in the above case, “2”), the process can be performed with a simplified process.

Here, in the case where the upper limit counter 69b is a decrement counter, when the count value is "0", whether it is "0" due to being initialized or the advantageous section has an upper limit value (1500 games It can not be known from the count value whether or not it becomes “0”. Therefore, when determining whether or not the upper limit of the advantageous interval is determined based on the count value of the upper limit counter 69b, the count value of the upper limit counter 69b and data indicating whether or not it is the advantageous interval (in the predetermined area of RWM 53 Needs to be done on the basis of
On the other hand, when the upper limit counter 69b is the increment counter, the count value of the upper limit counter 69b is read, and when it is "1500", it can be determined that it is the upper limit of the advantageous section. That is, it can be determined whether or not the upper limit is achieved only by the count value of the upper limit counter 69b.

(24) Update of RWM 53 data shown in FIG. 27 to FIG. 30, and the processes in FIG. 32, FIG. 36 and FIG. 37 are executed at the end of the game of each game, more specifically after .
On the other hand, in the second embodiment, since the management information such as the advantageous segment ratio is continuously displayed, the same management information (for example, the advantageous segment ratio) may be displayed a plurality of times in one game .
And an advantageous section ratio etc. can also be considered at the time of a display whenever it calculates.
From the above, in one game, the same management information (e.g., an advantageous section ratio) may be calculated a plurality of times.
(25) The above embodiment and various modifications are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in combination as appropriate.

Subsequently, third and subsequent embodiments of the present invention will be described.
In the third and subsequent embodiments, the meanings of the terms are as follows.
The "instruction game section" refers to a game section in which an instruction function activation game is always executed or a frequency of execution is increased in a game having an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch in an advantageous section.
The "instruction game section" is similar to the conventional AT (abbreviation for "assist time". In the case where AT is executed in RT with a high probability of replay win, "ART").
In the following description, the "instruction game section" will be referred to as "AT" as necessary.

"Always execute the instruction function operation game" is a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, specifically, at the time of replay B group winning of the embodiment, at the time of replay C group, at the time of small combination B group winning , And in the small winning combination C group, it means that the instruction function must be activated.
Since the AT of this embodiment is executed in principle at RT3 (replay probability), it is basically "ART", but may fall to RT2 due to a player's mistake in operation of the stop switch. Even if it falls from RT3 to RT2, continue AT. Furthermore, the AT may be executed by RTs other than RT3 and RT2. Therefore, the AT at RT which is not a high probability of replay like RT3 is not strictly "ART". When the player falls from RT3 to RT2 during AT, the instruction function is activated at the time of replay B-group winning to display the correct pressing order by the operation of the instruction function in order to return to RT3.

On the other hand, "the execution frequency has been increased" means that the instruction function is not activated at "100%", for example, at the time of the small winning combination B group winning or the small winning combination C group winning, for example 95% It is a concept that includes
As will be described later, in the command game period, when the small winning combination B is won, a lottery is performed to determine whether to activate the instruction function, and when the lottery is won, it is conceivable to activate the instruction function. In such a case, it was defined that "the execution frequency was increased" because it does not mean "always activate the indication function".

As described above, since the instruction game section is a game section for executing the instruction function operation game, it is necessary that it is an advantageous section as its premise. Therefore, when the instruction game section is always an advantageous section, and the instruction game section is a normal section or a standby section (hereinafter, the normal section and the standby section may be collectively referred to as "non-advantage section") There is no.
Further, the start and end of the instruction game section can be set arbitrarily. For example, the instruction game section may be started simultaneously with the start of the advantageous section. Alternatively, even when the advantageous section is started, the instruction game section may be started when the start condition of the instructed game section is satisfied in the advantageous section without immediately starting the instructed game section.

Furthermore, the termination condition of the instruction game section may be determined at the start of the instruction game section, or the termination condition may not be determined at the start of the instruction game section.
In the case where the termination condition of the instruction game section is determined by the start of the instruction game section, the instruction game section may be extended after the instruction game section is started.
Here, various parameters (variables) can be used to determine the command game section. For example, firstly, the ending condition of the instruction game section may be set by the number of games. Specifically, at the start of the command game section, setting the number of games in the command game section to, for example, the "50" game or the "100" game may be mentioned.

  Second, the end condition of the instruction game section may be set by the number of payouts. If it sets in this way, it will become the same termination conditions as a special game. Specifically, the end condition of the instruction game section may be set to, for example, "the number of payout sheets has exceeded 300".

Furthermore, thirdly, the end condition of the instruction game section may be set by the difference number. Specifically, the ending condition of the instruction game section may be set to "the difference number exceeding 200".
Fourthly, the termination condition of the instruction game section may be set by the number of times of operation of the instruction function at the time of winning the small winning combination B group and the small winning combination C group (or only the small winning combination B group). Specifically, in the game in which the termination condition of the instruction game section is set to "the number of times of the designated function operation at the time of winning the small winning combination B group and the small winning combination C group is 50 times" It can be mentioned that the instruction game section is ended.

In the command game section determined as described above, when the command game section is extended, the parameters defining the command game section are changed (also referred to as "extension", "overlay", or "addition").
For example, in the instruction game section of 100 games, when the extension of the instruction game section is performed on the 50th game and the game count is loaded on 30 games, the remaining game count of the instruction game section is from 50 to 80 Be changed.
When the instruction game section is set by the payout number of sheets, the difference sheet number, or the number of operation times of the instruction function, the value to be added to these parameters is determined when extending the instruction game section in the same manner as above. Add (add) the value.

Also, based on the transition of the gaming state, the instruction game section (AT) may be started and ended.
Here, the “playing state” may include a control state controlled by the main control board 50 in addition to the above-described RT (lottery state). That is, the gaming state is a concept including both the lottery state and the control state.
Further, the “control state” is a gaming state that can be determined regardless of RT (a control state may be linked to RT as described later).
As the control state, for example, concepts such as precursor, CZ (abbreviation of "chance zone"), AT, and the like can be mentioned. More specifically, as the control state performed in the advantageous section, the state (high probability state) or low state (low probability state) in which the transition probability to the instructed game section (AT) is high, or the indicated game section (AT) As the control state, various control states in consideration of game characteristics such as a state (such as an additional specialization zone) in which the additional winning probability of the instruction game section (AT) is high or a low state may be mentioned.
The control state of the normal section is normal, and the control state of the advantageous section is the precursor, CZ, or AT.

For example, at the same time as the transition to the advantageous section, the control state is changed from "normal" to "predictive". In this precursor, there is a case of transition (promotion) to CZ and a case of transition (fall) normally.
In the omen, transition to CZ is performed when the transition condition to CZ is satisfied, and transition to the normal mode is performed when transition condition to the normal condition is satisfied.
In addition, when transitioning to CZ, there are cases of transitioning to AT (promotion) and cases of transition to a precursor or normal (falling). When the transition condition to AT is satisfied in CZ, transition to AT is performed, and when the transition condition to precursor or normal is satisfied, transition to precursor or normal is made, respectively.

  In addition, in this embodiment, when it transfers to AT, when performing RT transfer (FIG. 22) similar to 1st Embodiment, it is controlled to be made to stay in RT3. For example, when it is decided to shift to AT in RT2, when the replay B group is won, the correct pressing order for shifting to RT3 is displayed by the operation of the instruction function. Furthermore, after the shift to RT3, in order to prevent the player from falling from RT3, when the replay C group is won, the correct pressing order for maintaining RT3 by the operation of the instruction function is displayed.

Also, for example, a finite RT may be provided, and may be AT while staying in the finite RT. In this case, the AT terminates when moving from that finite RT to another RT.
In addition, "limited RT" stays at the RT until it digests the predetermined game frequency, and when the predetermined game frequency is digested, it satisfies the termination condition of the RT and shifts to another RT.
For example, when transitioning to a limited RT after the end of the special game, it is possible to execute the AT in this limited RT. Then, when the predetermined number of games is digested with the limited RT, it shifts to the RT corresponding to the normal section, and ends the AT, ie, the instructed game section and the advantageous section.
Further, as in the first embodiment, in the case of transitioning to RT4 (internal middle RT) when winning a special combination, for example, RT transition may be performed when winning a special combination in a limited RT. In this case, the limited RT ends with the winning of the special part, and after the end of the special game, it is possible to start from a predetermined RT different from the limited RT (for example, non-RT in FIG. 59).
On the other hand, in the case of the specification that does not shift to RT due to the winning of the special part, even if winning the special part during the limited RT does not end the limited RT, and after the end of the special game, it was running until then It can be resumed from the middle of a finite RT.

  Further, since the precursor and CZ are executed in the advantageous section, they are game sections in which the instruction function can be operated. Therefore, although it is optional whether or not to activate the indication function, since it is during AT that constantly or frequently activates the indication function, the indication function is not activated during the precursor or CZ during AT. During aura or CZ, there are cases where the indication function is operated at a small rate or the indication function is activated only once. In addition, with the specification that shifts from normal to precursor with transition from normal segment to advantageous segment, and may fall to normal (normal segment) before moving to CZ or AT from that precursor, precursor or CZ During the section), it is necessary to execute the instruction function activation game at least once.

In particular, when transitioning to the advantageous section, the instruction function may be activated at the first winning combination of the B-group B winning in order to early achieve "at least one command function activation game is executed in the advantageous section". .
Further, since it is premised that AT is an advantageous section, when the advantageous section ends, AT also ends. Therefore, for example, when having the remaining game number of AT, when reaching 1500 games which is the upper limit of the advantageous section, the advantageous section and the AT end.

"Freeze" is to pause the progress of the game for a predetermined period and delay it, for example, accepting medals, accepting bet switch 40, accepting start switch 41, and stop switch 42. The function related to (acceptance of the stop operation of the reel 31) is to be temporarily stopped. While performing such a freeze, outputting various effects during the freeze period may be mentioned.
Freezing is performed, for example, at the end of the AT. On the other hand, if only CZ is executed after transition to the advantageous section (when AT is not executed), freezing is not executed. Therefore, after moving to the advantageous section, there are cases where freezing is performed and not performed at the end of the advantageous section.

Third Embodiment
The third embodiment is characterized in that it is possible to add the number of AT games.
As described above, there are various AT parameters, but in the third embodiment, the termination condition of AT is determined by the number of games.
In the third embodiment, FIG. 43 (Example 1) to FIG. 52 (Example 10) will be described as processing on the main control board 50 side.
Further, as processing on the sub control board 80 side, Example 1 (FIG. 53) and Example 2 (FIG. 54) will be described.
Also, in the following example, the AT is started simultaneously with the start of the advantageous section. Then, the advantageous section is ended simultaneously with the end of the AT. That is, "AT = advantageous section".
However, as in the first embodiment described above and the fourth embodiment described later, it is a matter of course that it is an advantageous section but there is a case where it is a non-AT period (for example, precursor, CZ, withdrawal period, special game, etc.) (This point will be described later).

Furthermore, the upper limit counter described in the following example corresponds to the upper limit counter 69b of the first embodiment. Furthermore, in the following Examples 1 to 10, an AT counter, an additional counter, an advantageous interval counter, and the like are provided (this does not mean that these three counters are always provided in all the examples).
In the flowcharts of FIG. 43 (example 1) to FIG. 52 (example 10), the same processes are denoted by the same step numbers. The description of the same step numbers as the already described step numbers will be omitted as appropriate.
Moreover, the count value by a counter is abbreviated as "counter value."
Furthermore, “clearing” of the counter value means initializing the counter value (in the increment counter, setting the counter value to “0”).

In the third embodiment, when a condition device (condition device shown in FIG. 17) corresponding to the addition of the advantageous section in the first embodiment is won during AT, the number of AT games is added. The number of games to be added may be predetermined according to the condition device, or the number of games to be added may be determined by lottery when the condition device to be added is won.
For example, in FIG. 17, when winning a small combination E1 of storage number "250", the number of additional games is determined to "50" (50%), "100" (40%) or "200" (10%) To be mentioned. In addition, when winning a small combination E1 of the number "750", it is mentioned that the number of additional games is set to "30" (50%), "50" (30%) or "100" (20%) Be
In addition, regardless of the above example, it is possible to predetermine the number of AT addition games based on the control state and the condition device, or to draw the AT addition number of games based on the control state and the condition device. Good. In this case, even when, for example, the same condition device is won, it is possible to make the number of additional games to be determined or selected differ depending on the control state being executed.

In the third embodiment, as described above, “AT = advantage zone”, and as in the first embodiment, the upper limit of the advantage segment is 1,500 games. Therefore, the maximum AT will be 1500 games.
Here, when starting the AT, an initial value of the AT's game frequency is determined, and during the AT, the (remaining) game frequency of the AT is added according to the condition device that has won.
When adding the AT game frequency, the AT total game frequency (means the sum of the AT game frequency and the remaining game frequency. The same applies hereinafter) is unlimited regardless of whether it exceeds "1500". There are a case where the addition is performed and a case where the addition exceeding “1500” is not performed.
As a result of adding the number of AT games, even if the total number of AT games exceeds “1500”, the number of AT games to be executed is limited to “1500”.

Furthermore, when the number of games is added during AT, the method of executing addition under the same conditions from the beginning to the end and the difficulty of being added as the upper limit of 1500 games is approached (the expected value of the addition decreases) ) Method. As an example of the latter, when the initial value of the number of AT play is, for example, "100" and the addition is not performed at all, for example, 80 in the case where the condition device to be added first is won When the total number of ATs is "1000" or more, for example, when the winning condition is the same as the above, for example, the probability of 80% is added. It is a case where the number "50" is selected.
In addition, also when it controls in this way, the case where addition is continued even if the total game number of ATs exceeds "1500", and the case where addition is canceled are mentioned.
Furthermore, if the AT continues to be added even if the total number of games exceeds "1500", a method of storing the value even if the value exceeds "1500", and "minutes exceeding" 1500 " And the method of clearing the value.

FIG. 43 (example 1) below is an example of executing addition (adding to a counter) without any limitation, even if the total game count of AT exceeds “1500” (regardless of the total game count).
Further, FIG. 44 (example 2) to FIG. 46 (example 4) are examples in which the addition is not performed (not added to the counter) when the total number of times of AT play exceeds "1500". In this case, the addition lottery itself is not executed, and the addition lottery itself is executed, but after the addition lottery, it is determined whether the total number of AT games exceeds "1500", and when it exceeds "1500", There are cases where the additional lottery result is cleared. The latter is adopted in FIG. 44 (example 2) to FIG. 46 (example 4).

In addition, when it is decided to add, freeze may occur. It is for generating freeze and, during that time, outputting an additional effect (the number of games to be added etc.).
However, if it is decided to add the number of games and freeze is generated, then if the total number of ATs of AT exceeds “1500” and clears the number of additions, it is added even if the freeze occurs. It happens that it is not done.
For this reason, for example, as a result of winning the condition device to be added in the game this time and performing the addition lottery, it is decided to add, and it is determined that the number of additions is added to the remaining game number of AT. For example, in the next game, control may be performed such that a freeze is generated along with the additional effect.

  Furthermore, in FIG. 47 (example 5) to FIG. 49 (example 7), when the total game count of AT is "1000" or more (that is, as the upper limit "1500" is approached), the expected value of the additional number decreases This is an example of Here, in the case of reducing the expected value of the additional number, it is possible to lower the additional winning probability, to reduce the additional number, and to execute both of them.

Furthermore, in FIG. 50 (example 8) to FIG. 52 (example 10), when the total game number of AT is "1000" or more (that is, as the upper limit "1500" is approached), the winning combination (conditional apparatus winning) This is an example of lowering the grade of and performing an additional lottery. Here, "degrading the winning combination" is, for example, the following method.
As shown in the first embodiment, as the condition device to be subjected to the addition lottery, as shown in FIG. 17, a small combination E1 of "250" and a small combination E1 of "750" are provided. Shall be
Here, the small combination E1 of the storage number "250" is a condition device which is difficult to win because the storage number is smaller than the small combination E1 of the storage number "750". In such a case, the expected value of the additional number when winning the small combination E1 of the numeral "250" is x1, the expected value of the additional number when winning the small combination E of the numeral "750" is x2 ( It is assumed that x2 <x1).
Further, as an example of changing the expected value of the additional number, a method is employed in which a plurality of types of lottery tables are provided in advance, and the lottery table used in the additional lottery is changed.

Then, if the AT total game number is less than "1000", when winning the small combination E1 of the storage number "250", the lottery is performed with the expectation value x1 and the small combination E1 of the storage number "750" At this time, a lottery is performed with an expectation value x2.
Next, when the total game number of AT is "1000" or more, either when winning the small combination E1 of the storage number "250" or when winning the small combination E1 of the storage number "750", Perform an additional lottery with the expected value x2.
As a result, when the small winning combination E1 of “250” is won, the grade is reduced to the small winning combination E1 of “750”, and the additional drawing lottery is performed.

Alternatively, when the total game number of AT is "1000" or more, when winning the small combination E1 of the storage number "250", the lottery is performed with the expectation value x2 and the small combination E1 of the storage number "750" When winning, an additional lottery may be performed with the expectation value x3 (x3 <x2).
In addition, although said expectation value x1-x3 assumes the value which exceeds "0", it may be "0", for example. The expected value “0” of the added number is, for example, setting the winning probability of added to “0” or winning in the added lottery itself, but winning of the added number “0” may be mentioned. .

Further, for example, it is assumed that the expected value of the additional number at the time of winning the small winning combination E1 is x11, and the expected value of the additional number at the time of winning the small winning combination D is x12 (x12 <x11).
In this case, if the total game number of AT is less than "1000", the winning lottery is performed with the expectation value x11 when the small winning combination E1 is won, and the winning lottery with the expected value x12 is performed when the small winning combination D is won. .
Next, in the case where the total game number of AT is “1000” or more, when the small winning combination E1 is won, it is replaced with the small winning combination D, and the additional lottery is performed with the expectation value x12.
Even if the winning combination is replaced with a low-grade winning combination in order to lower the grade of the winning combination, the winning combination itself does not change.

  Further, in the above example, the threshold value of the total game number of ATs for which the expected value of the additional number is changed is set to "1000", but the present invention is not limited thereto. "500", "800", "1200" “1300”, “1400”, etc. can be set variously according to the specifications of the slot machine.

(Example 1)
FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing an example 1 of control processing on the main control board 50 side.
First, the main control board 50 includes, as counters, an AT counter that counts the number of digested games in AT, and an upper limit counter that counts the upper limit number of games “1500” of the advantageous section.
In the third embodiment, “100” is given as an initial value (number of games) at the start of AT. Therefore, "100" is set to the AT counter at the start of AT. And every game, "1" is decremented one by one (decrement counter).

The upper limit counter is set to an initial value "1500" at the start of AT. And every game, "1" is decremented one by one (decrement counter).
From the above, when the AT counter or the upper limit counter becomes “0”, the end condition of AT is satisfied.
In addition, if the 1BB is won during AT, the AT counter is not updated until the end of the 1BB game (counting is interrupted). On the other hand, the upper limit counter updates every game even during 1BB game. That is, since the AT counter is not updated during the internal middle game and the 1BB game, after the end of the 1BB, it resumes from the AT counter value at the time of 1BB winning.
Furthermore, the advantageous section flag corresponds to the eighth bit in the segment data of digit 2 in the first embodiment, and "1" is set during the advantageous section, and "0" when it is not the advantageous section. Is set.

  In FIG. 43A, in step S401, the main control board 50 (main CPU 55) performs command transmission processing at the time of game start to the sub control board 80. This process is a process shown in FIG. Next, at step S402, control at the time of operation of the start switch 41 is executed. In step S402, it is continued to detect whether the start switch 41 has been operated, and when it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to the next step S403.

In step S403, an internal lottery process is performed. This process is the same as the lottery of the combination by the combination lottery means 61 in the first embodiment. In the next step S404, an additional lottery is performed. Here, "overlaying" is the addition of the number of AT games. Therefore, when the game is not in the AT (in the normal section and in the advantageous section but not the AT), the additional drawing of step S404 is not executed. The additional lottery of step S404 is a process shown in (c) in the figure.
In the present embodiment, it is assumed that an AT-added lottery is executed when the condition device shown in FIG. 17 of the first embodiment is won.
Further, it is assumed that the additional number and the winning probability thereof are determined in a lottery table described later.

Next, in step S405, the main control board 50 transmits a command to the sub control board 80 when the start switch 41 is operated. This process is a process shown in (d) in the figure described later.
In the next step S406, it is continuously determined whether all the reels 31 have stopped. If it is determined that all the reels 31 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S407. In step S407, variable update processing is performed as processing at the end of the game. This process is a process shown in (e) in the figure. Then, the process according to this flowchart is ended.

If it progresses to step S401 of Fig.43 (a), command transmission processing at the time of game start of the figure (b) will be performed.
First, in step S411, the AT counter value is transmitted. In the next step S412, the upper limit counter value is transmitted. Further, in the next step S413, the value of the advantageous section flag is transmitted. The value of the advantageous section flag transmits "1" when in the advantageous section, and transmits "0" when it is not in the advantageous section. Then, the process according to this flowchart is ended. By the above processing, the main control board 50 transmits three parameters of the AT counter value, the upper limit counter value, and the value of the advantageous section flag to the sub control board 80.

When the process proceeds to step S404 of FIG. 43 (a), an additional lottery of FIG. 43 (c) is executed.
First, in step S421, a lottery table is set. The lottery table is stored in advance in the ROM 54, and defines the additional number corresponding to the winning combination and the winning probability thereof. Specifically, for example, when winning a combination of "250" at the time of winning the small combination E1 alone, the probability of determining the number of additions to "50" is 60%, the probability of determining the number of additions to "40" Setting to 40% can be mentioned. In addition, when winning a combination of "750" at the time of winning the small winning combination E1 alone, set the probability of determining the additional number to "30" to 50%, the probability of determining the additional number to "20" to 50% Can be mentioned. The winning probability and the number of extras are also determined for other condition devices.

  In the next step S422, an addition lottery is performed using the lottery table set in step S421. Then, the process proceeds to step S423, and the result (the determined number of additions) selected in step S422 is added to the AT counter value. For example, if the AT counter value up to that point is "50" (remaining game number) and the additional number is determined to be "20", the AT counter value is updated to "70". Then, the processing according to this flowchart is ended.

When the process proceeds to step S405 in FIG. 43 (a), command transmission at the time of start switch operation in FIG. 43 (d) is executed.
Here, the AT counter value is transmitted in step S431. Then, the process according to this flowchart is ended. Therefore, when the game is started, the AT counter value is transmitted in step S411, but in step S431, the AT counter value is transmitted again. When it is not determined to add the number of AT games in the game, the same value is transmitted in step S411 and step S431.

On the other hand, when it is determined to add the number of AT games, in step S431, the updated AT counter value is transmitted. When the sub control board 80 receives the AT counter value in step S411 and then receives the AT counter value again in step S431, the sub control board 80 receives the AT counter value stored in the sub control board 80 in step S431. Rewrite to AT counter value.
Before step S431, it is determined whether AT addition is executed in the game, and only when AT addition is executed, the second AT counter value in the game is transmitted in step S431. It is also good.

When the process proceeds to step S407 of FIG. 43 (a), the variable updating process of FIG. 43 (e) is executed.
First, at step S441, the AT counter value is decremented by "1". Next, at step S442, the upper limit counter value is decremented by "1". In the next step S443, it is determined whether the upper limit counter value is "0". If it is determined to be "0" (that is, when the number of games played in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit "1500"), the processing proceeds to step S445 and subsequent steps to end the AT and the advantageous section. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not "0", the process proceeds to step S444.

In step S444, it is determined whether the AT counter value is "0" and the number of executions of the instruction function operation game is "1" or more. Here, when the AT counter value is “0”, it means that the remaining game number of AT is “0”.
Further, in order to determine whether or not the number of times of execution of the indication function operation game is “1” or more, for example, an indication function operation counter or an indication function operation flag may be provided.
The indication function operation counter can cite, for example, an increment counter which increments “1” each time the indication function is operated, and if the counter value is “1” or more, the number of times of execution of the indication function operation game is It can be determined that it is "1" or more.

In addition, the indication function activation flag is turned off when the indication function activation game has not been executed even once after executing the advantageous section and AT, and turned on (also after) when the first indication function activation game is executed. Is a flag that When the instruction function operation flag is on, it can be determined that the number of times of execution of the instruction function operation game is "1" or more.

  In addition, as described in the first embodiment, when transitioning to the advantageous section, at least once, the indication function operation game (winning of the combination with the largest number of payouts among the games having the advantageous push order of the stop switch 42) In the first embodiment, the game at the time of winning the small winning combination B group (the same applies hereinafter) can not end the advantageous section. In this way, performing at least one pointing function activation game during the advantageous section is prioritized over the termination condition of the AT.

  However, it is possible to end the advantageous section when it reaches 1500 games which is the upper limit of the advantageous section without executing the instruction function operation game once (see an eleventh embodiment (FIG. 69 described later)). ). Therefore, in Example 1 of FIG. 43, it is first determined in step S443 whether or not the upper limit counter value is “0”, and when it is “0”, the advantageous interval and AT are determined without performing the determination in step S444. To finish.

  If it is determined in step S444 that “the AT counter value is“ 0 ”and the number of times the instruction function operation game is executed is“ 1 ”or more”, the end condition of the advantageous section and the AT is satisfied. move on. On the other hand, when it is judged as "No" in Step S444, processing by this flow chart is ended (the next game continues AT and an advantageous section).

  In step S445, the AT counter value is cleared (set to "0"). Next, proceeding to step S446, the upper limit counter value is cleared (set to "0"). Further, the process proceeds to step S 447, where the value of the advantageous section flag is cleared (set to “0”). In this way, when the advantageous section ends, it is necessary to clear (reset) all the parameters related to the advantageous section. Then, the processing according to this flowchart is ended.

(Example 2)
FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing an example 2 of control processing on the main control board 50 side. In Example 2 of FIG. 44, an AT counter (initial value “100”, decrement counter), an additional counter (initial value “0”, increment counter), and an upper limit counter (initial value “1500”, decrement counter) are provided as counters. . Furthermore, as in the first example, the advantageous section flag is provided.
The additional counter adds the additional number each time the number of games is added during AT.

In FIG. 44, (a) and (b) are the same as Example 1 of FIG.
Further, in the addition lottery process of FIG. 44C, after the addition lottery is executed in step S422, the process proceeds to step S451, and it is determined whether the addition counter value exceeds a specified number. Here, the specified number is set to "1400". That is, "100" is set as the initial value of the AT game frequency, and when the AT additional game frequency reaches "1400", the total AT game frequency becomes "1500" in total, and the upper limit of the advantageous section To reach. For this reason, it is set so as not to perform an addition exceeding the number of times of playing "1400".

When it is determined in step S451 in FIG. 44C that the addition counter value exceeds the specified number (“1400”), addition of the addition number is performed even if the number of additions is determined in the lottery of step S422. Then, the process according to this flowchart is ended.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S451 that the added counter value is less than or equal to the specified number, the process proceeds to step S452. In step S452, the lottery result (determined number of additions) in step S422 is added to the addition counter value. The process of the next step S423 is the same as that of the first example described above. From the above, for example, when the AT counter value before the additional lottery is “50”, the additional counter value is “200”, and the determined additional number is “30”, the AT counter value after the additional is “80”, the additional The counter value is "230".

In addition, in the command transmission process at the time of the start switch operation of FIG. 6D, the superimposition counter value is transmitted to the sub control board 80 in step S461. In the first example, the AT counter value is transmitted to the sub control board 80, but in the second example, the additional counter value is transmitted. When the superimposition counter value reaches “1400”, the sub control board 80 can determine that the superimposition has been performed until the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached.
Furthermore, in the figure (e), steps S441 to S447 are the same processes as in FIG. 43 (example 1). In addition, after step S447, the process proceeds to step S471, and the addition counter value is cleared. At the end of the advantageous section, all parameters relating to the advantageous section are cleared.

(Example 3)
FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing Example 3 of the control process on the main control board 50 side.
In Example 3 of FIG. 45, as a counter, an AT counter (set to an initial value “0” and an increment counter that increments “1” each time AT is consumed for one game), an additional counter (initial value “100” , Increment counter), and upper limit counter (same as example 1). Furthermore, the prescribed number is set to "1500" which is the upper limit game number of the advantageous segment.

In FIG. 45, (a) and (b) are processes similar to FIG. 43 (example 1).
Further, in FIG. 6C, steps S421 and S422 are the same processes as in the first example. After step S422, the process proceeds to step S451, and it is determined whether the added counter value has exceeded a specified number ("1500"). The fact that the additional counter value exceeds the specified number "1500" means that the total number of AT games has exceeded "1500" in the third example. Therefore, when the addition counter value exceeds the prescribed number "1500", even if the number of additions is determined in step S422, the number of additions is not added, and the processing according to this flowchart is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S451 that the additional counter value is less than or equal to the specified number, the process proceeds to step S452, and the determined additional number is added to the additional counter value. Note that step S 423 (addition of the number of additions to the AT counter value) shown in example 1 of FIG. 43 is not performed. In this example 3, the AT counter is only for counting the number of games played in the AT.

FIG. 44D shows the same process as that of FIG. 44 (example 2).
Furthermore, in the same figure (e), "1" is added to the AT counter value in step S481. During AT, the AT counter value is incremented. The next steps S 442 and S 443 perform the same process as in the first example. In the next step S 482, it is determined whether the AT counter value is equal to or greater than the additional counter value. In Example 3, when the number of AT games is equal to or greater than the number of additional games, it is determined that the end conditions of the AT and the advantageous section are satisfied.

  In Example 3 of FIG. 45, the initial value of the AT counter value is “0”, and the initial value of the additional counter value is “100”. Then, when the AT game count reaches "100" without the AT game count addition being performed even once, the AT counter value becomes "100" and the add-on counter value becomes "100," "AT counter value It will satisfy を 満 た す over counter value 値. When it is judged as "Yes" in Step S482, it progresses to Step S483. On the other hand, when it is judged as "No", since the termination condition of an advantageous section and AT is not satisfied, processing by this flow chart is ended.

In step S483, it is determined whether or not the number of times of execution of the instruction function operation game is "1" or more. When it is “1” or more, since the termination condition of the advantageous section and AT is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S445. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not "1" or more, the processing according to the present flowchart is ended in order to continue the AT and the advantageous section next time for the next game.
The process after step S445 is the same process as that of FIG. 44 (example 2).

(Example 4)
FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing an example 4 of the control process on the main control board 50 side.
In Example 4 of FIG. 46, the counter is set to an additional counter (an increment counter set to an initial value "100"), an advantageous interval counter (initial value "0", and every game during AT and during an advantageous interval. It has an increment counter) which is incremented by one.
In Example 4, no AT counter is provided. The number of AT games is counted by the advantageous section counter. That is, the advantageous interval counter of the fourth example has the same function as the AT counter (increment counter) of the third example.
Furthermore, in Example 4, the upper limit counter provided in Example 1 and the like is not provided. In Example 4, the advantageous interval counter doubles as the upper limit counter. The prescribed number is “1500” as in the third example.

In Example 4 of FIG. 46, (a), (c) and (d) are the same processes as in FIG. 45 (Example 3).
Further, in FIG. 7B, when step S401 is started, the advantageous section counter value is transmitted to the sub control board 50 in step S491. Next, the process proceeds to step S413, and the value of the advantageous section flag is transmitted to the sub control board 50 as in the example 1 and the like.

  Furthermore, in the same figure (e), "1" is added to the advantageous section counter value in step S501. In the next step S502, it is determined whether the advantageous segment counter value is "1500" or more. If it is determined that the advantageous segment counter value is "1500" or more, it means that the upper limit of the advantageous segment has been reached, so the process proceeds to step S504 in order to end the advantageous segment and AT. On the other hand, when it is determined that the advantageous segment counter value is not "1500" or more, the process proceeds to step S503.

In step S503, it is determined whether the advantageous section counter value is greater than or equal to the additional counter value. Similar to step S 482 in FIG. 45 (example 3), when the advantageous section counter value becomes equal to or greater than the additional counter value, it means that there is no remaining game count of AT. If "Yes" is determined in the step S503, the process proceeds to the step S483, and if "No" is determined, the processing according to the flowchart is ended (the next game is continued with the advantageous section and AT).
Step S483 is processing similar to that of FIG. 45 (example 3). When it is judged as "Yes" at Step S483, it progresses to Step S504, and when it is judged as "No", the processing by this flowchart is ended.
In step S504, the advantageous section counter value is cleared. The next steps S 447 and S 471 are the same processes as in FIG. 45 (example 3).

(Example 5)
FIG. 47 is a flowchart of an example 5 of the control process on the main control board 50 side.
In Example 5 of FIG. 47, the counter is set to an AT counter (a decrement counter which is set to an initial value “100” and decrements by “1” during AT), an added counter (set to an initial value “0” and added) An increment counter for adding the number of additions each time, and an upper limit counter (a decrement counter which is set to an initial value "1500" and which is decremented by one for each game in an advantageous section). Furthermore, the prescribed number is set to "1000".

In Example 5 of FIG. 47, (a) and (b) are the same processes as in FIG. 43 (Example 1).
In addition, in the figure (c), two types of lottery tables A and B are provided for the lottery of the number of additions. The lottery table is not limited to two types, and three or more types (for example, super high probability, high probability, low probability, etc.) may be provided.

The lottery table A is a lottery table in which the probability that the number of AT games is added is set to a normal probability or a high probability. On the other hand, the lottery table B is a lottery table in which the probability that the number of AT games is added is set lower than that of the lottery table A.
The lottery table A is not limited to this, and the expected value of the additional number may be set to x1, and the lottery table B may have the expected value of the additional number set to x2 (x2 <x1).
Furthermore, combining the both, the lottery table A has a high probability of winning in addition, and the expected value of the number of additionals is set to medium to large, and the lottery table B has a low probability of winning in additions and an expected value of the number of superpositions. It may be set to small.

  In FIG. 7C, first, in step S511, the lottery table A is set as a standard lottery table for addition. In the next step S451, it is determined whether the added counter value is greater than or equal to a specified number ("1000"). If it is determined that the addition counter value is not greater than or equal to the specified number, the process proceeds to step S422, and if it is determined that the addition counter value is greater than or equal to the specified number, the process proceeds to step S512.

In step S512, the lottery table A set in step S511 is reset to the lottery table B. Then, the process proceeds to step S422. By this processing, when the number of additions is less than "1000", the addition lottery is performed using the lottery table A, and when the number of additions is "1000" or more, the addition lottery is performed using the lottery table B. Therefore, the ease of being added is changed with the number of additions “1000” as a threshold.
The process after step S422 is the same process as FIG. 44 (example) 2. Also, FIGS. (D) and (e) are the same processes as FIG. 44 (example 2).

(Example 6)
FIG. 48 is a flowchart illustrating an example 6 of the control process on the main control board 50 side.
In Example 6 of FIG. 48, the counter is set to an AT counter (an increment counter which is set to an initial value “0” and increments by “1” in AT), an overlay counter (set to an initial value “100” and is overlaid) An increment counter for adding the number of additions each time, and an upper limit counter (a decrement counter which is set to an initial value "1500" and which is decremented by one for each game in an advantageous section). Furthermore, the prescribed number is set to “1000” as in FIG. 47 (example 5).

When Example 6 of FIG. 48 and Example 5 of FIG. 47 are compared, the following points are different.
Since the AT counter is an increment counter with an initial value "0" as in FIG. 45 (example 3), the addition number is not added to the AT counter when the addition lottery is performed.
In Example 6 of FIG. 48, (a) and (b) are the same processes as in FIG. 47 (Example 5).
Further, in FIG. 48C, after the addition lottery in step S422, the process proceeds to step S452, the addition number is added to the addition counter value, and the process according to this flowchart is ended (step S423 of FIG. 47 (example 5). Do not process).
Further, (d) of the figure shows the same processing as that of FIG. 47 (example 5). Furthermore, FIG. 45E shows the same process as that of FIG. 45 (example 3).

(Example 7)
FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing an example 7 of the control process on the main control board 50 side.
In Example 7 of FIG. 49, the counter does not have an AT counter as in FIG. 46 (Example 4), and is an increment counter (set to an initial value “100” and increments the number of additions each time it is added. And an upper limit counter (an initial value "0", and an increment counter which is incremented by one for each game during an advantageous section). Furthermore, the prescribed number is set to “1000” as in FIG. 47 (example 5).
In Example 7 of FIG. 49, the upper limit counter also plays the role of an AT counter (a counter that counts the number of ATs played).

In Example 7 of FIG. 49, (a), (b), and (d) are the same processes as in FIG. 46 (Example 4). Further, (c) of the figure shows the same processing as that of FIG. 48 (example 6).
Furthermore, in the same figure (e), "1" is added to the upper limit counter value in step S521. Next, in step S522, it is determined whether the upper limit counter value is equal to or greater than "1500". If it is determined that the upper limit counter value is equal to or greater than "1500", the upper limit to the continuation of the advantageous section has been reached, so the process proceeds to step S446 in order to end the advantageous section and AT.

  On the other hand, when it is judged as "No" by step S522, it progresses to step S523. In step S523, it is determined whether the upper limit counter value is greater than or equal to the additional counter value. The upper limit counter is a counter that adds “1” to each game during the advantageous section, while the additional counter is a counter that adds an additional number as an initial value “100”, so “upper limit counter value When it becomes 上 over counter value, it means that there is no remaining game number of AT. If "Yes" is determined in the step S523, the process proceeds to the step S483, and if "No" is determined, the processing according to the flowchart is ended because the next game is also continued to be AT.

In step S483, as described above, it is determined whether or not the instruction function operation game has been performed one or more times. If it has been performed, the process proceeds to step S446 in order to end the advantageous section and the AT. On the other hand, when it is judged as "No" by step S483, since next game also continues AT, the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.
The processes in steps S446, S447, and S471 are the same as those in FIG. 47 (example 3). Then, the processing according to this flowchart is ended.

(Example 8)
FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an example 8 of control processing on the main control board 50 side.
In Example 8 of FIG. 50, the counter includes an AT counter, an overlay counter, and an upper limit counter similar to those of FIG. 44 (Example 2). Further, the prescribed number is set to “1000” as in FIG. 47 (example 5).
In the example 8 of FIG. 50, in the flowchart of (a), after the internal lottery of step S403, the process proceeds to step S531, and the conditional device group setting process is performed. The other processing of (a) is the same processing as that of FIG. 43 (example 1).
FIG. 44B shows the same process as that of FIG. 44 (example 2).

The figure (c) is a flow chart which shows condition device group set processing in Step S Step S531.
First, in step S 541, “0” is set as the condition device group number.
Here, the “condition device group number” is a number obtained by dividing the condition device to be the target of the additional lottery among the plurality of condition devices drawn in the internal lottery into a plurality of groups and attaching the group to each group.

In this example, two “0” and “1” are illustrated as the condition device group numbers. And, for each condition device group number, there is a lottery table for additional lottery.
Furthermore, let the lottery table corresponding to the conditional device group number “0” be a lottery table A, and let the lottery table corresponding to the conditional device group number “1” be a lottery table B.
Further, the lottery table B is set so that the expected value of the number of additions is smaller than that of the lottery table A.

Specifically, for example, in the first embodiment, the expected value of the additional number when the single winning combination E1 is won alone is set to “x1”, and the expected value of the additional number when winning the small combination D is set to “x2” It is assumed that Then, it is assumed that “x1> x2” (the small winning combination E1 has a higher expected value of the number of additionals than the small winning combination D wins).
In this case, the condition device group number corresponding to the small winning combination D is “1”, and the condition device group number corresponding to the small winning combination E1 is “0”.

Therefore, when the small winning combination D is won, since the condition device group number is "1", the lottery table B is set. On the other hand, when the small winning combination E1 is won, since the condition device group number is "0", the lottery table A is set.
Then, the expected value of the additional number when the additional lottery is performed using the lottery table A is "x1", and the expected value of the additional number when the additional lottery is performed using the lottery table B is "x2" .

Description will be returned to FIG. 50 (c).
If the condition device group number "0" is set in step S541, the process proceeds to step S542. In step S 542, it is determined whether the added counter value is equal to or greater than a specified number (“1000”). If it is determined that the number is not greater than the specified number, the processing according to this flowchart is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the addition counter value is equal to or more than the specified number, the process proceeds to step S543, and the condition device group number "1" is set. Then, the process according to this flowchart is ended.

  Therefore, in the above example, when the small winning combination D is won, since the condition device group number corresponding to the small winning combination D is originally "1", it remains "1". On the other hand, when the small winning combination E1 is won, the condition device group number "0" is set in principle, but when the added counter value is "1000" or more, the condition device group number "1" is again Is set.

In (d) of the drawing, a lottery table corresponding to the condition device group number is set in step S551. In the above example, the lottery table A (expected value “x1”) is set when the conditional device group number “0”, and the lottery table B (expected value “x2”) is set when the conditional device group number “1”. Ru. The subsequent processing after step S422 is similar to that shown in FIG. 44 (example 2).
Moreover, in the example 8 of FIG. 50, (e) and (f) are processes similar to (d) and (e) of FIG. 44 (example 2), respectively.

Although two types of “0” and “1” are listed as the condition device group numbers in the above example, three or more types may be provided. For example, assuming that the expected value of the additional number is “x1>x2> x3” and the additional counter value is less than “1000”, the lottery table of the expected value “x1” is used and the additional counter value is greater than “1000” and less than “1200”. Then, the lottery table of the expected value “x2” is used, and when the added counter value is “1200” or more, the lottery table of the expected value “x3” is used.

  As described above, in FIG. 50 (example 8), when the small winning combination E1 is won, the additional drawing is performed so as to correspond to the expected value of the small combination E1, but when the additional counter value is “1000” or more Is to be added to match the expectation value of the small part D. That is, when the number of additional games increases and approaches the upper limit value "1500" of the advantageous section, the grade of the winning combination is lowered to perform the additional lottery.

(Example 9)
FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an example 9 of the control process on the main control board 50 side.
In Example 9 of FIG. 51, the counter includes an AT counter, an overlay counter, and an upper limit counter similar to those of FIG. 45 (Example 3). Further, the prescribed number is set to “1000” as in FIG. 47 (example 5).
The processes (a), (b), (e) and (f) in FIG. 51 are the same as (a), (b), (d) and (e) in FIG. 45 (example 3), respectively. It is a process.
Further, in FIG. 51, the process (c) is the same process as (c) in FIG. 50 (example 8).
Furthermore, the process of (d) in FIG. 51 is different from (d) of FIG. 50 (example 8) in that step S423 is not included. Others are processes similar to (d) of FIG. 50 (example 8).

(Example 10)
FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing an example 10 of the control process on the main control board 50 side.
In the example 10 of FIG. 52, the counter is provided with the upper counter and the upper limit counter similar to those of FIG. 49 (example 7) (without the AT counter). Further, the prescribed number is also set to “1000” as in FIG. 49 (example 7).
In FIG. 52, the processes (a), (b), (e) and (f) are the same as (a), (b), (d) and (e) in FIG. 49 (example 7). It is a process.
Also, in FIG. 52, the process (c) is the same process as (c) in FIG. 50 (example 8).
Furthermore, the process of (d) in FIG. 52 is the same process as that of FIG. 51 (example 9).

As described above, although FIG. 43 (example 1) to FIG. 52 (example 10) have been described, basically, an AT counter for counting the number of AT games, an additional counter for counting the number of AT games, An upper limit counter (advantage interval counter) for counting the upper limit "1500" of the interval is provided.
Also, these counters may be incremented or decremented.
Furthermore, the AT counter may not be provided as shown in FIG. 46 (example 4) or 49 (example 7). In this case, the AT game frequency is substantially counted by another counter.
Furthermore, in the above examples 1 to 10, the additional drawing is performed according to the condition device that has won. Here, when a condition device to be added is won, a predetermined number may be added unconditionally without performing a lottery.

In addition, when performing the addition lottery, as shown in FIG. 43 (example 1), the number of additions may be determined regardless of the number of additions so far.
On the other hand, when carrying out the addition lottery, as shown in FIG. 47 (example 5) and FIG. 50 (example 8), the number of additions may be determined in consideration of the number of additions up to the present time.
“In consideration of the number of additions” is to make the number of additions smaller (the expected value of the number of additions smaller) in the subsequent addition lottery as the number of additions increases. This makes it possible to moderate the rate of increase in the number of games added.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 43 (example 1), it is also possible to execute the addition without restriction. If the addition is executed without limit, for example, the remaining game count of AT may be "2000", "3000", and the like. However, even if such a game count is reached, since the upper limit game count "1500" of the advantageous section is prioritized (FIG. 43E, in step S443), the AT ends at that point.

However, as shown in FIG. 43 (example 1), when the AT game number is added without restriction, if the number of the added number is notified to the player as it is, the upper limit game number "1500" of the advantageous section is added. In some cases, the number may be reported. In this case, the player may misunderstand that the player can play the game beyond the upper limit number of times "1500".
Therefore, the sub control board 80 performs various controls as described below with respect to the notification of the number of AT games and the number of added games in response to the above-described point.

FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an example 1 of the control process related to the advantageous section and the AT on the side of the sub control board 80 and the addition.
In the example 1 of FIG. 53, (a) is a process of receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 50.
For example, when FIG. 43 (example 1) is taken as an example, the process of receiving the command transmitted in steps S411 to S413 in FIG. 43B and step S431 in FIG. 43D is executed.
In the above examples 1 to 10, the AT counter value or the additional counter value is transmitted. However, in the examples of FIGS. 53 and 54, it is assumed that the AT counter value and the additional number are transmitted.

  In FIG. 53 (a), in step S601, processing for receiving an AT counter value is executed. This process is a process of receiving the AT counter value and storing it in the RWM 83 of the sub control board 80. In the next step S602, a process ((b) in the figure) for receiving the number of additions is executed. In the next step S603, reception processing of the advantageous segment flag is executed. This process is a process of receiving the value (“0” or “1”) of the advantageous section flag and storing the value in the RWM 83 of the sub control board 80 as in step S601. Further, in the next step S604, processing ((d) in the figure) for receiving the effect group number (see FIG. 21) is executed.

When the process proceeds to step S602, the process (b) in FIG.
First, in step S611, the received addition number is added to the addition counter. The overlay counter is provided on the sub control board 80 side. Next, proceeding to step S612, it is determined whether the added counter value exceeds a specified number. Here, the specified number is set to "1500". Therefore, in this example, as in the case of FIG. 45 (example 3), it is determined that the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached when the added counter value exceeds “1500”. If it is determined in step S612 that the addition counter value exceeds the specified number ("1500"), the process proceeds to step S613, and if it is determined that the added number is less than or equal to the specified number, the process proceeds to step S614.

In step S613, the additional effect suppression flag is set to "1". Then, the process proceeds to step S614. Here, the “addition effect suppression flag” does not output the addition effect when the addition number is already “1500”, and enables the addition effect when the addition number is “1500” or less. , It is a flag for making the judgment.
In step S614, the number of additional games in the game is stored (in RWM 83 of the sub control board 80). Then, the processing according to this flowchart is ended.

Further, when the process proceeds to step S604, the process of (c) in the drawing is executed.
First, in step S621, it is determined whether or not there is an additional number in the game. This determination is performed by determining whether the number of additions stored in step S614 is "0". Then, if it is determined that the additional number is included, the process proceeds to step S 622. If it is determined that the additional number is not included, the process proceeds to step S 625.
In step S 622, it is determined whether the additional effect suppression flag is “1”. If it is determined that it is "1", the process proceeds to step S623. If it is determined that it is not "1", the process proceeds to step S624.

  In step S623, an effect with no additional effect is selected. That is, even if the additional number has reached the specified number (“1500”) and even if the additional lottery is won in the game, it is not possible to add more than the current one, so control is performed so as not to output additional effects. The effect selected here is a normal effect or an effect corresponding to the received effect group number (for example, at the time of replay winning, an effect (blue etc.) suggesting replay winning). Then, the process according to this flowchart is ended.

On the other hand, when it is judged as "No" by step S622 and it progresses to step S624, the effect with additional production is made selectable. For example, an effect of notifying all or a part of the additional number in the game may be mentioned. In addition, it is not necessary to necessarily select the effect with the additional effect in the game for which the number of additions has been determined, for example, transition to the continuous effect, etc., and then select the effect with the additional effect in several game digestion It is also good.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S621 that the game does not have an additional number and the process proceeds to step S625, a normal effect is output. As the normal effect, as described above, it is possible to output an effect corresponding to the winning combination (effect group number) in the game. Then, the processing according to this flowchart is ended.

FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing an example 2 of the control process related to the advantageous section and the AT on the side of the sub control substrate 80 and the addition.
In the example 2 of FIG. 54, (a) is a process of receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 50. First, in step S631, a process of receiving the ball-out suppression flag is executed. Here, the output ball suppression flag is a flag (command) transmitted from the main control board 60 to the sub control board 80, and when it is "1", it means that the additional effect is suppressed, " When it is “0”, it means that the additional effect is not suppressed. That is, when the pop-out ball suppression flag "1" is transmitted from the main control board 50, it becomes an instruction to suppress the additional effect.
In Example 1 of FIG. 53, as shown in (b), the process of setting the additional effect suppression flag is performed on the sub control substrate 80 side. On the other hand, in Example 2 of FIG. 54, it is determined by the main control board 60 whether or not to suppress the additional effect, and the determination result is transmitted to the sub control board 80 as the ball-out suppression flag.

As a method of the main control substrate 50 transmitting the ball-out suppression flag, for example, the following method may be mentioned.
Taking FIG. 44 (example 2) as an example, when “Yes” is determined in step S451 in FIG. 44C, the ball-out flag set on the main control board 50 is turned on. Then, in FIG. 44 (d), after the step S461, the ball-out suppression flag is transmitted.

The example 2 of FIG. 54 is the same as the example 1 of FIG. 53 except for steps S631 and S632.
In step S631, the process (b) in the figure is performed.
First, in step S 641, when the ball-out suppression flag is received, it is determined whether the value is “1”. If it is determined that it is "1", the process proceeds to step S642. If it is determined that it is not "1", the process proceeds to step S643.

In step S 642, “1” is set in the additional effect suppression flag stored in the RWM 83 of the sub control board 80, and the process according to this flowchart ends. On the other hand, if it progresses to step S643, "0" will be set to an addition production suppression flag, and the processing by this flowchart will be ended.
Therefore, the top effect suppression flag on the side of the sub control board 80 is set to “1” when the received ball withdrawal suppression flag is “1”, and the overhead effect suppression flag is set when the received ball withdrawal suppression flag is “0”. Is set to "0". Therefore, in example 2 of FIG. 54, the additional effect suppression flag is switched according to the information transmitted from the main control board 60.

In FIG. 54C, as in FIG. 53 (example 1), it is not necessary to judge whether the added counter value exceeds the specified number, so the added number is added to the added counter in step S611, and the next step is performed. Save the number of additions in S614.
Further, the effect group number reception process of (d) in the figure is the same process as that of FIG. 53 (example 1).

  When the sub control board 80 outputs the additional effect, for example, when the additional number determined in the game is "200", all ("200") of the additional number may be notified in the effect of the game. However, it is also possible to inform in small increments (divide the number of additions and notify) in a plurality of games (for example, continuous effects) including the game. Specifically, when the additional number in the game is "200", the additional number "100" is notified in the game, "50" is notified in the next game, and "50" in the next game. And the like.

FIG. 55 is a diagram showing an example of image display of the image display device 23 by the sub control substrate 80 regarding superimposition in the AT, and is a diagram showing Examples 1 to 4.
First, in Example 1, the image display device 23 before being added is "digested G (meaning" digested game number of AT "" 1200 "," remaining G (meaning "number of remaining game number of AT") 300 "" Shows an example displayed. Therefore, since “the number of times of AT-digested games + the number of remaining games = 1500”, the number of executable AT games has already reached the upper limit.
In this case, in Example 1, even if 500 games are internally added (meaning, for example, the case of step S 423 in FIG. 43 (c)), the effect on the display change of the number of additions and the addition is performed Absent. Therefore, the display after the addition remains as it is before the addition.

Of course, "500" may be added to the counters (AT counter, superimposing counter, etc.) held on the side of the sub control board 80 when 500 games are added. The number of AT games and the number of added games may be real number values managed by a counter, and only display may be performed as in Example 1. In the case of such control, an internal counter and a display counter are provided on the sub control board 80 side.
Alternatively, the counter may not be updated even if it is loaded on 500 games.
By controlling the image display as in the first example, it is possible to suppress an effect relating to unnecessary addition.

In the second example, when the number of digested games at AT is 1200 and the number of remaining games is 200, when 500 games are internally added, the correct value for the number of remaining games (the number of remaining games after the addition is given) Is an example of switching to another display without displaying. In Example 2, the number of remaining games may be displayed as "Congratulations" or "Congratulations". In addition, it may be displayed as "?".

  In the second example, when the total of the number of digested games and the number of remaining games of AT is “1500” or less, the number of remaining games is displayed. However, by performing additional addition, the total number of games of AT is “ When it exceeds 1500 ", the display of the number of remaining games is not displayed so that the player can grasp. The player can grasp that the addition has been performed by the display of the remaining game number of AT from the specific numerical value and the display other than the numerical value. However, since a specific numerical value is not displayed for the remaining game number of AT, the player can not grasp the remaining game number of AT.

It should be noted that if "500" is added in the case of "1200" and "200" for the number of ATs with the number of digested games before the addition, the number of remaining ATs may be set as "700" on the counter. Alternatively, it may be "300".
In addition, when the display of the remaining game number of AT becomes "Congratulation" or "Congratulations", if it is a specification that AT continues up to 1500 times of the upper limit, "1500-AT digested game The player can calculate the remaining game number of AT by calculating the number of times.
Furthermore, the display of "Congratulations" or "Congratulations" informs the player that the total number of AT games has exceeded "1500" and indicates that no further addition will be made. It becomes.

  The example 3 shows an example in which "500" is added in the case where the number of times the AT has been digested is "1200" and the number of remaining games is "200", as in the example 2. Then, in Example 3, the remaining game number of AT (although not shown in FIG. 55) is “+100” and is “300”. That is, by the addition this time, the total game number of AT has reached "1500".

In the third example, when the total number of times played by the AT is "1500" or more, the display of both the number of times played by the AT and the number of remaining games is canceled and replaced with an ending effect (movie). The ending effect lasts at least a plurality of games (for example, several tens of games), and is executed until the number of AT-digested games reaches “1500”. If the final image of the ending effect prepared in advance is reached before the number of AT-games reaches "1500", the final image is continued to be displayed or the beginning of the ending effect is returned to and the image is repeated The method is mentioned.
By outputting the ending effect, it is possible to play a role of informing the player that no further addition of the number of games is to be performed.

In the fourth example, as shown in the second example, when only the number of AT-digested games is displayed and the number of remaining games is displayed as "congratulations" etc., as described above, the player can select the remaining AT. I can not know the number of games, for example, when the remaining number of AT games is "10", like "it will finish in 10 more games", the game information that AT will not be executed beyond 1500 games It is something to display. Note that the “remaining 10 games” shown in the example 4 is an example, and it is optional about how many remaining games the display of the game information is started. In addition, the player can know the remaining game number of AT by displaying the game information that the game number of AT is not executed beyond “1500”.
Example 4 can also be used in combination with Examples 1 to 3.

Further, when the addition exceeding 1500 games occurs, the addition effect itself may be displayed as "Congratulations" or "Congratulations".
Furthermore, when an addition exceeding 1,500 games occurs, a bonus image may be displayed that can be displayed only when an addition exceeding 1,500 games occurs.
Furthermore, "the occurrence of the addition exceeding 1500 games" may be set as a mission in the game Mythro. For example, when the occurrence of "the occurrence of the addition of more than 1,500 games" is generated a predetermined number of times, it is determined that the mission is achieved, and the player is given some benefit.

As described above, even if an additional game exceeding 1500 games occurs, the additional game can not be executed, but instead, a benefit (a profit) is set to prevent the player's motivation from decreasing. Is preferable.
In particular, when an additional event exceeding 1500 games occurs, it is assumed that the player is elected as a rare player, but when the player is elected a rare player, the total number of games is "1500" or more and outputs something It is unnatural to do.
In addition, "mythro game" is like what is described, for example in Paragraph No. "0680" etc. of "Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2016-104442."

FIG. 56 is a diagram for explaining how effects and the like change as the number of AT games increases in the third embodiment.
In the third embodiment, since “AT = advantageous section”, the number of obtained sheets continues to increase during the advantageous section (AT). And, in the example of FIG. 56, in order to simplify the graph, the AT is continued from “0 G” to “1500 G” for the number of games, and the number of winning is continuously increasing.
In FIG. 56, (a) is a diagram showing the relationship between the number of AT games and the effect.
In FIG. 56, the horizontal axis indicates the number of AT games, and the vertical axis indicates the number of winning. The example of (a) is an example in which 500 games are added when the number of times of digestion game of AT (advantage zone) becomes "1200" as shown in example 2 of FIG.

The AT ends at the same time as the end of the advantageous section, even when the number of games in the advantageous section reaches 1,500 games, even when it has the remaining number of games at that time.
Further, although the additional effect is performed until 1200 games, when the 500 game is won, the additional effect for the winning is not performed. Also, even if the player wins an additional event after that, no additional effect is given.

  On the other hand, the effects relating to the AT in AT continue until the number of games on the advantageous section reaches 1,500. In addition, although the display of the number of digested games and the number of remaining games of AT is performed up to 1200 games, the AT remaining number of games is displayed as shown in Example 2 of FIG. 55 when 500 games are won by 1200 games. Or stop displaying both the AT's number of digested games and the number of remaining games, as shown in Example 3 of FIG. 55, and other displays (“Holiday” shown in Example 2 of FIG. 55, Example 3 Switch to the ending effect shown).

FIG. 56 (b) shows an example (indicated by a solid line in the figure) of gradually decreasing the added lottery probability with the completion of the AT game number when the AT continues the "1500" game (in the figure, (2) It is a figure which shows the example (it shows with a dotted line in the figure) which reduces instruction | indication frequency gradually.
For example, as shown in FIG. 47 (c), the above (1) uses the lottery table A until the number of AT games is less than the "1000" game, and when it becomes "1000" or more, the lottery table B Or, as shown in FIG. 50 (c), until the AT game frequency is less than the "1000" game, the additional lottery is performed in the grade corresponding to the winning combination, but it became "1000" game or more The time corresponds to an example in which the winning combination grade is lowered and the additional drawing is performed.

In the example of (1), when the AT game frequency is less than "500" games, the added lottery probability is a high probability, and when "500" games or more and less than "1000" games, the added lottery probability is a normal probability. In the case of the "1000" game or more, the additional lottery probability is a low probability.
It should be noted that even if the AT addition probability is gradually lowered as the number of games is consumed, as long as the remaining number of ATs is held, the increase rate of the number of obtained with respect to the number of games does not change. , It becomes the same as that of FIG. 56 (a).

On the other hand, in the example of (2), the instruction frequency is controlled to be gradually lowered according to the number of AT game times.
Here, the “instruction frequency” refers to how often the instruction function is activated when the small combination B or small combination C (pushing order bell) is won during AT (the correct order It is determined what to display. For example, when the AT game frequency is less than "500" game, the instruction frequency is 100% (instruction frequency "high"), and when "500" game or more and less than "1000" game, the instruction frequency is 90% (instruction In the case of "1000" or more games, the instruction frequency may be set to 80% (instruction frequency "low") or the like.

In addition, for example, when the instruction frequency is 90%, a lottery (winning with a probability of 90%) of whether or not to operate the instruction function is performed on the small combination B group or the small combination C group (push order bell). Activate the instruction function when winning the lottery.
In addition, when the repeat frequency is less than 100% and the replay repeat winning for promoting or maintaining the RT, the correct pressing order may be always instructed, or the same as the pressing order bell winning. Frequency may determine whether to indicate or not.

If the instruction function does not operate at the time of replay double winning, it may fall to a disadvantageous RT. For example, in the first embodiment (FIG. 22), Replay 03 is displayed when Replay C is won during RT3 and falls to RT2.
Further, as in the first embodiment, when a pattern symbol is displayed in RT3, it falls to RT2. Therefore, in the example as in the first embodiment, if the instruction function does not operate at the time of winning the push order bell, it may fall to a disadvantageous RT.
If the instruction frequency is gradually reduced as the AT game frequency is consumed, the increase in the number of wins will increase gradually as the push order bell wins, so the increase in the number of wins is greater than at the instruction frequency 100%. It becomes difficult to increase. (2) of FIG. 56 (b) shows this state.

In the third embodiment, "AT = advantageous section".
On the other hand, as in the first embodiment described above and the fourth embodiment described later, there is an advantageous section but a non-AT period (a sign, a CZ, a withdrawal period, a special game, etc .; the same applies hereinafter). Of course, having.
For example, it is a case where an AT is started after an advantageous section is started and the above non-AT period is played for "n".
In this case, at the start of the AT, the advantageous section has already digested the "n" game.
In this case, as shown in FIG. 55, in the case of displaying the number of digested games etc. as an image, when displaying the number of digested games in the advantageous section including a part or all of the "n" games (example 1), In the case of n 'game, although it is reflected on the internal counter (upper limit counter shown in FIG. 43 etc.), the image display is not performed (example 2).
In the case of Example 1, it is a specification that displays the number of times of digested games in a part or all of the advantageous sections other than AT to the player, and in the case of Example 2, a specification in which only the number of times of digested game of AT is displayed to the player Become.
Furthermore, in the case of Example 1, both a) a case of displaying only the number of times of digested games in the advantageous section (not displaying the number of times of digested games of AT) and b) both of the number of digested games of advantageous areas and the number of digested games of AT There is a case to display.

Furthermore, in the third embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 56 (b), the additional lottery probability is high when the number of games is less than "500", and the additional lottery is more than "500" and less than "1000". The probability is a normal probability, and when the number of games is "1000" or more, the added lottery probability is a low probability.
Here, similarly to the above, it is assumed that after transitioning to the advantageous section, AT is started after a non-AT period of 600 games.
It should be noted that when the command function operation game is hardly executed from the start of the advantageous section to 600 games, the graph of FIG. 56 is a graph (the lower right) in which the obtained number decreases as the number of games is consumed. Become. Then, when the AT is started from 600 games, it becomes a graph (upper right) in which the number of winning points turns to increase after 600 games.

  In the above example, since the advantageous section has already consumed 600 games at the start of the AT, the maximum remaining game count of the advantageous section at the start of the AT is 900 games. Therefore, if this example is applied to FIG. 56 (b), for example, if the number of AT digested games is less than "300", the added lottery probability is high probability, and if the number of AT digested games is "300" or more and less than "600", the added lottery The probability is a normal probability, and when the number of AT-digested games is "600" or more, the additional lottery probability is set to a low probability.

Furthermore, similarly to the above, when the AT is started after transitioning to the advantageous section and after a non-AT period of 600 games, for example, in “(c) Add lottery” in FIG. When it is more than ""("Yes" in step S451), setting of the lottery table B and the like can be mentioned.
Here, the specified number is set to "600" because, as described above, when the maximum remaining number of games played in the advantageous section at the start of AT is "900", the number of game digests at "2/3" Is set as the threshold.
Thus, when the advantageous section is not always AT, for example, when starting the AT after the predetermined number of games without starting the AT at the start of the advantageous section, the expected additional value (the additional lottery probability etc.) When changing based on the number of times of digestion, it is necessary to make settings that also take account of the number of remaining games in the advantageous section.

Fourth Embodiment
Subsequently, a fourth embodiment will be described.
As shown in FIG. 1, in the first embodiment, the main control board 50 is provided with an external signal transmission means 70, and an external signal (sometimes referred to as “outer end”) to the external concentrated terminal plate 100. Send The fourth embodiment is specifically characterized in what kind of external signal is output and at what timing it is turned on / off.
Also, BB in the fourth embodiment is 1BBA or 1BBB or the like in one embodiment, and BB gaming is 1BBA gaming or 1BBB gaming or the like.

FIG. 57 is a diagram showing Example 1 (upper stage) and Example 2 (lower stage) of the time chart of the external signal in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 58 is a diagram of a third example of the time chart of the external signal.
In the example of FIG. 57 and FIG. 58, an external signal 1 indicating that BB is in operation (in BB gaming) and an external signal 2 indicating that AT is in progress are output as external signals. In addition to these external signals, it is also possible to provide an external signal (for example, a signal which is turned on when any one of AT and special game is satisfied) indicating that the player is in an advantageous state. It is.

  In the third embodiment, the AT is started simultaneously with the start of the advantageous section, and the advantageous section is ended simultaneously with the end of the AT. On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, the start of the advantageous section does not always immediately start the AT. For example, when the start condition of the AT is satisfied during the advantageous section, the AT is started. However, the point at which the advantageous section ends when the AT ends is the same as the third embodiment.

Example 1 of FIG. 57 is one in which the AT is started after the predetermined number of games have elapsed after the start of the advantageous section. When AT is started, the external signal 2 meaning AT signal is turned on. Then, it is assumed that BB is won during AT and BB game is started. At the start of the BB game, the external signal 1 indicating that the BB game is in progress is turned on. Note that the AT is interrupted based on the start of the BB game, and the AT is resumed after the end of the BB game. However, the external signal 2 maintains the on state even during the BB game.
When the BB game is over, the external signal 1 is turned off. Thereafter, when AT ends, the external signal 2 is turned off. Along with the end of AT, the advantageous section is also ended (the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off). In this example, the AT and the advantageous section end before the arrival of 1500 games which is the upper limit of the advantageous section.
In addition, when it reaches 1500 games which is the upper limit of the advantageous section, the advantageous section and the AT end even if it is the case that the AT has the remaining number of games at that time.

  In Example 2 of FIG. 57, after starting the advantageous section, the point of starting AT after the elapse of a predetermined number of games is the same as Example 1. Moreover, it is the same as Example 1 also about the point which transfered to BB game during AT. And Example 2 is an example which satisfied the termination condition of the advantageous section during BB game. Therefore, when the end condition of the advantageous section is reached, the BB game has not ended yet. Then, after the end condition of the advantageous section has elapsed, the BB game is ended.

In this case, both the external signal 1 indicating that the BB gaming is in progress and the external signal 2 indicating that the AT is in progress are on until the BB gaming is over. Then, with the end of the BB game, the external signal 1 and the external signal 2 are turned off. Note that since the advantageous section is of course ended by satisfying the end condition of the advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED 77 is also turned off at the end of the advantageous section. In addition, since AT is executed within the advantageous section, the AT also ends with the end of the advantageous section.
As described above, in the second example, the AT is ended when the end condition of the advantageous section is reached, but the external signal 2 is turned on even after the end condition of the advantageous section. Thereby, the output of the external signal 2 can be prevented from being turned off at an unnatural timing.

  As in Example 2, as an example satisfying the termination condition of the advantageous section during BB gaming, for example, first, the number of AT gaming is set in advance at the start of AT, and the number of gaming is during BB gaming There is also a case where it is subtracted. Second, there is a case where the upper limit (1500 games) of the advantageous section is reached during the BB game. For example, when the AT game frequency is set to "50" and the AT is started, when transitioning to the BB game during that AT, the AT game frequency count may be interrupted. However, with regard to the count of the upper limit "1500" game of the advantageous section, it is continued also during the BB game.

Example 3 shown in FIG. 58 is an example in which the AT is started after the predetermined number of games has elapsed after the start of the advantageous section, as in the example 1 of FIG. When AT is started, the external signal 2 is turned on. In Example 3, it is assumed that BB is not won during the advantageous section (does not shift to BB game).
Further, Example 3 is an example in which addition of the number of games is performed during AT, and the number of remaining games of AT is also reached when reaching 1500 games which is the upper limit of the advantageous section. Even in the case of having AT's remaining game count when reaching 1500 games which is the upper limit of the advantageous section, the advantageous section and the AT are ended. Based on this, when reaching 1500 games which is the upper limit of the advantageous section, the external signal 2 is turned off.

In addition, when winning the special part near the end of the advantageous section, when ending the 1500 game of the advantageous section while inside the special part, during the special game that the special part wins and shifts, “the advantageous section It is not possible to output an effect such as "How many times a special game is inside." This is because data on the advantageous section is reset by reaching 1500 games of the advantageous section. However, although the actual advantageous section ends, it is possible to output an effect as if the advantageous section (AT) continues even during the special game in terms of the appearance of the effect.

At the end of the advantageous section, the data regarding the advantageous section stored in the main control board 50 is cleared, but the data regarding the advantageous section stored in the sub control board 80 (transmitted from the main control board 50 The data stored based on the incoming command may be cleared or not cleared.
If not cleared, it is also possible to display a numerical value exceeding “1500” for the number of games during the advantageous section during the special game.
In addition, when the special winning combination is won near the end of the advantageous section, when an effect such as an ending effect has been output, the ending effect may be canceled and the special winning combination may be notified immediately.

Fifth Embodiment
Subsequently, a fifth embodiment will be described. In the fifth embodiment, the AT is started or the AT is ended along with the transition of the gaming state (RT or control state). In the fifth embodiment, the following example 1 and example 2 will be described.
FIG. 59 is a diagram showing RT transition in Example 1 of the fifth embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 22 of the first embodiment.
In Example 1 of the fifth embodiment, the advantageous section is started simultaneously with the start of the BB game. Therefore, in the figure, during 1 BBA operation and 1 BBB operation, it becomes an advantageous section.
In addition, both at the end of the 1 BBA operation and at the end of the 1 BBB operation, transition to non-RT (this point is different from the first embodiment).

  Non-RT maintains a favorable interval. In non-RT, the Replay A alone is not drawn, and the Replay C group is drawn (as in RT3 of the first embodiment). When the replay C group is won, the instruction function is not activated. Therefore, Replay 01 or Replay 03 is won by the operation (luck) of the player's stop switch 42. Then, when Replay 01 wins, it shifts to RT5 (RT newly provided in the fifth embodiment), and when Replay 03 wins, it shifts to RT2.

It should be noted that when the Replay C group is won in non-RT, the instruction function may not always be operated, and the instruction function may always be operated (the push order for winning Replay 01 is displayed). Alternatively, it may be determined by lottery whether or not the instruction function is to be activated when the Replay C group is won.
Alternatively, when transitioning to non-RT based on the end of operation of 1 BBA, the instruction function is activated when winning replay C group, and when transitioning to non-RT based on the end of actuation 1 BBB, instruction function when winning replay C group Not operate, etc.

RT5 is a limited RT and continues 50 games. When 50 games are consumed at RT5, it shifts to RT2.
And, in the fifth embodiment, RT5 is performed in the advantageous section and AT is performed. On the other hand, when it transfers to RT2 from non-RT or RT5, it is set as a normal area (non-AT).
Therefore, when Replay 01 is won in the non-RT (advantage zone and non-AT), the next game is shifted to RT5, and the advantageous zone and AT (50 games) are executed. And, when 50 games are consumed, it shifts to RT2 (normal section and non AT).
On the other hand, when Replay 03 is won in the non-RT (advantage zone and non-AT), the next game is shifted to RT2 (normal zone and non-AT).
And in RT2, the lottery of the advantageous section and AT is performed.

FIG. 60 is a time chart showing the relationship between the RT transition and the AT described above. (A) is A
An example of transition to T is shown. The example of FIG. 60 shows an example in which the player wins 1BB in RT2 and shifts to 1BB game without passing through RT4 (inside). The transition from RT2 to 1BB gaming starts an advantageous section. Then, when the 1BB game is over, it shifts to non-RT, and when Replay 01 wins in this non-RT, it shifts to RT5. In RT5, 50 ATs are executed. When the AT of 50 games is finished, the advantageous section and the AT are finished, and it shifts to RT2.
On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 6B, the 1BB game is over and the non-RT mode is entered, and Replay 03 is won in this non-RT mode. In this case, it does not shift to RT5 (AT), shifts to RT2 and ends the advantageous section.

FIG. 61 is a diagram showing Example 2 ((a) to (c)) of the fifth embodiment.
In the fifth embodiment, as described above, the start and end of the advantageous section and the AT are controlled by RT (lottery state) or controlled by the main control board 50. In the example 1 of FIG. 60 described above, the RT transition starts the advantageous section and the AT, and the RT transition ends the advantageous section and the AT.
On the other hand, in Example 2 of FIG. 61, the transition of the control state starts the advantageous section and the AT, and the transition of the control state ends the advantageous section and the AT.

In FIG. 61, (a) includes the control states of state 1 to state 3. In this example, State 1 and State 2 are advantageous sections, and State 3 is a normal section.
The states 1 to 3 are mainly the states when moving between RT2 and RT3 in the first embodiment (FIG. 22). State 3 is so-called normal, state 2 is a pullback period after a precursor or AT end, and state 1 is AT.

In state 3 (normal), a lottery for an advantageous section is executed. The lottery of the advantageous section is, for example, the same as that shown in the first embodiment. And if it elects to an advantageous section in state 3 and shifts to an advantageous section, it shifts to the precursor which is state 2. Therefore, when it transfers to a precursor, advantageous section display LED77 lights.
The precursor corresponds to a preparation period until AT is started. For example, the number of precursor games is determined at the time of transition from state 3 to state 2, and in state 2 is a stay until the number of games is digested Do. In addition, the indication function does not operate during the aura. Then, when the number of times of gaming in state 2 (precursor) is digested, the transition from the next game to AT which is state 1 is made. During state 1 (AT), the pointing function is activated.

State 1 (AT) continues until the end condition of state 1 (AT) is satisfied. For example, the number of games in state 1 (AT) may be fixed as “50”, or may be possible to be added as shown in the third embodiment.
Then, when the end condition of the state 1 (AT) is satisfied, the state shifts to a state 2 (drawback period of AT). In this withdrawal period, the maximum number of games is predetermined (for example, "20" game).

If a predetermined condition is satisfied during the period of the state 2 (retraction period) (for example, when winning the rare role, or when winning the AT lottery executed when, for example, the rare role is won), the state 1 ( Transition to AT). On the other hand, if the predetermined condition is not satisfied during the pullback period, which is the state 2, then the state 3, the normal transition is made. Then, at the same time as transitioning to the state 3, the advantageous section is ended, and transition is made to the normal section.
As described above, when the normal section which is the state 3 is set as the normal section, and the other states 1 and 2 are set as the advantageous section and transition to the advantageous section, depending on whether the transition condition is satisfied, Transition to AT (state 1) or transition to state 2 (AT withdrawal period).

  In the example of FIG. 61 (a), it is also possible to set an upper limit to the number of AT transitions. For example, when the upper limit number of times of AT is set to “5”, the state 1 is shifted to the state 3 without shifting to the AT withdrawal period (state 2) after the end of the fifth AT. And, it is also possible to end the AT and the advantageous section.

FIG. 61 (b) has AT, CZ (chance zone), precursor, and normal as control states.
And usually, it is a normal section, and precursor, CZ, and AT are advantageous sections.
First, during the normal time, a lottery for transition to an advantageous section is performed in the same manner as in the first embodiment and the like, and when winning the advantageous section, transition to an advantageous section from the next game and start the precursor. The omen is up to 32 games (the number of omen games is determined by lottery). Then, after digesting the number of prognostic game numbers, it shifts to CZ. CZ is executed until the transition condition to AT or the ending condition of CZ is satisfied. When the transition condition to AT is satisfied during CZ, transition to AT is made. In addition, when CZ end condition is satisfied before satisfying the transition condition to AT during CZ, transition is made to normal.

Specifically, as a condition for shifting to AT during CZ, for example, (a) when winning a transition lottery according to the winning combination, (b) when winning a transition lottery to be performed every game regardless of the winning combination, (C) When a predetermined specific combination is won, (d) When the number of predetermined combination wins exceeds a prescribed number, (e) When transitioning to a specific RT, (f) A predetermined Various transition conditions can be determined according to the game characteristics, such as when winning a special part.
In addition, the termination condition of CZ is similarly (a) when the transition condition to AT is not satisfied during CZ, (b) when winning a specific winning combination, (c) regardless of winning combination for each game Various termination conditions can be determined according to the game characteristics, such as when winning a fall lottery to be made.
Furthermore, the transition condition to AT in CZ and the termination condition of CZ mentioned here may be set as conditions reverse to each other.

  AT is performed in the same manner as (a) above. Then, when the end condition of AT is satisfied, it shifts to CZ. CZ after AT is positioned in the pullback period of (a) above. The transition to the AT can be made if the transition condition to the AT is satisfied again during the CZ, but the transition is made to the normal when the termination condition of the CZ is satisfied without satisfying the transition condition to the AT. At the same time as the transition to the normal state, the advantageous section is ended, and the transition to the normal section is made.

In addition, although it is during AT as a rule to execute an instruction function operation game, since it is also an advantageous section during state 2 of FIG. 61 (a) or during CZ or precursor of FIG. 61 (b) It is possible to perform an operating game.
In particular, since it is necessary to execute at least one command function operation game after transitioning to the advantageous section, in the example of FIG. It can be mentioned that the game in which the combination B is won is designated as an instruction function operation game.
Similarly, in the example of FIG. 61 (b), a game in which the small winning combination B is first won is selected as an instruction function operation game, out of the 32 games within the precursor.

FIG. 61 (c) is an example having control states of precursor, CZ, and AT, as in the case of FIG. 61 (b). However, in this example, unlike (b), an example in which the transition to AT can not be made is shown.
As shown in (c) in the figure, when the transition from the normal to the precursor is made, the transition to the CZ is made after passing a predetermined number of games (maximum 32 games). If the transition condition to AT is satisfied during this CZ, the transition is made to AT as shown in (b), but if the termination condition of CZ is satisfied before satisfying the transition condition to AT (for example, a predetermined number of games (32 games ) Is transferred to the withdrawal period. In the pullback period, the transition lottery to the CZ is performed again, and the transition to the CZ is performed if the transition condition to the CZ is satisfied before the transition condition to the normal condition (for example, the predetermined number of games (32 games) is satisfied) In the figure, (c) shows an example in which transition to CZ is made again (example of successful pull-back).

  Then, during the CZ, as described above, a lottery for transition to the AT is performed, but if the termination condition of the CZ is satisfied before satisfying the transition condition to the AT, the transition to the pullback period is performed again. And, in the example of (c) in the figure, in the second pullback period, before the transition condition to CZ is satisfied, the CZ end condition (for example, digestion of a predetermined number of games (32 games)) is satisfied (pullback failure) This is an example of transition to normal.

As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the start and end of the advantageous section can be controlled along with the shift to RT, and AT and the like can be freely executed during the advantageous section.
Alternatively, a plurality of control states not related to RT may be provided, and a control state corresponding to a normal state may be set as a normal section, a transition lottery to an advantageous section is made during this normal, and a transition lottery to an advantageous section It shifts to any control state corresponding to the section. Then, in the control state corresponding to the advantageous section, the end condition is set (for example, the predetermined number of games has been completed), and transition to another control state corresponding to the advantageous section is made or the advantageous section is ended. It shifts to the control state corresponding to the normal section.

  In the example of FIG. 61, when AT is executed, ART can be executed if AT is executed with RT of replay high probability. Therefore, for example, in the case of realizing the example of FIG. 61 in the RT transition of the first embodiment, when the transition condition to the AT is satisfied, the instruction function is activated when the Replay B group is won in RT2, and Replay 02 is performed. It is possible to display the pressing order to be displayed and to shift to RT3.

As described above, by arbitrarily defining the termination condition of the advantageous section, it is possible to freely design a plurality of control states (precursor, CZ, AT). Further, the present invention is not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, and all of them can be combined. Furthermore, it is also possible to set a plurality of termination conditions in one advantageous section, and in this way, a wider range of gameplay can be designed.
For example, the example of FIG. 60 (a) shows that the advantageous section ends when the number of RT5 games executed during the advantageous section reaches 50 games.
Further, the example of FIG. 60 (b) indicates that the advantageous section ends by transitioning from non-RT to RT2 by displaying Replay 03 during non-RT. That is, in the example of FIG. 60, two conditions of “RT 50 game digestion” and “transition from non-RT to RT 2” are set as the termination condition of the advantageous section. In other words, non-RT is positioned like a CZ that either promotes to AT (RT5) or falls to normal (RT2). A large concept is a specification that ends the advantageous section triggered by a specific RT transition.

Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 61, the advantageous section and the normal section are shifted according to the control state regardless of which RT is staying.
In the example of FIG. 61 (a), state 1 and state 2 (a precursor or AT withdrawal period) are the advantageous sections, and state 3 is set to the normal section. The transition from the state 3 to the state 1 or the state 2 indicates that the advantageous period starts, and the transition from the state 1 or 2 to the state 3 indicates that the advantageous period ends.
Similarly, in the example of FIGS. 61 (b) and (c), the normal state of the control state is a normal section, and the precursor of the control state, CZ, and AT are advantageous sections. The transition from normal to precursor, CZ, or AT indicates that the advantageous segment starts, and transition from the precursor, CZ, or AT to normal indicates that the advantageous segment ends.

As described above, in the example of FIG. 61, when the control state is normal, it is the normal section, but when the control state is different from the normal state, the advantageous section is executed. However, even during the advantageous section, the AT is not executed for the precursor, CZ, and the like, and in order for the AT to be executed, it is necessary to satisfy the transition condition of the AT with the precursor, CZ, and the like. On the other hand, even if it falls from AT to CZ (FIG. 61 (b)) or from CZ to a withdrawal period (precursor) (FIG. 61 (c)), the advantageous section does not end. The advantageous section ends when the control state shifts to normal.

In addition to the examples described in FIGS. 60 and 61, the following examples may be mentioned.
(1) An example in which the first limited RT (20 games) and the second limited RT (60 games) are provided, and the termination condition of the advantageous section is set to the digestion of the first finite RT or the second finite RT such an advantageous section For example, by setting the end condition of the case, transitioning from a non-RT in an advantageous section to a first limited RT of 20 games and a case of transitioning to a second limited RT of 60 games, profit for the player Can be different.
More specifically, a specific replay is drawn at a non-RT in the advantageous section, and a symbol combination transitioning to the first finite RT or a symbol combination transitioning to the second finite RT is displayed according to the push order at the time of specific replay winning. Let Then, at the time of specific replay winning, according to the pressing order operated by the player, by transitioning to the first limited RT of 20 games or the second limited RT of 60 games, it is shifted to which limited RT, about 3 It is possible to make it playable that can generate a double profit difference.

In addition, the main control board 50 may notify the player of the pressing order at the time of specific replay winning during non-RT. In that case, a specification is considered to determine which of the first limited RT and the second limited RT to be notified of the pushing order in consideration of the winning combination and the game situation prior to the specific replay winning during the non-RT. Be At this time, the winning probability of the specific replay may have a setting difference, or may not have a setting difference, or may not.
Furthermore, the end condition of the advantageous section may be determined only to the digestion of the first finite RT, and may be set so as not to end the advantageous section in the digestion of the second finite RT. Thus, when transitioning from the non-RT to the second limited RT of 60 games, the second limited RT and the non-RT can be performed by shifting the non-RT to the non-RT again without ending the advantageous section even after the 60 games are digested. It is possible to play a game like looping.

  In this case, in the case of transition from non-RT to the first limited RT, the advantageous section ends when the limited RT of 20 games is digested, but in the case of transition from the non-RT to the second limited RT, the limited of 60 games After digesting RT, it can give a sense of expectation to shift from non-RT to second RT again. As described above, it is not possible to add an advantageous section by winning a combination having a setting difference in the advantageous section, but in the case of such a game characteristic, it is a case where the specific replay has a setting difference. However, there is no problem because it only serves as a transition role to finite RTs with different numbers of games. Thus, by devising the termination condition of the advantageous section, the substantial 20 games or 60 games added by the winning combination having the setting difference (transition to the first limited RT of 20 games, or the second of the 60 games It is possible to realize transition to finite RT.

(2) An example in which the termination condition of the advantageous section is set to the transition from non-RT to RT1 after the termination of CZ or the end of the special game By setting the termination condition of such advantageous section, for example, during the advantageous section Run up to 32 games of CZ, and set the clearing conditions for this CZ as special role winning. Then, the advantage section ends when 32 games are consumed without winning the special part during CZ. On the other hand, if the special part is won during CZ, the special game is ended, and then it is shifted to non-RT. In the non-RT, the specific replay is drawn similarly to the example of the above (1), and the specific replay is pushed In order, the symbol combination transitioning to RT1 or the symbol combination transitioning to RT2 is displayed.

Then, “the transition from non-RT to RT1 after the end of the special game” is set as the ending condition of the advantageous section. Therefore, when the specific replay is won, the transition to RT1 is made by pushing order, and the advantageous section ends. On the other hand, after the end of the special game, when transitioning from non-RT to RT2, AT starts. Here, according to the control state and the winning combination, when the specific replay having no setting difference is won, the pressing order to shift to RT2 can be notified. This means that the special part winning in CZ is not limited to the special part having no setting difference, and may be a special part having a setting difference. During CZ in the advantageous section, by winning the special part regardless of the presence or absence of the setting difference, the playability that can be substantially granted AT (specificity won during non-RT after the end of the special game) In Replay, it is possible to realize the pressing order in which the symbol combination to be transferred to RT2 is displayed).

Furthermore, in the examples of (1) and (2) described above, RT is used as the control state. However, various control states may be used instead of RT. For example, in the example of (1), although two types of limited RT (the first limited RT and the second limited RT) different in non-RT and the number of games are adopted, these are the game state 1, the game state 2, and the game It may be replaced with state 3. Here, the gaming state is a control state executed during the advantageous section, and is the above-mentioned CZ, AT, or the like, but the winning probability of replay does not change as in the RT.
By this replacement, it is possible to set the game state 1 in which the instruction function does not operate in the advantageous section, the game state 2 of 20 games in which the instruction function operates in the advantageous section, and the game state 3 of 60 games in which the instruction function operates in the advantageous section. . In addition, as RT is not limited to transition conditions (for example, a specific symbol combination is displayed, special part winning, special part winning, special game ending, special game end, etc.), various conditions are free. It can be set to
Specifically, taking the above (1) as an example, conditions such as "winning bell five times within 20 games" and "computing bell consecutively for three consecutive games" in gaming state 1 during the advantageous section It is also possible to design to shift to the game state 2 when achieving the above.

Sixth Embodiment
The sixth embodiment ends the advantageous section before reaching the upper limit of 1500 games when it approaches 1500 games which is the upper limit of the advantageous section during the advantageous section and AT, and after the end of the advantageous section, it is relatively advantageous By providing the situation where the section and AT are easy to win, it is possible to repeatedly execute the advantageous section and the AT which do not reach the upper limit game number. Thereby, it is feasible to create a more advantageous state than the advantageous section and AT that execute up to the upper limit of 1500 games.

FIG. 62 is a diagram showing an RT transition in the sixth embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 22 of the first embodiment. The RT transition diagram of the sixth embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that it has RT6. RT6 is a limited RT and ends with the end of 50 games.
RT6 can be migrated only from RT3. Furthermore, after RT6 ends, it shifts to non-RT.

  In the sixth embodiment, in any RT except inside (RT4), the transition lottery to the advantageous section is performed during the normal section. Moreover, the transition lottery from the normal section to the advantageous section is executed irrespective of the winning of the condition device. That is, the lottery of the advantageous section is executed without being tied to the winning of the condition device having no setting difference. The winning probability is “1/32”, which is common to all RTs.

  In addition, after the end of 1 BBA operation and 1 BBB operation, AT has the right to execute. It transfers to non-RT after the completion | finish of 1 BBA, It transfers to RT1 after the completion | finish of 1 BBB. In addition, when the pattern figure is displayed in non RT or RT1, it moves to RT2. After that, RT2 and RT3 are exchanged (here, the rare case where RT3 accidentally shifts to RT6) is not considered.

  In the above, non-RT, RT1, RT2 and RT3 execute the transition lottery to the advantageous section with a winning probability of "1/32", and therefore, when the transition lottery to the advantageous section is won, 1BBA operation or 1BBB In the situation where it has the right to execute AT based on the operation, it starts the advantageous section and AT. In addition, since AT can be performed on condition that it is an advantageous section (because it is necessary to operate an indication function), it is advantageous even if it shifts to non-RT or RT1 after the operation of 1 BBA or 1 BBB respectively. Before winning the section, AT will not start even if it has AT rights.

  When the advantageous section and AT are started in the non-RT or RT1, the instruction function is not activated at the time of winning the small winning combination B group until the pattern symbol is displayed. This is to display the pattern and make it shift to RT2 as early as possible. When the small winning combination C group is won, the instruction function is activated. After transitioning from non-RT or RT1 to RT2, both the small combination B and small combination C group wins activate the indication function. When the replay B group is won in RT2, the instruction function is activated to shift to RT3. Thus, the AT is executed until the termination condition of the AT is satisfied.

In the sixth embodiment, unlike in the first embodiment, in RT3, instead of the replay C group, a replay D group is drawn. FIG. 63 is a diagram showing the relationship between the types of Replay D group to be randomly selected at RT3, the winning combinations, the pushing order, and the display combinations, corresponding to FIG. 13 of the first embodiment.
The Replay D group includes Replay D1 to Replay D3. Replay D1 to Replay D3 respectively include Replay 01, Replay 03, and Replay 06.
Then, when any Replay D group is won, Replay 01 wins in one push order, Replay 03 wins in the other push order, and Replay 06 in the other one push order. Is set to win a prize.

Here, when Replay 01 is displayed in RT3, RT3 is maintained, and when Replay 02 is displayed, the point of falling to RT2 is the same as Replay C group of the first embodiment. On the other hand, when Replay 06 wins in RT3, it shifts to RT6 (see FIG. 62).
In the sixth embodiment, unlike in the first embodiment, the lottery for Replay 06 is not performed during 1BBA operation and 1BBB operation. In the sixth embodiment, Replay 06 is included only in Replay D group.

In the sixth embodiment, when staying at RT 3 and being in the advantageous section and AT, when the number of games in the advantageous section is less than “1400”, when the Replay D group is won, Replay 01 is won The push order to be held, that is, the push order to maintain RT3 is displayed by the operation of the instruction function.
On the other hand, when staying at RT 3 and in the advantageous section and AT, when the number of digested games in the advantageous section becomes “1400” or more, that is, when the advantageous section remains “100” or less. In the game in which the replay D group is won after that, the pressing order for winning the replay 06 is displayed by the operation of the instruction function.

Thereby, since Replay 06 wins in the game concerned, it shifts to RT6 from the next game. The transition from RT3 to RT6 is set to the advantageous segment and the end condition of the AT. Therefore, with the transition to RT6, the advantageous section and the AT end.
As described above, it is desirable that the Replay D group does not have a setting difference because it is a duplicate replay of replay having a possibility to shift RT (of course, there is a setting difference in the winning probability of the Replay D group Does not prevent them from

RT6 is a limited RT, and 50 games are executed. When 50 games have been consumed in RT6, it is determined that the termination condition of RT6 is satisfied, and it shifts to non-RT.
Further, as described above, in RT6, as in the other RTs, the drawing of the advantageous section is performed with a winning probability of "1/32". And if it wins to an advantageous section in RT6, the right to execute AT is granted. That is, when the number of games played in the advantageous section in RT3 is "1400" or more and it shifts to RT6, the advantageous section and the AT end, and "winning in the advantageous section lottery in RT6" is the execution of AT (resumption ) Is set to the condition.
In RT6, since the winning probability of the advantageous section is "1/32" and the number of games is "50", the probability of winning in the advantageous section during RT6 is about 79.6%.

  When an advantageous section is won in RT6, the advantageous section will be started from the next game and the execution condition of the AT will be satisfied. In this case, the AT may start at any time. For example, the AT may be started while staying at the next game of the game won in the advantageous section, ie, RT6. Alternatively, the AT may be started after transitioning to non-RT when transitioning to non-RT, or further transitioning from non-RT to RT2. Here, in order to simplify the explanation, it is assumed that the AT is started from the next game of the game won in the advantageous section.

  In RT6, when you start the advantageous section and AT at the same time from the next game of the game won in the advantageous section, to have the continuity possibility of AT up to the limit of 1500 games which is the upper limit number of games of the advantageous section. Can. Since the count of 1500 games of the advantageous section is performed even in the controlled state such as the precursor or CZ performed during the advantageous section, the AT is compared with the game property in which the AT is performed via such a control state. It can be made to run for a long time.

  When RT6 ends, it shifts to non-RT. Non-RT continues until the pattern pattern is displayed. And if a pattern figure is displayed in non-RT, it will shift to RT2. When the lottery for the advantageous section is won at RT6, the pressing order for activating the instruction function at RT2 when the replay B group is won is displayed at RT2.

When the player wins the AT in RT6, when it shifts to RT3, the AT is executed while maintaining RT3. The AT is executed up to a predetermined number of games. When the predetermined number of games are finished, the AT ends and the advantageous section ends, and the next game shifts to the normal section.
In addition, an initial value is determined at the time of winning the AT, and the number of games is added by the above-described addition during AT execution. Then, during the execution of the AT, when it becomes 1400 games or more after the start of the advantageous section, it is shifted to RT6 in the same manner as described above.

  On the other hand, during the normal section, the lottery of the advantageous section is performed also with RT2 and RT3 with the winning probability of "1/32". That is, in the sixth embodiment, even when staying at any RT except RT4, the lottery of the advantageous section is performed with the probability of "1/32", and when the lottery of the advantageous section is won, the advantageous section is started from the next game. Migrate to

In RT2 and RT3, when only shifting to the advantageous section, the instruction function is activated at the time of the first winning combination of the small group B winning. Thereby, since the condition capable of ending the advantageous section “execution of the at least one command function operation game” is satisfied, the advantageous section is ended in the game, and the next game is shifted to the normal section.
Therefore, in RT2 and RT3 (normal sections) not via 1BBA game or 1BBB game, the advantageous section is drawn with a winning probability of "1/32", and when it is won in the advantageous section, it starts the advantageous section from the next game. When one instruction function operation game (when the small winning combination B is won) is executed in the section, the transition from the next game to the normal section is repeated.
The present invention is not limited to this, and when it moves to the advantageous section, the predetermined number of games (for example, 32 games) may be continued, and after the predetermined number of games have been completed, the normal section may be transferred. In this case, it is necessary to execute at least one designated function activation game in the predetermined number of games.

In RT2 and RT3 (so-called normal), an AT lottery is separately performed. When the player has won the AT lottery, he / she has the right to execute the AT. For example, when the small winning combination E1 shown in the first embodiment is won, there is a right to execute AT. Alternatively, when the small winning combination E1 is won, whether or not to grant the right to execute the AT may be determined by lottery, and when the lottery is won, the right to execute the AT may be granted.
The AT game frequency is initially set to an initial value, and thereafter, the addition lottery is performed as shown in the third embodiment, and the game frequency is added.

Furthermore, if the game winning the AT is an advantageous section, the advantageous section and the AT can be started from the next game. It should be noted that the AT may be started from the next game of the game winning the AT, or, as shown in the fifth embodiment, the AT may be started after passing through a sign or a CZ. After starting the AT, the AT is executed while staying at RT3 (ART) as described above. If the AT is continuing even if it becomes 1400 games or more after shifting to the advantageous section, it shifts to RT6 as described above.
On the other hand, if the game won the AT is a normal section, while having the right to execute the AT, it waits to win the advantageous section. And if it wins to an advantageous section, AT will be performed after that.

Moreover, when performing AT lottery as mentioned above during stay of RT2 or RT3, it is also possible to set via RT6 as start conditions of AT.
Therefore, in RT2 and RT3, on the basis of having won the small winning combination E1 etc., "the right to carry out AT" is granted. When this right is won, it waits to be elected in the advantageous section when it is not the advantageous section, and when it becomes the advantageous section or in the advantageous section, it activates the indication function, and when it is RT2, the replay B group Display the push order to shift to RT3 when winning. Furthermore, when it is RT3, the pressing order to shift to RT6 when the replay D group is won is displayed. Moving to RT6 ends the advantageous section, as described above. And among 50 games of RT6, when it is elected to the advantageous section, it shall fulfill start conditions of AT. The flow after the start condition of AT is satisfied in RT6 is the same as described above.

  In addition, the lottery of the advantageous section is not limited to the above, and a specific combination having a winning probability of "1/32" may be drawn by all RTs, and the advantageous interval may be started based on the winning of the specific combination. . In addition, the specific part in this case is a part which does not have a setting difference, as described in the first embodiment.

The above-described sixth embodiment is summarized again, and has the following features (including effects).
(1) Before reaching the upper limit (1500 games) of the advantageous section, by intentionally ending the advantageous section and shifting to the re-lottery state of the advantageous section, it is practically the upper limit of 1500 advantageous sections. It becomes possible to carry out the advantageous section beyond. For example, it becomes possible to play games such as "advantage section (1200 games)-> non-advantage section (50 games)-> advantageous section (1200 games)".
In particular, since the transition to RT6 (finite RT) is set as the termination condition of the advantageous section, although the advantageous section ends at the time of transition from RT3 to RT6, during 50 games of RT6, the replay winning probability is It is possible to maintain a high advantageous state.
(2) In addition, in normal times, with each game, with the winning probability of "1/32", the transition lottery to the advantageous section is performed. In particular, a transition opportunity without a setting difference is necessary as an opportunity to shift to an advantageous section, but in both RT6 and normal times, a transition lottery to an advantageous section with a winning probability of always "1/32" Can do that.

Furthermore, depending on the design, as in the third embodiment, "start of AT = start of advantageous section", 1500 games which is the maximum number of games of the advantageous section are fully used, for example, 1500 The AT can be realized (except when starting the AT triggered by the winning of a special role).
(3) At the time of transition to the advantageous section, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the AT by referring to the RT being executed. Although the transition lottery of the advantageous section is performed with the winning probability of each game “1/32”, when winning this transition lottery, refer to the RT (whether it is RT 6 or not) which was staying at the time of the winning. Then, it can be determined whether to execute AT at the transition to the advantageous section.

Seventh Embodiment
In the seventh embodiment, as a result of the addition of the number of games during AT, even when the total number of games of AT exceeds "1500", it brings a merit to the player, and further, the total of AT It is characterized in that the more the number of times the number of games is added exceeds 1500, the more advantageous the player is.

In the seventh embodiment, an “over 1500 counter” is provided to count the number of times the total game count of AT exceeds “1500” by the addition during AT. At the start of the advantageous interval and AT, the over 1500 counter value is "0".
Further, in the seventh embodiment, as shown in FIG. 44 (example 2) of the third embodiment, as a result of the addition lottery, when the total number of AT games exceeds "1500", the determined addition number is determined. It shall clear without adding.

  Therefore, when the total game number of AT is “1500” or less, the over 1500 counter remains “0”. Here, for example, when it is determined in step S451 in FIG. 44 (b) that the number of additions exceeds the specified number, the “over 1500 counter” changes from “0” to “1”. Similarly, if it is determined that the number of additions exceeds the specified number in step S451 in FIG. 44 (b), the "over 1500 counter" changes from "1" to "2". In this way, the counter for more than 1500 is added each time the total game number of ATs exceeds "1500".

On the other hand, in the seventh embodiment, after the start of the advantageous section and AT, the game upon winning the first small winning combination B group activates the instruction function. After that, when the over 1500 counter is “0”, that is, when the total number of AT games has never exceeded “1500” by the additional lottery, do you activate the indication function at the time of winning the small winning combination B group? Whether or not is decided by lottery.
Here, when the small winning combination B is won, the ratio at which the instruction function is operated is referred to as “the instruction function operation rate”.

  Then, the indication function operation rate when the over 1500 counter is “0” is set to “95%”. Therefore, in the advantageous section and AT, when the small winning combination B is won, for example, the lottery whether or not to operate the pointing function (lottery winning at 95%) is performed. Thus, the indication function operates with a probability of 95%, and the indication function does not operate with a probability of 5%. Assuming that the winning ratio for the small combination B when the pointing function is activated is 100% and the winning ratio for the small combination B when the pointing function is not activated is "1/3", the percentage of operating the indication function is 95%. The winning rate for the small group B in Japan is approximately 96.7%.

  Next, it is assumed that the total number of AT games has exceeded "1500" as a result of the addition during AT. Then, it is assumed that the over 1500 counter has become "1". Here, the indication function operation rate when the over 1500 counter is “1” is set to “97.5%”. Therefore, during the advantageous section and AT, when the small winning combination B is won, the indication function operates with a probability of 97.5%, and the indication function does not operate with a probability of 2.5%.

After that, when the total AT number of games exceeds “1500” as a result of further addition, the over 1500 counter becomes “2”. The indication function operation rate in this case is “98.
It is set to 75%. Therefore, during the advantageous section and AT, when the small winning combination B is won, the pointing function operates with a probability of 98.75%, and the pointing function does not operate with a probability of 1.25%.
As described above, when the counter value exceeds 1500, "0", "1", "2", ..., the indication function operating rate = "95", "97.5", "98.75" It is determined that ....

  If set as described above, the more the total AT number of games exceeds “1500”, that is, the larger the value of the over 1500 counter value, the closer to 100% the command function operation rate becomes. Here, even if the total game number of AT is over 1500, since the upper limit of the advantageous section is actually 1500, it is impossible to play the game for more than 1500 It is. However, according to the seventh embodiment, when the AT total game number of times of addition exceeding “1500” is performed, it becomes more advantageous to the player than before the addition is performed (expected number of coins expected) It can be set to increase the value).

Eighth Embodiment
In the eighth embodiment, BBs having no set difference in winning probability (if the first embodiment is taken as an example, a single winning of 1BBA, a double winning of 1BBA and small part D, a duplicate of 1BBA and small part E1) When it is determined to shift to the advantageous section on the basis of the winning), the advantageous section is started thereafter. In addition, after the BB game ends, there is a case where AT is started.
Further, for the end of the advantageous section, the following Examples 1 to 5 can be mentioned.
(1) Example where the advantageous section ends before the end of 1BB game (example 1)
(2) Example in which the advantageous section ends at the end of 1BB game (example 2)
(3) An example in which the advantageous section does not end at the end of the 1BB game, AT starts after the end of the 1BB game, and the advantageous section also ends at the end of the AT (example 3)
(4) The advantageous section does not end at the end of the 1BB game, but the advantageous section ends after a predetermined number of games (for example, 5 games) have elapsed after the end of the 1BB game (example 4)
(5) The advantageous section does not end at the end of the 1BB game, and the AT starts after a predetermined number of games (for example, 5 games) have elapsed after the end of the 1BB game.
Then, when it is determined to shift to the advantageous section, it is simultaneously determined in which of the first to fifth examples the advantageous section is ended. Of course, it does not necessarily have to be determined among the five of Examples 1 to 5. For example, it may be determined among the three of Examples 1 to 3, or between two of Example 2 and Example 3. You may

64 to 66 are time charts showing the above examples 1 to 5. FIG.
The example 1 of FIG. 64 is an example in which the advantageous section is started from the start of the 1BBA game (when the 1BBA is activated) after winning the 1BBA. The start timing of this advantageous section is the start time of the 1BBA game, but as described in the first embodiment, the start time of the next game of the game in which the 1BBA is won from the start of the next game of the game won in the 1BBA ( The advantageous section may be started at any timing up to the start of the first game of the 1BBA game. Further, as described in the first embodiment, when the advantageous section is started, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on.
Also, although the advantageous section is started simultaneously with the start of the 1BBA game, AT is not started because 1BBA is in operation (in the first example, in the example 1, the AT is not started during the advantageous section).

And, in Example 1, before the end of the 1BBA game, for example, when the last game of the final game of the 1BBA game is ended, or when the final game of the 1BBA game is started, etc., the advantageous section is ended.
Furthermore, in this example 1, the output of the continuous effect is started in the middle of the 1BBA game. Similar to the first embodiment, the continuous rendition is a series of renditions over a plurality of games (a rendition of raising anticipation whether AT will be executed after the end of the 1BBA game), and at the end of the continuous rendition, 1BBA
An effect of notifying the player whether to start AT after completion of the game is output. In addition, the advantageous section ends with the end of the continuous effect.

Therefore, in Example 1, during the final game of the 1BBA game or in the previous game, the continuous effect is ended (finally, it is informed that the AT is not started), and at the end of the game where the continuous effect is ended, or continuously When the effect is ended, the advantageous section is ended. In Example 1, the advantageous section is ended before the end of the 1BBA game, and the AT is not started after the end of the 1BBA game.
However, at the start of the 1BBA game, even if it is decided to end the advantageous section before the end of the 1BBA game, etc., the player is won the rare role (for example, the small part D) during the 1BBA game, etc. When the extension condition of the advantageous section (also referred to as the changing condition of the advantageous section, hereinafter the same) is satisfied, the advantageous section is not ended before the end of the 1BBA game, and the advantageous section is continued even after the end of the 1BBA game. Good. Of course, the AT may be started after the end of the 1BBA game. For example, changing the end of the advantageous section from Example 1 to Example 3 can be mentioned.

  Example 2 of FIG. 64 is an example in which the end time of the 1BBA game is matched with the end time of the advantageous section. In this example 2, as in the example 1, the continuous effect is started from the middle of the 1BBA game, and the 1BBA game is performed at the end of the final game of the 1BBA game (when the last stop switch 42 is operated, etc.) It is informed whether or not to start AT game after the end of. In Example 2, since the advantageous section ends simultaneously with the end of the 1BBA game, AT is not started after the end of the 1BBA game. Therefore, at the end of the continuous effect, it is informed that the AT is not started.

In addition, as in Example 1 and Example 2, when the advantageous section ends by the end of the special game (1BBA game), the advantageous section is ended even if the instruction function activation game has not been performed even once. It is possible to do that. This is because there are already many medals acquired during the special game (1 BBA game), and there is no need to extend the end of the advantageous section just to perform one pointing function activation game. Rather, the delay may increase player dissatisfaction.
Also, as in Example 1, at the start of the 1BBA game, even when it is decided to end the advantageous section at the end of the 1BBA game, when the extension condition of the advantageous section is satisfied during the 1BBA game ( For example, when the player wins the rare role), the advantageous section may not end at the end of the 1BBA game, and the advantageous section may be continued after the end of the 1BBA game. Of course, the AT may be started after the end of the 1BBA game. For example, changing the end of the advantageous section from Example 2 to Example 3 can be mentioned.

Example 3 of FIG. 65, like Example 2, is to start continuous effect from the middle of the 1BBA game. Example 3 is an example of starting the AT after the end of the 1BBA game. In this case, at the end of the final game of the 1BBA game (or when the last stop switch 42 is operated, etc.), it is informed that the AT is to be started after the end of the 1BBA game. And AT is started from the next game of the final game of 1BBA game. Of course, it is not necessary to start immediate AT after the end of the 1BBA game. For example, the AT may be started from the next game of the game shifted to RT3, the next game of the game shifted to RT3, or the next game of replay B group. In this case, it is preferable to at least activate the indication function to shift to RT3 even before starting the AT.
Note that the AT ends when the conditions for ending the AT, such as the predetermined number of times of game play, are satisfied, and at the end of the AT, the advantageous section also ends simultaneously. However, the AT may be ended or the advantageous section may be continued thereafter.

Although it is not known at the start of the 1BBA game, which of the above example 1 or example 2 or example 3 is, since the advantageous section display LED 77 is lighted at the start of the 1BBA game, it is possible to shift to the advantageous section When it is determined, the advantageous section display LED 77 turns on (determines to shift to the advantageous section) or does not light at the start of the 1BBA game (the advantageous section, as in the example 3). It is possible to prevent the player from having a monotonous game characteristic that raises a sense of expectation only by saying that it does not shift to (1), and it is possible to get the player's sense of expectation even during 1 BBA gaming.

  Example 4 in FIG. 66 continues the advantageous section even after the end of the 1BBA game, and starts continuous effects after the end of the 1BBA game, and whether or not to start AT from now on in the continuous effect (the advantageous section continues) Or not) is notified. After the end of the 1BBA game, the continuous effect is started, and the example 4 shows an example of performing the continuous effect 5 games. Of course, any number of continuous effects may be played. And, it is informed whether or not to start AT in the final game of continuous effect. Example 4 shows an example in which AT is not started. And, the advantageous section ends with the game at the end of the continuous effect. Of course, the continuous effect may be started from the next game after the end of the 1BBA game, or may be started from the next game or the like.

Thus, in Example 4, the advantageous section is continued even after the end of the 1BBA game, and the advantageous section is executed during 5 games during the normal game (the game after the end of the 1BBA game).
On the other hand, as described above, it is necessary to "execute at least one instruction function operation game during the advantageous section".
Here, based on BB's winning, it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, and in the case where the advantageous section is started at the same time as the start of the BB game (of course, it may not be simultaneously) After that, when ending the advantageous section with several games, it is conceivable to control as follows.

(1) If the small winning combination B is never won among the five games, the advantageous section is ended without executing the indication function activation game even once.
(2) When the small winning combination B is won in 5 games, the instruction function activation game is executed in the game.
(3) Even when the small winning combination B is won in the 5 games, the advantageous section is ended without executing the instruction function operation game.
(4) If the player has never won the small role B group among the 5 games, the advantage section is extended until the small role B group is won first, and the instruction is given when the small role B group is won first The function operation game is executed, and the advantageous section is ended in the game.
Of the above, any control may be performed.
As described above, the control of (1) to (3) may seem to be undesirable because it is necessary to “execute at least one pointing function activation game during the advantageous section”, but in Example 4 As described above, when the BB game is being performed during the advantageous section, since many medals have already been acquired during the BB game, the end of the advantageous section is performed only in order to perform one command function activation game. It is thought that there is no need to extend it. Rather, the delay may increase player dissatisfaction.
In Example 4 of FIG. 66, a case where an instruction is issued (instruction function operation game is executed) is shown by a two-dot chain line in five games.

Example 5 of FIG. 66 continues the advantageous section even after the end of the 1BBA game, as in Example 4, and starts the continuous effect after the end of the 1BBA game, and determines whether to start AT by the continuous effect or not It is an example to inform. Then, in the fifth example, it is informed that AT is to be started in the final game of the continuous effect. Then, start the AT from the next game. When the AT ends, the advantageous section also ends. Of course, it is not necessary to start AT from the next game. For example, the AT may be started from the game transferred to RT3, the next game to the game transferred to RT3, or the next game to the replay B group. In this case, it is preferable to at least activate the indication function to shift to RT3 even before starting the AT.
Although it is not known at the start of 1BBA game whether it is any of the above Example 4 or Example 5, 1
At the start of the BBA game, since the advantageous section display LED 77 is lighted, it is possible to get the player's sense of expectation even during the 1BBA game and after the end of the 1BB game.

In the eighth embodiment, whether or not to execute AT (examples 1 to 5), and the initial game frequency of AT is before the start of 1BBA game (for example, when 1BBA is won) or the start of 1BBA game It may be determined by lottery or the like, or it may be determined whether to execute the AT based on the condition device won during the 1 BBA game. For example, when 1 BBA is won, it is determined to be Example 1, Example 2 or Example 4, and it is determined whether to change to Example 3 or Example 5 based on the condition device won during 1 BBA gaming. . In addition, for example, when “1 BBA + small combination E1” in the first embodiment is won, AT determination may be made (example 3 or example 5).
Furthermore, whether or not to execute the AT, or the AT's initial number of games may be determined based on the conditions satisfied in the 1BBA game. After deciding to execute the AT (in the case of Example 3 or Example 5), the number of AT games may be added based on the winning of the condition device during 1 BBA gaming or during AT.
Furthermore, when the start of 1BBA game is determined as in Example 4, when the extension condition of the advantageous section is satisfied during the 1BBA game, or during the continuous rendering period of 5 games after the end of the 1BBA game (for example, The case of winning the rare role may be changed to example 5 (execution of AT).

At the start of the 1BBA game, it is not necessary to determine whether to execute the AT after the end of the 1BBA game. In this case, it is determined whether or not to execute AT after the end of the 1BBA game, depending on whether the extension condition of the advantageous segment is satisfied during the 1BBA game.
When it is determined whether or not to execute the AT after the end of the 1BBA game during the 1BBA game, the end of the advantageous section is set at the end of the 1BBA game as shown in Example 2 of FIG. And, when it is decided to execute AT during the 1 BBA game, the end of the advantageous section is extended (changed), and the advantageous section is continued even after the end of the 1 BBA game, and the AT is executed.

The Ninth Embodiment
In the ninth embodiment, when starting the advantageous section based on the winning of the condition device including the special part (for example, 1BBA), it is determined when to start the advantageous section (timing to start the advantageous section). In particular, it is characterized in that the advantageous section is started from the game in which the winning special part has become winning possible.
In the ninth embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the conditional device including the winning of the special combination (1BBA) is won, and the advantageous section is started based on the decision to shift to the advantageous section. Here, in the first embodiment, when it is determined that the conditional device including the special part is to be shifted to the advantageous section, it is possible to bet and settle in the next game of the winning game. By the time it becomes, until the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on or the combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination is stopped (or bet can be made in the next game of the game in which the combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination is stopped) The advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on during the state and the state where the accountable state can be reached).

In addition, it is at the start of the next game (when the start switch 41 is operated) of the game won by the condition device including the special part, or at the first game start of the special game (for example, 1BBA game) to start the advantageous section When the start switch 41 was operated). Therefore, in the latter case, when the advantageous section is started based on the winning of the special part, the start timing is wide.
And, in the ninth embodiment, when the player wins a condition device including a special part and it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, the special section starts the advantageous section from the game where the winning is possible. Do.

Therefore, for example, to cite an example in the first embodiment, when it is possible to win 1BBA alone, it is possible to win 1BBA in the game, so the advantageous section is started from the game.
On the other hand, when the player wins "1 BBA + small winning combination E1", priority is given to the small winning combination of small winning combination E1 in the game, and it is impossible to stop the combination of symbols corresponding to 1 BBA. do not do. In particular, in the first embodiment, in the game in which “1 BBA + small combination E1” is won, since the small combination E1 is given priority over 1 BBA and the small combination E1 is “PB = 1”, 1BBA never wins. The 1BBA won in the game is carried over to the next game.

  Furthermore, when the player wins "1 BBA + small role D", priority is given to the winning of the small role D in the game, but the small role 35 (watermelon) corresponding to the small role D is "PB ≠ 1". Therefore, when the stop switch 42 is operated at a timing when the symbol ("watermelon") related to the small part 35 can not be stopped and when the symbol ("red 7") related to 1BBA can be stopped, the 1BBA It is possible to win a prize. For example, in FIG. 5, the middle stop switch 42 is operated at a timing at which the middle first stop is made and the third "red 7" can be stopped at the effective line.

However, when the stop switch 42 is operated at a position at which any symbol of 1BBA and the small winning combination 35 can be stopped, priority is given to stopping the symbol associated with the low winning combination 35. For example, it is a case where the right stop switch 42 is operated at a timing at which the first right stop is possible and any symbol of No. 2 “Red 7” and No. 5 “Watermelon” can be stopped on the effective line.
On the other hand, even if the left stop switch 42 is operated at a timing at which the 7th "red 7" can be stopped to the effective line at the first left stop, the 4th or 9th "watermelon" is stopped to the effective line No. 7 "Red 7" does not stop on the active line because it takes precedence.
For this reason, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the above-mentioned timing, the stop control is executed so as not to stop the seventh "red 7" at the effective line. As a result, the game when the “1 BBA + small player D” is won in the first embodiment is set so as not to correspond to the “1 BBA can be won”. Of course, when the middle stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the first stop in the middle and the third "red 7" can be stopped in the effective line, 1BBA can be won in the game, so "1BBA May be a game that can be won.

  In the case where it is determined that the special device is included in the condition device and it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, and the game does not fall under the special combination game, the lottery of the condition device in the next game is When it is not winning, the special part carrying over the winning can be won, so the advantageous section is started from the game. In the above example, when the start switch 41 is operated in the next game, a lottery for the conditional device is made and it becomes non-winning, so the start section 41 is operated and the advantageous section immediately after the lottery for the conditional device is performed. Start (at the same time or immediately before it, the advantageous zone display LED 77 lights up).

On the other hand, as a result of winning the small winning combination or replay in the next game, for example, and prioritizing the winning combination of the small winning combination or the replay winning in the relevant game, as a result of the game in which the special combination can not be won, the advantageous section is not started.
Also, for example, in a game carrying over the winning of a special part, in a game in which a small part of "PB 当選 1" is won, and when the small part can not be won, As with the above-mentioned "1 BBA + small player D" winning, the game does not start the advantageous section. Of course, in the game where the special part carrying over the winning can win, the advantageous section may be started in the game.

FIG. 67 is a view for explaining the flow of the game in the ninth embodiment. In the example of FIG. 67, an example is shown in which an “N” game is won as “1 BBA + small combination E1” and an “N + 3” game is played with 1 BBA.
First, when the player wins "1 BBA + small combination E1" in the "N" game, the small combination E in the relevant game
As only 1 can be won and 1 BBA can not be won, the game does not start an advantageous section.

  Next, after the "N + 1" game, the 1 BBA win is carried over. The “N + 1” game shows an example in which Replay A is won. When Replay A is won, Replay 01 wins with “PB = 1”, and 1BBA carrying over the win can not be won, so the advantageous section is not started in the game.

  Next, in the “N + 2” game, an example is shown in which the player is not elected in the lottery of the combination by the combination lottery means 61. Therefore, in the game, the 1BBA carrying the winning can be won. Therefore, the advantageous section is started from the "N + 2" game. Here, at the start of the "N + 2" game, that is, the start switch 41 is operated, and as a result of the lottery of the condition device being performed, it is advantageous based on the fact that it is not won (1 BBA becomes possible to win). Since the section is started, the lighting start of the advantageous section display LED 77 is also when the start switch 41 is operated.

  The player who has won the 1BBA in the “N + 2” game can eliminate the consumption of useless number of games during the advantageous section. As described above, the player who has won the 1BBA in the "N + 2" game, can not perform the addition, etc. (including the lottery of whether or not to execute the AT in the eighth embodiment) in the internal middle game, It is not necessary to start the advantageous section. Also, as described above, the upper limit number of games (for example, 1500 games) is set for the advantageous section, and when the advantageous section starts in the internal middle game, the maximum advantageous that can be executed after the end of the 1BBA game The number of game runs on the section is reduced by the amount consumed in the internal game. For example, when playing 10 games in the internal game, 1 game in which 1BBA was won, and 16 games in 1BBA game, in the game after the end of 1BBA game, only 1473 games at most can be played in the advantageous section It can not be done.

  However, the player who has made 1BBA a prize in the “N + 2” game does not have the portion consumed in the internal game (0 game in the internal game, 1 game in the game having 1BBA, and 16 games in the 1BBA game) When the game is over, in the game after the end of the 1BBA game, up to 1483 games can also play in the advantageous section), so it is better than the player who could not win the 1BBA in the “N + 2” game. May be advantageous. On the other hand, the player who can not win the 1BBA in the "N + 2" game will continue the internal middle game while starting the advantageous section. The example of FIG. 67 shows an example in which 1BBA can not be won in the “N + 2” game.

  Furthermore, in the “N + 3” game, as in the “N + 2” game, an example is shown in which the winning of the role by the role lottery means 61 is not won. Therefore, in the game, the 1BBA carrying the winning can be won. And the example which was able to win 1BBA by the "N + 3" game eye is shown. Thus, the 1BBA game is started from the "N + 4" game.

Here, for example, if it is set to start the advantageous section from the start of the 1BBA game uniformly, the number of games fluctuates depending on the skill of the player's eye-pushing from the time of winning 1BBA to the prize (consumption of medals Although there is a difference in the number), there is no difference in the length of the advantageous section after the end of the 1BBA game.
On the other hand, by setting as in the ninth embodiment, the player's skill (if the special role has been noticed or not or if the special The number of games in the advantageous section, which is wasted, fluctuates depending on whether or not the user has been able to make a push to stop the combination of the corresponding symbols on the effective line.

For example, if it is possible to win the special part in the first game in which the special part can be won, after the start of the advantageous section, the advantageous section is not wasted in the internal middle game.
On the other hand, if it is not possible to win the special part due to a failure in eye catching or the like in the first game in which the special part can be won, the special part will be able to be won again after the next game You have to wait until However, since the advantageous section starts from the first game in which the special part can be won, the advantageous section will be wasted in the meantime.
In this manner, it is possible to make the substantial number of games (the number of games after the end of the special game) of the advantageous section differ according to the skill of the player.

As a modification of the ninth embodiment, the following example may, for example, be mentioned.
(Modification 1)
When it is determined to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of the special part (or when shifted to the standby section), the number of games until transition to the advantageous section is determined by lottery or the like. Then, the game is transferred to the advantageous section, whichever is earlier, either when the game having digested the number of times of the game or the next game or the special game is started (the next game of the game in which the combination of symbols corresponding to the special part is stopped). .
(Modification 2)
When it is determined to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of the special part (or when shifted to the standby section), the number of games until transition to the advantageous section is determined by lottery or the like. Then, the game is transferred to the advantageous section in the game which has digested the number of times of the game or the next game, or the first game in which the winning special part becomes possible, whichever is earlier.

(Modification 3)
Even in the case where the winning special role starts the advantageous section from the first game in which winning is possible, the ending condition of the advantageous section may not be affected.
For example, it is assumed that, based on the winning of the special part, an advantageous segment in which 50 ATs are executed after the end of the special game is won. In this case, for the AT of 50 games after the end of the special game, 50 games are counted simultaneously with the start of the AT. Therefore, even if the winning special role starts the advantageous section from the first game in which winning is possible, the 50 AT games start counting simultaneously with the start of the AT after the end of the special game. On the other hand, the "1500" game, which is the upper limit of the advantageous section, is counted from the first game in which the winning special part becomes possible. By doing this, as the number of games in the advantageous section approaches 1500 games (as the addition of the number of AT games is performed, etc.), the player's skill is affected.

(Modification 4)
In the ninth embodiment, when the player wins a conditional device including a special part and it is determined to shift to the advantageous section, the special section starts the advantageous section from the game in which the winning is possible. The advantage zone may be started from the next game of the game in which the special part has become available for winning (the advantage zone display LED 77 lights up by the time the bet is possible and the account can be settled in the next game) ). By doing this, when the special part is awarded in the first game in which the special part can be won, the game in which the special part has been won is not counted as a game of the advantageous section, so a player with a skill is May be even more advantageous than a non-skilled player.

In the ninth embodiment, a game winning a conditional device (for example, 1BBA + small role E1) including winning of a special part (1BBA), or a continuous effect (special part (for example, 3 games) from the next game) It may be an effect to ask whether or not 1BBA) has been won, and may be output to indicate that the special role (1BBA) has been won for the final game. Of course, a game that has won a conditional device (for example, a small role E1) that does not include a special role (1BBA) winning,
Or, it is an effect to show whether or not a continuous effect (special role (1BBA) over a plurality of games (for example, 3 games) from the next game is won, and that a special role (1BBA) is not won for the last game Needs to be output).

  Then, when a continuous effect is being output (in particular, before the effect indicating that the special part (1BBA) is won is performed, for example, two games when the continuous effect is output from the next game to the third game) When the 1BBA can be won in the eyes (that is, the "N + 2" game), it is known that the player has won the 1BBA by turning on the advantageous section display LED 77 in the game. Therefore, instead of this continuous effect, an effect indicating that the player has won the 1BBA may be output. When it is the last game of the continuous effect, the continuous effect may be output as it is to the end, or instead of the continuous effect, an effect indicating that 1 BBA has been won may be output.

  Alternatively, during a plurality of games in which continuous effects are output, even if 1 BBA can be won, the advantageous section may not be started and the advantageous section display LED 77 may not be turned on. Specifically, a game that has been won by a condition device (for example, 1BBA + small role E1) including the winning of a special part (1BBA), or a predetermined number of times from the next game (the same number as the number of times of outputting the continuous effect or more) During the period, the special zone (1BBA) does not start the advantageous section even if it becomes possible to win (the advantageous zone display LED 77 is not lighted), but after the predetermined number of games, the special special (1BBA) can be won first From this point on, the advantageous section may be started (the advantageous section display LED 77 is also turned on).

Tenth Embodiment
In the tenth embodiment, when the AT is being executed (that is, during the advantageous section), the player wins 1BBA and shifts to the 1BBA game, and after the end of the 1BBA game, it shifts from RT2 to RT3 (returns to AT) Sometimes, it is characterized in that it is possible to execute the addition of the AT game frequency (ie, the game frequency of the advantageous segment).
In the tenth embodiment, the RT transition diagram is similar to that of the first embodiment (FIG. 22).
Here, when AT is being executed at RT3 (for example, when it is decided to shift to an AT of 100 games (that is, an advantageous segment) when winning a small winning combination E1 and when AT is being executed), It is assumed that 1 BBA is won (either single BBA single winning or double winning of 1 BBA and minor player E1). If 1 BBA is won, if 1 BBA does not win in the game, it shifts to RT 4 (inside). Then, when 1 BBA wins, it shifts to 1 BBA in operation (1 BBA game). When 1 BBA in operation (1 BBA game) end condition is satisfied, it moves to non RT.

  When 1BBA game is over and it shifts to non-RT, restart AT from that point or AT preparation (for example, the game which moved to RT3, the next game of the game which moved to RT3, any of Replay B group The AT is resumed from the next game played if the game was won, so it is preferable to activate at least the instruction function to shift to RT3 even before starting the AT during AT preparation. Of course, it is an advantageous section during AT preparation. When it is set to start AT from that point in time, when the pattern figure is displayed in non-RT, it shifts to RT2. When one of the Replay B group is won in RT2, a pressing order for activating Replay 02 by operating the instruction function is displayed. When Replay 02 wins in RT2, it shifts to RT3. Then, continue the AT while maintaining RT3. In addition, when it sets during AT preparation until RT2, basically it transfers to RT3 and restarts AT.

Here, on the basis of the transition from RT2 to RT3, it is possible to execute the addition of the number of AT games (that is, the advantageous section). This addition may be performed at all times, or it may be determined whether or not to be added by lottery. As a trigger for the addition, Replay B is won (that is, even if it does not shift from RT2 to RT3, it will be added. Of course, when AT preparation is under way, AT can be started from this point) (Preferred), Replay 02 winning, transition from RT2 to RT3.

  Further, in the tenth embodiment, it is possible to execute the addition based on the transition from RT2 to RT3 via a non-RT after the end of the 1BBA game. For this reason, 1 BBA winning, 1 BBA gaming execution, or non-RT stay is stored. For example, storing using a flag can be mentioned. And, when it moves from RT2 to RT3 (it may be when Replay B is won or Replay 02 is won), it is judged whether the flag is on or not and it is judged that it is on. As a condition, it is possible to execute addition of the number of AT games. Also, when the addition or the addition lottery is executed, the flag is turned off.

  In this manner, if it is determined whether or not the addition is possible using the flag, for example, a state in which only RT2 and RT3 are exchanged (simply misordering during execution of AT, and shifts to RT2, In the case of transitioning to RT3 again, since the flag is off, there is no additional when transitioning from RT2 to RT3.

In the above example, 1BBA is taken as an example, but even if it is a 1BBB, that is, when a conditional device including a special combination having a setting difference is won, it can be implemented if it is added as described above.
Similarly to the above, the 1 BBB winning, the execution of the 1 BBB game, or the stay of RT1 is stored in the flag. Then, after the end of the 1 BBB game, it moves from RT 1 to RT 2 and then moves to RT 3 (it may be when Replay B is won or Replay 02 is won) to be able to perform the addition . As a result, even when the player wins 1 BBB having a setting difference that should not be able to perform addition etc. during the winning or BB game (when transitioning to 1 BBB gaming), the player is expected to give an expectation of addition. Can.

Also, the addition may be executable based on the transition from non-RT or RT1 to RT2. For example, it may be possible to perform the addition based on winning of the small combination B group in non-RT or RT1 or display of the pattern pattern and transition from non-RT or RT1 to RT2.
As shown in FIG. 22, the transition to non-RT is also performed at the time of initialization of RWM 53, but since the above-described flag is turned off along with the initialization of RWM 53, transition from non-RT to RT2 and further from RT2 to RT3 Even then, the addition will not be executed. Moreover, if it is an ordinary section, the addition is never performed.
Further, when the player wins 1BBA or 1BBB during execution of AT and shifts to RT4 (inside), the number of AT games is not added at RT4.

Furthermore, in the tenth embodiment (the first embodiment), after the end of the 1BBA game, it shifts to non-RT, and after the end of the 1BBB game, it shifts to RT1. However, not only this but the following methods are also possible.
After the end of the 1 BBA game, and after the end of the 1 BBB game, it is shifted to RT 5 (newly added). Then, in RT5, a condition device which is a duplicate winning of a plurality of replays is drawn, and the condition device is won, and it is possible to shift from RT5 to RT3 based on a predetermined replay winning. Alternatively, it is possible to shift from RT5 to RT3 based on the display of the pattern pattern. Also, non-RT, RT2 and RT3 are set not to shift to RT5.
In this way, the transition from RT5 to RT3 (the winning of the condition device in RT5, the display of a predetermined replay, the winning in small group B in RT5, the pattern symbol is displayed On the basis of (RT5 or RT3), it is possible to execute addition of the number of ATs, and it is not necessary to provide the flag as described above.

Eleventh Embodiment
In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17, as a single winning combination of the small winning combination E1, the small winning combination E1 (number “250”) to shift to an advantageous interval when winning in the normal interval and the winning in the normal interval Also, a small combination E1 (number “750”) that does not shift to the advantageous section is provided.
On the other hand, in the eleventh embodiment, any small winning combination E1 also shifts to the advantageous section when it is won in the normal section. Here, in the eleventh embodiment, the small combination E1 of the numeral “250” is referred to as “small combination E1a”, and the small combination E1 of the numeral “750” is referred to as the “small combination E1 b”.
Furthermore, small part E2, 1BBA and small part E2 were deleted.
By doing this, in the game in which the small winning combination 36 has won, the transition from the next game to the advantageous section is invariably made (the advantageous section display LED 77 is lighted by then).

In addition, the advantageous section when winning a small winning combination E1b can be ended by executing the instruction function operation game only once (for example, it ends in five games after the instruction function operation game is executed once) in the advantageous section is there. Such an advantageous section may also be referred to as an AT gas omen among the AT omen.
On the other hand, the advantageous section when winning a small winning combination E1a is an advantageous section that executes AT after AT precursor, and the number of times of the game is after AT precursor (In addition, AT precursor has indicated function operation game once) It will be set to 50 games) which will end in 5 games after execution. It should be noted that the count of 50 games may be started immediately after anticipation of AT, may be started when transitioning to RT3 (or the next game thereof), and when Replay B is won (or the next game thereof) Or may be started with staying at RT 3 (or the next game). Furthermore, when the condition device having an advantageous operation mode (small combination B group, small combination C group, replay B group, or replay C group) is won during 50 games, the instruction function operation game is executed in principle.

  In addition, temporarily, it has the small combination E1 which moves to the advantageous section E1 (number “250”), the small combination E1 which does not shift to the advantageous area E (number “750”), and the small combination E2 which does not shift to the advantageous section When winning a small winning combination E1 (placement number "250") to shift to an advantageous segment, when shifting to an advantageous segment in which 50 ATs can be executed, from the game in which the small winning combination 36 is won or the next game As in the prior art, it is meaningless to output a continuous rendition to get the player's sense of expectation. This is because it can be determined whether or not to shift to the advantageous section by seeing whether or not the advantageous section display LED 77 is lighted. The eleventh embodiment is conceived to output a continuous rendition to capture the player's sense of expectation as in the prior art.

FIG. 68 is a time chart showing an advantageous section and the like at the time of winning the small winning combination E1b (example 1) and the small winning combination E1a (example 2) in the eleventh embodiment.
In the example 1 of FIG. 68, when the small winning combination E1 b is won, the advantageous section is started from the next game (the advantageous section display LED 77 is lighted). Then, wait until the small winning combination B is won. After the start of the advantageous section, in the game in which the first small winning combination B is won, the instruction function is activated to display an advantageous push order (execution of the instruction function operation game). From the next game of this instruction function operation game, a continuous effect is output (during the continuous effect, it is in the pre-emption of AT). Of course, continuous effects may be output from the instruction function operation game. In this example, the continuous effect executes 5 games. Then, in the fifth game, an effect of whether or not the advantageous section (AT) continues thereafter is output. At the time of winning the small winning combination E1b, since it is possible to end the advantageous section (AT precursor) in one indication function operation game, the advantageous section (AT precursor) is ended in the game in which the continuous effect is ended, and it shifts to the normal section .
In addition, when the small winning combination B is won among the 5 games in the continuous effect, the instruction function operation game may be executed, but the instruction function operation game is not executed in the present embodiment.

On the other hand, in Example 2 of FIG. 68, when the small winning combination E1a is won, the advantageous section is started (the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on), and the instruction function activation game is executed by the game winning the first small combination B group, The continuous effect (5 games) from the next game is output (the above is the same as when the small winning combination E1b is won). Then, when the small winning combination E1a is won, in the fifth game of the continuous effect, an effect that means to continue the advantageous section (AT) is output after that. And AT starts from the next game after the end of the continuous effect.
In addition, when the small winning combination B is won for five consecutive games, the instruction function activating game is not executed as at the small winning combination E1 b winning. Of course, when the player is to execute the instruction function activation game when the small combination B is further won among the 5 games in the continuous production after winning the small combination E1 b, after the small combination E1 a is won It is preferable to execute the instruction function operation game even when the small winning combination B is won among the five games in the continuous effect of. In this way, when the small combination E1b is won and when the small combination E1a is elected, the command function activation game is executed / not executed during the continuous rendition, but it is different accordingly. This is because it can be determined whether or not to continue the advantageous section (AT) after that.

Here, when the small winning combination E1a is won, it is determined to execute AT of 50 games. Instead of this, the advantageous section (AT without AT precursor) may be ended at the 50th game from the start of the advantageous section (the next game when the small winning combination E1a is won). Alternatively, after transition to the advantageous section, 50 games may be counted with the first indication function operation game as the first game (AT precursor up to the previous game of this game and start AT from this game).
In addition, 50 games may be counted from the next game of the game in which the winning combination (Replay B group including Replay 02) which can be shifted to a specific RT (for example, RT3 in FIG. 22) is won. In the case of 50 games from the next game winning a replay capable of transitioning to a specific RT, in the game winning a replay B group, the pushing order for shifting to a specific RT is notified. Furthermore, even if the player does not follow the notification in the game in which the Replay B group is won (even if Replay 02 is not displayed), the AT of 50 games will be executed from the next game. Become. As a result, it is possible to prevent an attack or the like that the player performs a stop operation so as not to intentionally shift to a specific RT.

  Furthermore, in the specification where the advantageous section is started from the next game of the game winning the small winning combination E1a, if the small winning combination E1a is won under the situation staying at the specific RT, the specific winning RT from the other RT A notification to maintain a specific RT when winning a winning combination (pattern combination 01 to 03 or a winning combination that can be displayed by Replay 03) that may shift to RT (for example, RT2 in FIG. 22) You may And, the start of the AT counting may be performed from the game in which the notification for maintaining the specific RT is given, or the predetermined game after the notification for maintaining the specific RT (may be the next game You may go from). By setting in this way, it is possible to reduce the number of games until it shifts to a specific RT again after shifting to another RT once, so it is advantageous in terms of the upper limit number of advantageous sections (1500 games). There are many opportunities to give a game.

In the above example, the winning combination of the small combination E1a and the small combination E1b is 5 games, but the present invention is not limited to this. The first command function operation game or its next game is an AT of 50 games It may be a game (1 game) that outputs an effect of whether or not to execute. Further, the number of AT games is not limited to 50, and may be determined by lottery or the like.
Furthermore, when the small winning combination E1b (setting number "750") is won, it is an advantageous section (AT after writing the AT leading warning) to execute 50 games AT after the AT warning, and when the small winning combination E1a (setting number "250") is winning, 1 It is good also as an advantageous section (AT precursor) which makes it possible to end by the instruction function operation game of time.

Furthermore, when the small winning combination E1a is won, the AT number of times of playing "m" is determined, and when the small winning combination E1a and the small winning combination E1 b are won, the number of times until the first indication function operation game can be executed
"n" is determined by lottery or the like. Then, when the number of times of game play "n" is determined, the instruction function is not activated even when the small winning combination B group is won until the number of times of game play "n" has elapsed. After the passage of the number of times of the game "n", the instruction function operation game is executed in the game when the first small winning combination B group is won.
Also, when the determined number of games "n" includes, for example, "n1" and "n2" (n1 <n2), and when the small winning combination E1a is won, the number of AT games determined is "m1" “N1” may be easily determined, and “n2” may be easily determined when the determined AT game frequency is “m2” which is larger than “m1”. In addition, "n1" may be easily determined even when the small winning combination E1b is won. Furthermore, when the small winning combination E1a is won, “n1” may be more easily determined when the small winning combination E1 b is won than when the determined AT game count is “m1”.
In this way, the longer the number of games “n” until the first command function activation game is executed after shifting to the advantageous section, the higher the possibility that the larger AT game frequency is determined, You can expect. Of course, as the number of times of game play "n" until the first indication function activation game is executed is shorter, the possibility that the number of times of game play of the larger AT is determined may be increased.

  In the eleventh embodiment, continuous effects are output from the next game when the first small winning combination B group is won. In this way, as in the prior art, the continuous effect is output from the next game of the game in which the player simply wins the small player E1a or the small player E1b (the continuous game is executed for 5 games). For the advantageous section (AT) when winning a small part E1a, the AT may be finished after 50 games (after the AT precursor ends in 5 games). Even if the advantageous section (AT precursor) at the time of winning E1b is to end in 5 games, if the instruction function activation game has not been executed at least once during 5 games, it is 5 games of continuous effect After that, although the effect which means not continuing the advantageous section (AT) is outputted, there is a possibility that the disadvantage that the advantageous section (AT precursor) does not end may occur.

  In addition, even if the advantageous section (AT precursor) when winning a small winning combination E1b is to end in a single command function operation game, if the command function operation game is always executed in the fifth game of the continuous effect There is a possibility that the advantageous section (AT precursor) will end in the third game of continuous effects, and the advantageous section (AT precursor) will not end even after the fifth game of continuous effects. Because there is Of course, even if the advantageous section (AT precursor) when winning a small winning combination E1b is to end in five games after one execution of the instruction function operation game, the instruction function operation game is always executed in the first game of continuous effect Since it is not always the case, there is a possibility that the advantageous section (AT precursor) will not end even after the fifth game of the continuous effect.

However, in the advantageous section (AT) when winning a small winning combination E1a, the AT ending of AT present (note that the AT presiding ends with one execution of the instruction function operation game) shall end with 50 games, When it is assumed that the advantageous section (AT precursor) when winning a small winning combination E1b is to end in one pointing function operation game, continuous effect is started from the game which started the advantageous section regardless of which one is won Continue to produce effects until the first small winning combination B is won, and when the first small winning combination B is won, activate the instruction function, and continue the advantageous section (AT in the game or the next game) Or not may be notified.
When this is done, the number of games until the first small winning combination B is won is indeterminate, so an effect image that means that the continuous effect used in the game in which the continuous effect is continued, and the advantageous section An effect image meaning not to continue the (AT) and an effect image meaning to continue the advantageous section (AT) may be prepared, and the continuous effect may be output.
In addition, when winning a small combination E1a (or a small combination E1b) during an advantageous section (for example, during continuous rendering) based on winning a small combination E1b, 50 AT after the AT. May be changed to carry out (continue the advantageous section).

FIG. 69 is a time chart showing Example 3 and Example 4 of the eleventh embodiment.
As described above, when the small winning combination E1 is won, the continuous effects are not output until the first small winning combination B group is won, but the continuous playing is output from the next game at the small winning combination B group winning.
On the other hand, Example 3 in FIG. 69 does not output continuous effects until the first small winning combination B is won at the small winning combination E1 etc., and from the next game when the small combination B winning This is an example in which continuous effects are not output, and an advantageous section is started when the AT of 30 games is executed from the next game when the small winning combination E1 is won. Of course, the ending condition of the advantageous section in the example 3 is not limited to this, and performs AT of 30 games (the number of times of game is free) after the AT omen (In addition, the AT omen may end in 5 games etc. The other end conditions of the various advantageous sections described above may be applied. Of course, an advantageous section of different end conditions may be started when the small winning combination E1a is won and when the small winning combination E1b is won.

  Furthermore, when the small winning combination E1 is won, there may be times when the advantageous section is started and when the advantageous section is not started. In Example 3 of FIG. 69, after starting the advantageous section, the small winning combination B group is never won by the end condition of the advantageous section set first (for example, AT for 30 games is executed). Example. If the small winning combination B is won before reaching the end condition of the advantageous section, and the indication function activation game is executed, as shown by a two-dot chain line in Example 3 of FIG. When the end condition is reached (when 30 ATs are executed), the advantageous section is ended.

  On the other hand, when the termination condition of the advantageous section is reached, when the instruction function operation game has not been executed even once (for example, when the small combination B has never won), the small combination B is subsequently performed. A group will be won, and at least the advantageous section will be extended until the instruction function activation game is executed. Example 3 in FIG. 69 shows an example in which the advantageous section is extended, and then the instruction function operation game is executed (by winning the small winning combination B group), and the advantageous section is ended in the game. In Example 3, the advantageous section ends after less than 1,500 games from the start of the advantageous section.

On the other hand, Example 4 in FIG. 69 does not execute the instruction function operation game once (after never winning the small winning combination B group) after starting the advantageous section, and 1500 which is the upper limit of the advantageous section It is an example which reached the game. In other words, although the end condition of the advantageous section was reached, when the advantageous section was extended, the upper limit was reached, or there was an increase in the advantageous section, etc., and the end condition of the advantageous section was not reached. This is an example of when it arrives.
Unlike the case of Example 3, in the rare case as in Example 4, the advantageous section is ended when the upper limit is reached, even if the instruction function operation game is not performed even once. This gives priority to "when the upper limit of the advantageous section (1500 games) is reached, end the advantageous section" rather than "during at least one command function operation game during the advantageous section". In order to Because, as in the case of Example 3, when the upper limit of the advantageous section is not reached, even if the advantageous section is extended, if the player plays a prize such as a small part E1 during that time, the advantageous section Although it is possible to carry out the addition etc. (as a matter of course, it is not necessary to carry out), as shown in Example 4, when the upper end of the advantageous section is reached, even if the advantageous section is extended, Since it is impossible for the player to take advantage of the addition of the advantageous section, etc., the regular section is advantageous for the player (If the player has won the role of rare during the regular section, a new advantageous section starts) Because there are

Twelfth Embodiment
In the twelfth embodiment, when the advantage section continues up to 1,500 games which is the upper limit (for example, when the small winning combination E1 etc. is won, and the addition etc. is performed during the started advantage section, it is determined to continue) Or, during the advantageous section, when it is determined that the game is continued by 1BB game etc., etc.), the ending effect is to be output, for example, from the 1450 game (when the upper limit is approached). The feature is (the point of outputting the ending effect is the same as that of the example 3 of FIG. 55 (third embodiment)). In addition, it is not limited to the 1450 game, and can be set variously, such as a 1400 game or a 1470 game.
The ending effect starts from the 1450 game and ends at the 1500 game. Here, the "ending effect" is, for example, a moving image, also referred to as a movie image, which is not divided for every single game (a moving image for which the image is not switched every unit game but for which a predetermined time is set). .

  By the way, the length of the ending effect is set so that even if the player plays the shortest game, it can be viewed to the end in just 50 games (a game in which the advantageous section ends). When it reaches the end, it repeats from the beginning or displays the last image as a still image. As described above, it is preferable that the ending effect is set to a length that can be seen until the end of the advantageous section even if the player plays at the shortest. At the end of the ending effect (at the end of the 1500th game), the total number of medals acquired in the advantageous section, the difference between the total number of medals acquired and the total number of medals inserted, and the total number of games (1500 games) indicate. Of course, the total number of medals acquired in the advantageous section (total number of acquired numbers), the difference between the total number of medals acquired and the total number of medals inserted (total number of acquired differences), the total number of games (1500 games), ending effect It may be displayed not as the last of, but as another effect to be output after that (such as an effect to be output during freeze which is executed at the end of the advantageous section (at the end of the 1500th game)) .

FIG. 70 is a time chart showing an example in which the ending effect is started from the 1450th game in the advantageous section, the ending effect is ended in the 1500th game, and the advantageous section is ended.
In FIG. 70, (a) shows an example in which 1BB (1BBA, 1BBB, etc. in the first embodiment) is won in the middle of the advantageous section and 1BB game is executed. In the example of (a), at the end of the 1BB game, the 1450 game in the advantageous section is not reached. In such a case, the execution of the 1BB game does not affect the end of the ending effect. Therefore, the ending effect is started from the 1450 game, and the ending effect is ended in the 1500 game (the ending effect is ended with the end of the advantageous section).

On the other hand, in FIG. 70, (b) shows an example in which the ending effect is started from the 1450th game in the advantageous section, and then 1BB is won in the 1490th game and the 1BB game is executed. And, an example is shown in which the end time of the 1BB game exceeds 1500 games which is the upper limit of the advantageous section.
Even in such a case, since there is no exception to the upper limit of the advantageous section, the advantageous section is ended after 1500 games (the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off). By the way, when ending the advantageous section, it does not execute freezing. Therefore, the advantage section ends in the middle of the 1BB game, and the 1BB game continues even after the end of the advantage section (which is a normal section).

In such a case, the ending effect in the present embodiment ends at the end of the 1BB game (not at the end of the advantageous section). This is because, as shown in (a), when the upper limit game number of the advantageous section is reached when 1BB is not in play, it is advantageous at the end of the ending effect or the effect output during the freeze at the end of the advantageous section It is necessary to display the total number of games played in the section, the total number of winning, etc. (in particular, the number of sets of AT executed in the advantageous segment, the total number of games played in AT, the total number of winning in AT, etc.). On the other hand, as shown in (b), when the upper limit game number of the advantageous section is reached during the 1BB game, the 1BB game is executed even after that (it is a normal section), and the ending effect is ended at this time. In this way, it is possible to execute freeze at the end of the ending effect or end the advantageous section, and to display the total number of games played in the advantageous section and the total number of obtained sheets by the effect output during the freeze, 1BB It is not preferable because it also hinders the game.

  In the first place, when ending 1BB game, freeze at the end of the effect in 1BB game, or at the end of 1BB game, and in the effect output during the freeze, the total number of games played in 1BB game and total In the case of (b) or the like, the winning number is displayed, and even when the upper limit game number of the advantageous segment is reached, the ending effect is not ended at this time, and the 1BB game is ended, The ending effect is to be ended, the freeze is executed at the end of the ending effect, or the end of the 1BB game, and in the effect outputted during the freeze, the total number of games played in the advantageous section, the total number of winning etc. It would be preferable to display the number of ATs executed in the advantageous section, the total number of games played in the AT, the total number of wins in the AT, etc.). .

  In addition, since 1BB gaming after reaching the upper limit game number of the advantageous section is 1BB game during the normal section, strictly the total number of games in the advantageous section, the total number of winning etc etc (especially, it was executed in the advantageous section If you want to display the number of AT sets, the total number of games played in AT, the total number of wins in AT, etc., the total number of games played and the total number of wins during the regular interval and 1BB game is not included. Although it is good, if it is not obliged to display strictly, it may be displayed including the total number of games played and the total number of winnings during (in the normal section and during 1BB game). The player's sense of satisfaction is more pronounced when it is displayed. For example, although the advantageous section can execute only up to 1,500 games, the display is more than 1,500 games, so there is a sense of satisfaction.

  Furthermore, during the 1BB game, when displaying the total number of games played and the total number of winnings in the 1BB game together with the ending effect, the total number of games played during the advantageous section, the total number obtained, etc. (especially, the advantageous segment When displaying the set number of AT executed in, the total number of games played in AT, the total number of wins in AT, etc., the display shows 1BB in game after reaching the upper limit number of games played in the advantageous section Also continue. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 55 (example 3) described above, when the ending effect is output, the total number of games played during 1BB and the total number obtained, the total number of games played during the advantageous section, the total number obtained, etc. If you do not display the number of ATs executed in the advantageous section, the total number of games played in the AT, the total number of wins in the AT, etc., during 1BB gaming after reaching the upper limit number of games played in the advantageous segment, Do not display.

In addition, the length of the ending effect is generally set to be seen until the end of the game by the end of the advantageous section even if the player plays the shortest game (if it goes to the end, it is after that) Repeating from the beginning, or displaying the last image as a still image) repeats the ending effect from the beginning even when the ending effect is output even after the end of the advantageous section as in the example of (b), or The last image of the ending effect is continuously displayed as a still image.
The ending effect is not to switch the image every unit game (divided into 1 game), but a moving image with a predetermined time, a moving image segmented into a predetermined number of games, a still image not segmented into 1 game, or It may be any of still images etc. divided into predetermined number of games.

13th Embodiment
In the thirteenth embodiment, the same RT transition as in FIG. 22 shown in the first embodiment is performed.
The thirteenth embodiment is characterized by the following points.
(1) The winning probability of the condition device (Replay B group, Replay C group, Small combination B group) related to the RT shift is made to have no setting difference.
(2) In RT2 which is shifted from non-RT or RT1, based on winning Replay B group, the advantageous section is added (enabled). On the other hand, when transitioning from RT3 to RT2, when transitioning from RT2 to RT3, the addition of the advantageous section is not executed.
(3) The winning probability of Replay A is set to have a setting difference.
(4) The winning probability of the small role D is set to have a setting difference.

  FIG. 71 is a diagram showing the numerical table (2) of the thirteenth embodiment and is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 18 of the first embodiment. In the first embodiment, the condition device for “small part D” is provided in FIG. 17, but in the present embodiment, since the small part D has a setting difference, the small part D is added to the table (2 Provided in Also in the thirteenth embodiment, a number table (1) similar to that shown in FIG. 17 shown in the first embodiment is provided (the number of small symbols D is not included).

  As in the first embodiment (FIG. 22), when transitioning from non-RT or RT1 to RT2, it is necessary to win the small winning combination B group and display the pattern symbol. Here, in order to display a pattern pattern, it is necessary to win a small winning combination B group. And when there is a setting difference in the winning probability of the small winning combination B group, the ease of transition from non-RT or RT1 to RT2 is different according to the setting value (the ease of transition from RT3 to RT2 is also different) ). Therefore, in the thirteenth embodiment, in the non-RT and RT1, the winning probability of the small winning combination B group does not have a setting difference. In the example shown in FIG. 71, the setting numbers of the small combination B1 to small combination B12 are set to “770” in common for all settings (not limited to this value). In addition, in order to make the appearance rate of each of the small roles B1 to B12 the same, all of the small roles B1 to B12 are the same.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 71, the Replay B group is drawn only at RT2, and the number of Replays B1 to B3 is “2800” common to all settings. Furthermore, the Replay C group is drawn only at RT3, and all of the Replays C1 to C3 have a prefix “12000” common to all settings. These points are the same as in the first embodiment.
Further, in the thirteenth embodiment, in RT2 shifted from non-RT or RT1, the addition of the advantageous section is executed at the time of replay B group winning (may be at the time of displaying replay 02 or at the time of transition from RT2 to RT3). In addition, the top of the advantageous section may always be topped, or it may be determined by lottery whether to top. In addition, the number of games to be added may also be a fixed number of predetermined games, or the number of games may be determined by lottery.

  Note that "over advantageous zone" can be replaced with "over AT" in all embodiments. For example, when the Replay B group is won in the AT2 (for example, when the AT's remaining game count is "5"), the special part is won, and the RT2 shifted from non-RT or RT1 after ending the special game is won, It is possible to execute an additional lottery to increase the number of remaining AT games, and to increase the number of remaining AT games (for example, to set the number of remaining AT games to "25") when the lottery is won.

It is similar to the tenth embodiment described above to execute the addition of the advantageous section at the time of the replay B-group winning in RT2 shifted from non-RT or RT1.
In the thirteenth embodiment, the Replay B group is a condition device that does not have a setting difference in the winning probability (number of places), so that it is possible to execute the addition of the advantageous section linked to the winning of the condition device. Thereby, it is possible to make the setting probability not have in the probability of the addition.
Further, as in the tenth embodiment, when the transition from RT3 to RT2 is made, in the RT2, even if it is elected to Replay B group (whether Replay 02 is displayed or RT2 to RT3) Do not carry over the advantageous section.
Furthermore, at RT2, when the Replay B group is won, RT2 is maintained or moves to RT3. Therefore, the replay B group is a condition device capable of transferring RT. Then, since the replay B group is a condition device having no setting difference in the winning probability, it is possible to make the setting probability not to have a setting difference (probability of transition) from RT2 to RT3.

  At RT3, when the Replay C group is won, RT3 is maintained or moves to RT2. Therefore, the replay C group is a condition device capable of transferring RT. Then, since the replay C group is a condition device having no setting difference in the winning probability, it is possible to make the setting probability of transition from RT3 to RT2 (ease of transition) not have a setting difference.

Similarly, when the small winning combination B is won in non-RT, RT1 or RT3 and the pattern symbol is displayed, it shifts to RT2. Therefore, the small role group B is a condition device capable of transferring RT. And since the small winning combination B group is a condition device which does not have a setting difference in the winning probability, it does not have a setting difference in the probability of shifting from non-RT, RT1, RT3 to RT2 can do.
In addition, since the small winning combination C group does not correspond to the condition device capable of transferring RT, it may have a setting difference or may not have a setting difference. In the example of FIG. 71, there is a setting difference.

As described above, the RT transition rate is not affected by the setting difference by not giving a setting difference to the winning probability in the condition device (the condition device related to the RT transition) in which RT can be transferred. can do.
However, RT4 (inside) transitioning based on the winning of the special part is excluded. For example, as shown in FIG. 71, the winning probability of “1 BBA + small combination E2”, 1 BBB, “1 BBB + small combination D” has a setting difference, but it shifts due to carrying over the winning of a special combination. ) Is an exception (may be affected by setting differences). This is because RT4 (inside) is shifted based on the winning of the special part, and is not shifted by the pushing order of the player, so the nature is different from that described above. Furthermore, RT4 (inside) is different in nature from the above because it is intended to stay only for a short period of time before winning 1BB. Also, RT4 (inside) can not determine the transition to the advantageous section even during the normal section originally, and can not perform the addition even during the advantageous section, so This is because there is no difference in setting between the transition probability and the addition probability.

Furthermore, in the thirteenth embodiment, the winning probability (number) of replay A has a setting difference. Note that Replay A has a different winning probability (number) for each RT. Since RT does not shift when Replay A is won, setting a setting difference does not affect the RT transition rate. As described above, the higher the winning probability of Replay A, the higher the probability of playing Replay. Therefore, when calculating the payout rate including the Replay, the higher the winning probability of Replay A, the higher the payout rate. Get higher.
Then, in the example of FIG. 71, the winning probability of Replay A is set higher in the setting 6 than in the setting 1. For this reason, since the setting 6 can make the non-winning probability (probability of losing) lower than the setting 1, it is possible to increase the payout rate accordingly.

  In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17, as a single winning combination of the small winning combination E1, the small winning combination E1 (number “250”) to shift to an advantageous interval when winning in the normal interval and the winning in the normal interval Also, a small combination E1 (number “750”) that does not shift to the advantageous section is provided. Temporarily, when winning a small combination E1 of the number "250", the advantageous section (50 counts of games may be started immediately when 50 ATs are executed, when it shifts to RT3 (or the next game) ) May be started, or may be started when Replay B is won (or the next game), or may be started with staying at RT 3 (or the next game)) It is defined that transition is to be made (Others, the end conditions of various advantageous sections described above may be applied). Even with the same 50-game AT, the one with a high probability of winning Replay A (low probability of non-winning) is more newly inserted than when the probability of winning Replay A is low (high probability of non-winning) Because there is no need to (consumer), the payout rate will be higher accordingly. As described above, even if there is no setting difference in the probability determined to shift to the advantageous section, the setting difference can be added to the pop-out rate in the advantageous section.

  Furthermore, in the first embodiment described above, as shown in FIG. 17, the small winning combination D is a condition device having no setting difference. On the other hand, in the thirteenth embodiment, the condition device has a setting difference. Further, although not shown in FIG. 71, the number of payouts when the small winning combination D is won and the small winning combination 35 (watermelon) is won is set to 15 (five in the first embodiment). Therefore, the small role D is a small portion having the maximum payout number among the small portions.

  In addition, since the small combination 35 related to the small combination D is “PB ≠ 1”, the small combination 35 can not be won without looking. For this reason, for example, when the small winning combination D is won, an effect may be output that indicates that the small winning combination D has been won, such as giving a green notification. Here, when the player of "PB ≠ 1" wins a condition device that can win a prize, outputting an effect that suggests the winning is not "activation of the instruction function". Although it is true that the small part 35 wins and does not win at the timing of the eye-pushing, the small part 35 is correct when the small part D is won, regardless of the non-election. If the stop switch 42 is operated at the operation timing, it is a role that can be made to win always. In this point, as in the case of the small combination B according to the present invention, it is different from the small combination in which the winning rate is different depending on the presence or absence of the operation of the instruction function. For example, in order to win the small winning combination 01 at the time of winning the small winning combination B1, if it is always operated by the left first, it is not possible to win the small winning combination 01 at the time of winning the small combination B5.

For example, when the left reel 31 is stopped, the left stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the "watermelon" of No. 4, 9, or 14 in FIG. If the middle stop switch 42 is operated at the timing at which the 8th or 13th "watermelon" can stop at the effective line, (the right reel 31 may have any timing because "watermelon" is "PB = 1"), The small winnings 35 can always be won (without any notification).
In the invention of the present application, there is no role of "PB 以外 1" other than the small winning combination 35 (does not include the pressing order incorrect answering time at the small winning combination B group winning), so every game, stop at the above timing If the switch 42 is operated, the drop of the small role 35 does not occur.
As described above, the game when the small winning combination D is won does not fall under the “game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch” in the present invention.

Thereby, when the advantageous section is started, it is necessary to activate the indicating function at least once during the advantageous section upon winning of the condition device which is the maximum payout by the activation of the indicating function. The condition device for achieving the maximum payout according to the above is not the small combination D but the small combination B group.
Although not shown in FIG. 71, as in the first embodiment, a small winning combination E1 (two payout number) is provided as a condition device having no setting difference.

From the above, in the thirteenth embodiment,
Winning probability of small part D: With setting difference (15 pieces of payout number)
Winning probability of small winning combination B group: There is no setting difference (in pressing order correct answer, payout number 9)
Winning probability of the small winning combination E1: There is no difference in settings (two payouts)
And the size relationship of the number of payouts is
Small part D> Small part B group (during correct order)> Small part E1
It becomes.

Temporarily, when it is made for the game when winning a small winning combination D to correspond to the "game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch" in the invention of the present application (a winning combination was made a small winning percentage different depending on the presence or absence of the instruction function In this case, the “conditional device that provides the maximum payout due to the operation of the instruction function” becomes the small role D instead of the small portion B. In such a case, since the winning probability of the small winning combination D is low, it may occur frequently that the small winning combination D has not been won until the ending condition of the advantageous interval is satisfied (cannot be ended even though it is desired to end the advantageous interval). However, if the probability of winning the small role D is high (if it is higher than the probability of winning the small role B group), it is highly likely that the small role D has been double-picked with 1 BBB (the role of rare) (It is because most single player D's single winning won't be expected to be a double winning with 1 BBB).

For this reason, the number of payouts when the small winning combination D wins must be made smaller than the number of payouts when the small winning combination B is correctly pressed. Then, even if it is made to have the setting difference in the winning probability of the small role D, it does not become the change of the large withdrawal rate (The dropout rate greatly changes because the small combination with a large number of payouts has the setting difference Because it will However, if there is a setting difference in the winning probability of the small winning combination B group having a large number of payouts at the time of pressing order correctness, then the setting difference will occur in the ease of RT transition.
Therefore, in the thirteenth embodiment, the payout rate varies according to the setting value using the small winning combination D having a large number of payouts (the higher the setting rate, the higher the payout rate (the payout rate increases according to the setting value) V.) can be set, and RT transition can be made insusceptible to the setting difference.

In the thirteenth embodiment, the small part D is “PB ≠ 1”, but if “watermelon” is arranged as “PB = 1” for all the reels 31, for example, the player is It will be possible to win) regardless of workmanship.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 71, since the small winning combination D has a case in which the double winning combination with 1 BBB is made, the small winning combination 35 is more likely to appear as the high setting is set. be able to. Specifically, when the set value is set to “1”, the probability that 1 BBB is won at the appearance of the small winning combination 35 is “20/520” = “0.038 (approximately 3.8% When the set value is set to “6”, the probability that 1 BBB is won at the time of the appearance of the small bonus 35 is “25/625” = “0.040 (approximately 4.0% ). Therefore, when the small winnings 35 appear, the higher the setting value, the higher the possibility that 1 BBB has won, so providing the player with an element for estimating the setting value to increase the operation rate of the gaming machine. You can also.

  In addition, although it can be said to all the embodiments, in FIG. 17, FIG. 18 and FIG. 71, it is free to set the part marked “o” to “x” and it is “x”. It is free to set the point to “O” unless the condition device has no setting difference and won only in a specific RT (except during RT4, 1 BBA playing, 1 BB B playing), “X” It is free to make the part where it becomes “Δ” as long as the condition device has no setting difference.

Fourteenth Embodiment
In the fourteenth embodiment, after the start of the advantageous section, before the end of the advantageous section (before the end condition is reached), the condition for changing the end condition of the advantageous section (extension condition of the advantageous section) is satisfied Is characterized by extending the advantageous section.
For example, when the number of games (initial value) of the advantageous section is 30 games at the start of the advantageous section (for example, when the previous game was the winning of the small part D in the first embodiment), it is advantageous during the advantageous section When the extension condition of the section (for example, the winning of the small winning combination E1 in the first embodiment, etc.) is satisfied, the number of games is further added to extend the advantageous section. In the fourteenth embodiment, the termination condition of the advantageous section is set to 30 games, but in addition, the termination conditions of various advantageous sections described above may be applied.

FIG. 72 is a time chart explaining the fourteenth embodiment.
In the example 1 of FIG. 72, when the advantageous section is started, the instruction function activation game is executed in the game when the first small winning combination B group is won. And, in Example 1, the number of times of playing of the advantageous section set first is 3
I have 0 games. In Example 1, the extension condition of the advantageous section is satisfied during the 30 games, and the number of times of the game is added by “50”. When the extension condition is not satisfied among the first 30 games of the advantageous section, the advantageous section ends at the 30th game, as indicated by a two-dot chain line in the figure. On the other hand, in Example 1, since the extension condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the number of games in the advantageous section is extended by 50 games.

  In this case, if at least one instruction function activation game is being executed at the end of the first 30 games, in the subsequent 50 games, even if it has never won the small winning combination B group, ie 1 The advantageous section can be ended without executing the command function operation game any time. This is because a single instruction function operation game is executed in a total of 80 games.

On the other hand, in FIG. 72, as in Example 1, in the example 2, the number of games played for the advantageous section initially set is 30 games, and during this 30 games, the extension condition for the advantageous section is satisfied, An example is shown.
And, in Example 2, in the first 30 games and 50 games extended (total 80 games), we have never won the small role B group (that is, no instruction function operation game has been executed even once) It is an example. In such a case, even if the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied (80 games are reached), the advantageous section is not ended.

In Example 2 of FIG. 72, when a small winning combination B is won among 50 extended games and an instruction function activation game is executed (two-dot chain line A in the drawing) is an advantageous section in the 50th extended game. Can be completed (in the figure, a two-dot chain line B).
On the other hand, when a total of 80 games, ie, the instruction function activation game has not been executed even once from the start of the advantageous section, it waits for the small combination B to win, and when the small combination B is elected, the indication function activation Run a game. Then, the advantageous section ends.

  In the example of FIG. 72, the number of games in the first advantageous section is set to 30 and the number of extended games is set to 50, however, in these advantageous sections, a Gasse AT precursor (for example, CZ or AT If the transition conditions are not satisfied, one that ends in 32 games (the number of games is free), or one that ends in one (the number of times is free) instruction function activation game, etc.), AT precursor (for example, transition conditions to AT) Even if not satisfied, after 32 games (the number of games is free) is 50 games (the number of games is free, and the start timing of counting the number of games may apply the various timings described above) etc.) , CZ (for example, if the conditions for transition to AT are not satisfied, the game ends in 10 games (the number of games is free), or one (the number of times is free) of the instruction function activated game, etc. A omen and All, it is easy to meet the transition conditions to AT, AT (If you do not meet the extension conditions, 30 games (the number of games is free, count timing of the number of games may start to apply various timings mentioned above) Can be provided in a variety of ways, such as

  For example, when transitioning to CZ (corresponding to “30” game in FIG. 72) at the start of the advantageous section and the transition condition to “AT” (corresponding to “extension condition”) is satisfied in this CZ, AT (“50 (Corresponding to the extension of the game) (to extend the termination condition of the advantageous section). On the other hand, when CZ does not satisfy the transition condition to AT, when the CZ end condition is satisfied, the advantageous section is ended, and the transition to the normal section (normal to CZ, AT, etc.) (example) Among them, a two-dot chain line) can be mentioned.

Furthermore, besides the above,
(1) Assuming that the first advantageous section is CZ (for example, one that ends with 30 games), and the extension condition of the advantageous section is satisfied during this CZ, the CZ with a longer number of games is added ("20" for the number of games is added) Change to).
(2) The first advantageous section is "an advantageous section (Gase AT precursor, or CZ) ending with a predetermined number of times (for example, once) command function operation game", and the advantageous section until the first command function operation game is executed CZ (a predetermined number of times of game play, or an instruction function activated game ends at a predetermined number of times) when an extension condition (CZ transition condition or AT transition condition, for example, winning of a small winning combination E1) is satisfied. Or change to AT (which ends in a predetermined number of games).
(3) The first advantageous section is "an advantageous section (gasse AT precursor or CZ) ending with a predetermined number of times (for example, once) command function operation game", and the advantageous section before the first command function operation game is executed When an extension condition (extension condition or CZ transition condition) of is satisfied, “a favorable section (Gasse AT precursor, or CZ) ending with a predetermined number of times or more (for example, three times) instructing function operation game” Change to
(4) The first advantageous section is an AT of 30 games, and when the extension condition of the advantageous section is satisfied during this AT, the AT is changed to an AT of 100 games (the number of games is increased by 70).
And the like.

In FIG. 72, when the first 30 games in the advantageous section are CZ, the instruction function activation game is executed only when the first small combination B group is won, and thereafter (30 games from the first game) is the small combination B group The player does not have to execute the instruction function operation game even if
On the other hand, two or more instruction function operation games may be executed during CZ (30 games).
In addition, even when the transition condition to AT is satisfied during CZ, if one instruction function operation game has already been executed during CZ, the subsequent AT does not execute the instruction function operation game May be In addition, it is the same as when the conditions for transition to CZ or AT are satisfied in the Gas AT precursor. That is, it is sufficient that one pointing function activation game should be executed between the start and the end of the advantageous section.

The fifteenth embodiment
The fifteenth embodiment is characterized in that freezing is performed and not performed when ending the advantageous section.
FIG. 73 is a time chart showing the relationship between the advantageous section and the freeze in the fifteenth embodiment.
In the fifteenth embodiment, when it is determined to execute the advantageous section (for example, when the small winning combination E1 is won), the beginning of the advantageous section starts CZ. When CZ meets the transition condition to AT, AT starts after CZ ends. Of course, it is not limited to this. Some start CZ as the beginning of the advantageous section, and some may start AT from the beginning.

In FIG. 73, in the first CZ (favorable section), the condition for transition to AT is not satisfied, and the advantageous section ends with CZ alone. The next CZ (advantage zone) is an example in which the transition condition to AT is satisfied, and after CZ, AT is executed to end the AT and the advantage zone. When the transition condition to AT is satisfied during CZ, CZ may be terminated immediately and AT may be executed, or may be waited until CZ is terminated and AT may be executed. It is not limited to the embodiment).
In addition, although not illustrated in FIG. 73, even in the case of ending only with CZ, since transition to the advantageous section is performed, it is necessary to execute at least one instruction function operation game.
In the fifteenth embodiment, the freeze is not performed (the two-dot chain line in the drawing) at the end of the first CZ (when the AT is not performed after the CZ ends and the advantageous section is ended). On the other hand, when transitioning from CZ to AT, freeze is executed at the end of AT (advantage zone).
In addition, at the time of freezing, at least the total number of AT games, the total number of winning, etc. are displayed as an image. Of course, the total number of games played in CZ and the total number of won may be displayed as an image, and when transitioning from CZ to AT via AT precursor, CZ and / or AT precursor may be displayed. An image may be displayed that includes the total number of games and the total number of winnings.

As described above, it is determined in advance in which advantageous sections the freeze is performed at the end and in which advantageous sections the freeze is performed at the end.
For example, as an expected value such as the total number of games played in the advantageous section and the total number of obtained sheets, the first end condition (for example, the end of the advantageous section only with CZ (Gasse AT precursor)) and the expected value rather than the first end condition When there is a large second end condition (for example, after CZ, when performing AT or when only AT is performed), freezing is not performed when the advantageous section ends with the first end condition, and the advantageous section When ending with the second end condition, it is possible to execute freezing. The reason is that the freeze is executed until the expected value such as the total number of games in the advantageous section or the total number of wins is small (for example, 10 games as the total number of games, 12 total wins, etc.) This is because there is a high possibility that the player's feeling of shame will be increased (the interest will be reduced) if the image display is made to display the total number of winnings and the like.
Even in the advantageous section, unlike AT, there are cases where the purpose is to give the player many medals (to increase the total number of winnings), such as the Gase AT precursor, AT precursor, CZ, etc. It is not preferable to execute freeze uniformly at the end of the advantageous section.

  Note that, for example, a freeze flag may be provided as a determination as to whether or not to perform the freeze. This freeze flag remains off only at the start of CZ but turns on when AT is executed. Then, at the end of the advantageous section, it is determined whether or not the freeze flag is on. If it is on, the freeze is executed. If the freeze is executed, the freeze flag is turned off. It should be noted that immediately before the end of the advantageous section, it is determined whether or not the freeze flag is on. If it is on, the freeze is executed, and when the advantageous section is ended, information on the advantageous section including the freeze flag It may be initialized.

By controlling in this manner, it is possible not to perform freezing at the end of the advantageous section which does not bring much merit to the player, for example, when the advantageous section is started but ended only by CZ.
In addition, information (“1” to “4”, etc.) specifying the type of advantageous section (CZ, Gasse AT precursor, AT precursor, AT, etc.), or “0” to “4” etc. For example, “0” is a normal section, “1” is CZ, “2” is a Gasse AT precursor, “3” is an AT precursor, and “4” is an AT etc.). Then, at the end of the advantageous section, or immediately before the end of the advantageous section, this information may be determined and the freezing may be performed.

  In addition, freezing is not limited to one time. For example, when the AT executes 50 games as one break, the freeze is executed every 50 games (for example, even if it is 100 games AT), while the freeze is being executed, the AT continues even after the next game It is possible to output an effect as to whether or not to. In addition, every 50 games, the total number of games played at that time and the total number of winnings can be displayed as an image, and an effect as if the advantageous section is over (it was an AT of 50 games) can be output.

In addition, when it reaches 1500 games which is the upper limit of the advantageous section while executing AT, it executes freezing, during that freezing, it displays the total game number in AT and the total number of acquisition etc etc as a picture .
In this case as well, if CZ or AT precursor is being executed before executing AT, even if the image including the total number of games played and the total number of winning cards in CZ and / or AT precursor is displayed as an image Good.
In addition, when CZ and AT prognostics are being executed, freeze is executed also when reaching 1500 games which is the upper limit of the advantageous section, and during the freeze, the advantageous section (a part of the advantageous section such as CZ) Alternatively, the total number of games played or the total number of winnings may be displayed as an image.

However, as shown in FIG. 70 (b), when reaching the upper limit of 1500 games, which is the upper limit of the advantageous section during 1BB operation (for example, 1BB is activated while AT is being executed, and 1BB is activated. When reaching 1500 games, etc., do not execute freeze at the time of 1500 games arrival (because 1BB game is in progress) and execute freeze at the end of 1BB game (during that freeze, the total number of games played during AT or The total number of winnings etc. will be displayed as an image.
In addition, when freeze is performed, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off after the end of the freeze. Of course, prior to the execution of the freeze, the advantageous zone display LED 77 may be turned off, or during the freeze, the advantageous zone display LED 77 may be turned off. The timing of initialization is also the same as the turn-off timing of the advantageous section display LED 77.

Further, in FIG. 73, it is also possible to provide a condition device in which the advantageous section ends with CZ alone, and a condition device in which it is determined to execute both CZ and AT. For example, in FIG. 17 of the first embodiment, when the small winning combination E1 alone with the digit number “750” is elected, it is an advantageous section ending with only CZ, and when the small winning combination E1 alone with the digit number “250” is elected, CZ and To be an advantageous section to carry out. By setting in this manner, it is possible to decide to execute the AT without performing a drawing of whether or not the transition condition to the AT is satisfied during the CZ.
Of course, even in this case, a lottery may be made during CZ to determine whether the transition condition to the AT is satisfied (it may be performed only in the case of an advantageous section ending with only CZ). In addition, it is also possible to output a continuous effect as to whether or not to execute the AT before several games in which CZ ends. And also in this case, whether or not to execute freezing is as described above.

As mentioned above, although 3rd-15th embodiment of this invention were described, it is not limited to the content mentioned above, For example, the following various modifications are possible.
(1) In the third embodiment (FIGS. 43 to 52), an example of information (command) transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. 50 may be any one as long as the sub control board 80 side transmits parameters (number of digested games, number of remaining games, number of added games, number of wins, number of command function activations, etc.) necessary for display during advantageous period (AT) .

(2) Also, in FIGS. 43 to 52, in order to manage the advantageous section (AT) by the number of games, parameters related to the number of games (AT counter value, additional counter value, upper limit counter value, etc.) are transmitted. If the upper limit of (AT) is managed by, for example, the number of winnings (for example, 3000), information of the number of winnings is transmitted every game.
In addition, every game, the main control board 50 transmits information indicating that it is in the advantageous section and information indicating that it is in AT, and counts the number of advantageous sections and the number of AT games on the sub control board 80 side. It is also possible to provide a counter and count the number of games on the sub control board 80 side.

(3) In FIGS. 47 to 49 of the third embodiment, lottery tables A and B are provided as lottery tables used in the additional lottery, and the lottery used according to whether or not the specified number is "1000" or more as the threshold. I switched the table. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any number of lottery tables may be provided. Moreover, although the specified number "1000" was illustrated as a threshold value, it is not restricted to this.
For example, four types of lottery tables A>B>C> D are provided as lottery tables having different values of the expected value to be added. And, when the prescribed number (the number of AT games) is less than 500, the lottery table A is used, and when the prescribed number is 500 or more and less than 1000, the lottery table B is used, and the prescribed number is more than 1000 or more than 1300. Can use the lottery table C, and when the specified number is 1300 or more, the lottery table D can be used.

(4) As shown in Examples 1 to 3 of FIG. 55, when the total number of games in the advantageous section (AT) reaches the upper limit, it is specific when the total number of games in the advantageous section (AT) reaches the upper limit Although the information is displayed, it is not limited to these Examples 1 to 3.
a) A display that allows the player to identify that the total number of games played in the advantageous section (AT) has reached the upper limit b) A display different from the display before the total number of games played in the advantageous section (AT) has reached the upper limit What is necessary is just a thing, It is not limited to the display content of Example 1-3.

  (5) In addition, in the example 1 of FIG. 55, when the total game number of AT exceeds 1500 games due to the addition, the display of the digested game count and the remaining game count is not changed. Although the display font of the remaining game number is made different, the character size is made different, the display color is made different, etc., the information on the digested game number and the remaining game number is not changed, but the display mode is made different. Thus, the player may be notified that the total number of AT games has exceeded 1,500.

  (6) In Example 4 of FIG. 55, when the advantage section (AT) is a little left, a display such as "It will finish in 10 more games" is displayed, but at the start of the advantage section (AT) It is also possible to give advance notice such as “This advantageous section (AT) can not be played beyond 1500 games”.

  (7) In the fourth embodiment, the AT signal is transmitted as the external signal 2. However, for example, in the case of a slot machine of a specification in which the advantageous section and the AT do not match, the advantageous section and the AT can be distinguished. An external signal may be transmitted. For example, two external signals can be used to transmit external signals that can distinguish “non-advantage zone (non-AT)”, “advantage zone and non-AT”, and “advantage zone and AT”.

(8) In the fourth embodiment, the BB is won immediately before reaching the upper limit of the advantageous section, and the start time of BB gaming is at the upper limit of the advantageous section (1500 game from the start of the advantageous section) or immediately after reaching the upper limit (for example, advantageous) When it is the 1501 game from the start of the section), start BB game in the non advantageous section, turn on only the external signal 1 (BB) and turn off the external signal 2 (AT) (the advantageous section and AT) To finish).
In addition, when the end of the BB game is at the upper limit of the advantageous segment (1500 game from the start of the advantageous segment) or immediately before the upper limit is reached (for example, 1499 from the start of the advantageous segment), the external at the end of the BB game At the same time as turning off signal 1 (BB), turning off external signal 2 (AT) (terminating the advantageous section and AT) can be mentioned.

  (9) In the fifth embodiment, AT, CZ, precursor, and normal are exemplified as control states controlled by the main control board 50. For example, an additional specialization zone is shifted when a predetermined condition is satisfied during AT. It is also possible to provide This additional specialization zone is continued until, for example, the predetermined number of games are consumed, or the predetermined combination is won a predetermined number of times, and during that period, each time a condition device (for example, small combination B group) to be added is elected. There is a possibility to add the number of AT games.

(10) In the example of (a) in FIG. 61 in the fifth embodiment, after AT (state 1) ends, transition to the AT pullback period (state 2) is made, and in this state 2, when the AT can not be pulled back Transition to normal (state 3). Moreover, in the example of (b), it was made to shift to CZ after AT completion, and when it was not possible to pull back AT in this CZ, it was shifted to normal. Furthermore, in the example of (c), after completion of CZ, transition to the CZ withdrawal period is made, and when CZ can not be withdrawn during this CZ withdrawal period, transition is made to the normal.
However, the above state transition is an example and is not limited thereto.

For example, in FIG. 61 (a), after AT (state 1) ends, the process may shift to normal (state 3) without passing through the AT withdrawal period (state 2).
Further, in FIG. 61 (b), the transition may be made as normal → CZ → AT, or may be made transition as normal → precursor → AT. After the end of AT, the transition may be made from AT to normal, or from AT to precursor (CZ withdrawal period) to normal.
Furthermore, in FIG. 61 (c), the transition may be made from CZ to CZ without passing from a normal sign. Furthermore, it may be made to shift normally from CZ without going through a pullback period.

(11) In the eighth embodiment, although the output of the continuous effect is started near the end of the 1BBA game, for example, the output of the continuous effect is started simultaneously with the start of the 1BBA game, and the AT is kept all the time You may continue to output an effect indicating whether to start or not.
In addition, the output of the continuous effect may be started from the start of the 1BBA game, and the effect of finally notifying whether to start the AT may be output in the first half of the 1BBA game. Alternatively, an effect may be provided in which the execution of the AT is determined when the effect is output during the continuous effect, and the effect may be output in the middle of the continuous effect.
In the eighth embodiment, the continuous effects are not necessarily necessary effects. Therefore, it is optional whether or not to output the continuous effect. Further, for example, it is also possible to output an effect of whether or not to continue the advantageous section, for only one game.

(12) In the ninth embodiment, when starting the advantageous section based on the winning of the condition device including the special part, for example, there may be a case where the instruction function is activated at the time of winning the small part B group in RT4 . When the instruction function is activated at RT4, the payout rate at RT4 exceeds "1". In such a case, it is necessary to start the advantageous section from the start of RT4 which is the next game of the game winning the special part.
On the other hand, when the instruction function is not activated even if it shifts to RT4, the advantageous section may be started by the start of the special game.

(13) In the third embodiment, when the upper limit value of the advantageous section approaches, the winning probability of the AT addition lottery in the main control board 50 is designed to be low, or the addition effect in the sub control board 80 is suppressed. By doing this, it is possible to make the player not as discouraged as possible even if the upper limit value of the advantageous section approaches.
As another method, there is also a method of preventing the player from being discouraged as much as possible by changing the execution probability of the freeze effect based on the number of executed games in the advantageous section and the like. For example, in FIG. 17, when winning a small combination E1 of storage number "250", the number of additional games is "50" (50%), "100" (40%), or "200" (10%) The setting is made so that the possibility of the freeze effect being executed increases as the number of times of the additional game increases.

In such a specification, when "200" is determined as the additional game number when the game number in the advantageous section is less than a predetermined value (for example, 1300), the freeze effect is performed with probability X (including 100%) When the number of games in the advantageous section is equal to or more than the predetermined value, the freeze effect is executed with a probability Y (including 0%) lower than the probability X when "200" is determined as the number of additional games.
By this configuration, when the upper limit of the advantageous section approaches, the execution probability of the freeze effect can be lowered, and the player can be prevented from being overwhelmed excessively by the freeze effect. That is, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged as much as possible when the freeze effect is performed.
(14) The embodiments described above are not limited to being implemented alone, and may be implemented by combining a plurality of embodiments as appropriate.

<Supplementary Note>
The inventions described in the initial specification and the like of the present application (initial inventions) may include, for example, the following first inventions 1 to 26, and each solves the problems to be solved by the respective initial inventions and the problems related to the initial inventions. Means of the invention and effects of the first invention are as follows. However, the invention described in the present specification is not meant to be limited to the first inventions 1 to 26.

1. Initial invention 1
(A) Problem to be Solved by Invention 1 Initially, the invention relates to a slot machine provided with an advantageous section capable of executing an instruction function operating game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch.
In the conventional slot machine, it is known to manage the AT with the main control board in addition to managing the AT with the sub control board (see, for example, JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section which is a game section capable of executing AT. Here, when the upper limit (for example, upper limit game frequency) is provided in the advantageous section, as a result of performing addition of the number of games during the advantageous section and the AT, the upper limit of the advantageous section may be exceeded. In such a case, appropriate control is required to be performed.
The problem to be solved by the invention at first is to prevent the player from giving an impression that the game can be played beyond the upper limit when extending the instruction game section (AT) exceeds the upper limit of the advantageous section. is there.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the First Invention 1 (Here, the corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The first solution (third embodiment; Example 2 of FIG. 55) is
A game (a game when a small winning combination B is won) having an advantageous operation mode (a correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an indication function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Of the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function activation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, the game has an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, and an instruction function operating game is always executed or an instruction gaming section (AT) with a high execution frequency.
Game control means (main control board 50) for controlling the start and end of the advantageous section and the start and end of the instruction game section;
A presentation control means (sub control board 80) for outputting a presentation relating to the instruction game section;
The game control means
In the advantageous section, when the upper limit (1500 games) of the advantageous section is reached, the advantageous section ends.
In the advantageous section, when the start condition of the instruction game section is satisfied, the instruction game section is started,
In the instruction game section, when the condition for the extension of the instruction game section (addition of the number of games) is satisfied, the instruction game section can be extended,
Send information (AT counter value, superimposition counter value, upper limit counter value, etc.) regarding the instruction game section to the effect control means,
The effect control means is
Based on the information received from the game control means, even if the instruction game zone is extended but does not exceed the continuation upper limit of the advantageous zone, predetermined information on the extension of the instruction game zone (AT remaining game after the addition) Display the number of times)
Based on the information received from the game control means, the extension of the instruction game segment will exceed the continuation upper limit of the advantage segment, or after the instruction game segment reaches the continuation upper limit of the advantage segment When determined, it is characterized in that specific information ("holiday", "congratulation", etc.) different from the predetermined information is displayed.

According to a second solution, in the first solution,
The effect control means is
Information which can grasp how much the instruction game section has been extended is displayed as the predetermined information (a specific number of times of game is displayed),
As the specific information, it is possible to know that some determination regarding the extension of the instruction game section has been made, but displays information that can not be grasped about the extent of the extension of the instruction game section do not do)
It is characterized by

(C) Effects of the First Invention 1 According to the first invention, when extending the instruction game zone exceeds the continuation upper limit of the advantage zone, or after the instruction game zone reaches the continuation upper limit of the advantage zone When the extension is determined, the predetermined information on the extension of the instructed game section is not displayed, so it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding if the instructed game section continues beyond the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section. be able to.

2. Initial invention 2
(A) Problems to be solved by the first invention 2 The same as the first invention.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of Initial Invention 2 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The first invention (third embodiment; example 3 of FIG. 55) is
A game (a game when a small winning combination B is won) having an advantageous operation mode (a correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an indication function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Of the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function activation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, the game has an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, and an instruction function operating game is always executed or an instruction gaming section (AT) with a high execution frequency.
Game control means (main control board 50) for controlling the start and end of the advantageous section and the start and end of the instruction game section;
A presentation control means (sub control board 80) for outputting a presentation relating to the instruction game section;
The game control means
In the advantageous section, when the upper limit (1500 games) of the advantageous section is reached, the advantageous section ends.
In the advantageous section, when the start condition of the instruction game section is satisfied, the instruction game section is started,
In the instruction game section, when the condition for the extension of the instruction game section (addition of the number of games) is satisfied, the instruction game section can be extended,
Send information (AT counter value, superimposition counter value, upper limit counter value, etc.) regarding the instruction game section to the effect control means,
The effect control means, based on the information received from the game control means, when the instructed game section or the advantageous section reaches a predetermined threshold (the total number of ATs of the game is 1,500 games), the instructed game section is the advantageous section It is characterized in that it is possible to output an effect (ending effect) that indicates that the upper limit of the continuation is approaching.

(C) Effects of the First Invention 2 According to the first invention, since the effect to indicate that the command game section is approaching the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section is output, the instruction game section continues beyond the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section The player can be informed that he does not do so.

3. Initial invention 3
(A) Problems to be solved by the first invention 3 The same as the first invention 1.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the First Invention 3 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The first invention (third embodiment; Example 1 of FIG. 55) is
A game (a game when a small winning combination B is won) having an advantageous operation mode (a correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an indication function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Of the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function activation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, the game has an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, and an instruction function operating game is always executed or an instruction gaming section (AT) with a high execution frequency.
Game control means (main control board 50) for controlling the start and end of the advantageous section and the start and end of the instruction game section;
A presentation control means (sub control board 80) for outputting a presentation relating to the instruction game section;
The game control means
In the advantageous section, when the upper limit (1500 games) of the advantageous section is reached, the advantageous section ends.
In the advantageous section, when the start condition of the instruction game section is satisfied, the instruction game section is started,
In the command game section, when the extension condition of the command game section is satisfied, the command game section can be extended,
Send information (AT counter value, superimposition counter value, upper limit counter value, etc.) regarding the instruction game section to the effect control means,
The effect control means is
Based on the information received from the game control means, when extending the instruction game section does not exceed the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section, information on the extension of the instruction game section (the number of AT remaining games after the addition) is displayed ,
Based on the information received from the game control means, the extension of the instruction game segment will exceed the continuation upper limit of the advantage segment, or after the instruction game segment reaches the continuation upper limit of the advantage segment When determined, it is characterized by not displaying information on the extension of the instructed game section (the number of AT remaining games after the addition).

(C) Effects of the First Invention 3 According to the first invention, when extending the instruction game zone exceeds the continuation upper limit of the advantage zone, or after the instruction game zone reaches the continuation upper limit of the advantage zone When the extension is determined, the information on the extension of the instructed game section is not displayed, so it is possible to prevent the player from being misunderstood when the instructed game section continues beyond the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section.

4. Initial invention 4
(A) Problems to be solved by the first invention 4 The same as the first invention 1.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the First Invention 4 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The first solution (third embodiment; example 4 of FIG. 55) is
A game (a game when a small winning combination B is won) having an advantageous operation mode (a correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an indication function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Of the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function activation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, the game has an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, and an instruction function operating game is always executed or an instruction gaming section (AT) with a high execution frequency.
Game control means (main control board 50) for controlling the start and end of the advantageous section and the start and end of the instruction game section;
A presentation control means (sub control board 80) for outputting a presentation relating to the instruction game section;
The game control means
In the advantageous section, when the upper limit (1500 games) of the advantageous section is reached, the advantageous section ends.
In the advantageous section, when the start condition of the instruction game section is satisfied, the instruction game section is started,
In the command game section, when the extension condition of the command game section is satisfied, the command game section can be extended,
Send information (AT counter value, superimposition counter value, upper limit counter value, etc.) regarding the instruction game section to the effect control means,
The effect control means is characterized by displaying game information ("It will be ended in 10 more games, etc.") indicating that the instruction game section is not executed beyond the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section.

According to a second solution, in the first solution,
The effect control means, based on the information received from the game control means, when extending the instruction game section will exceed the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section or after the instruction game section reaches the continuation upper limit of the advantage section The game information is displayed when extension of the instructed game section is determined.

(C) Effects of the First Invention 4 According to the first invention, it is possible to prevent the player from being misunderstood when the instructed game section continues beyond the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section.

5. Initial invention 5
(A) Problem to be Solved by Invention 5 The present invention relates to a slot machine provided with an advantageous section capable of executing an instruction function operating game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch.
In the conventional slot machine, it is known to manage the AT with the main control board in addition to managing the AT with the sub control board (see, for example, JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section which is a game section capable of executing AT. Here, when the upper limit (for example, upper limit game frequency) is provided to the advantageous section, as a result of performing addition of the number of games during the advantageous section and AT, there is a possibility that the upper limit of the advantageous section is exceeded. Need to get rid of it.
The problem to be solved by the invention at first is to ensure that the instructed game section (such as AT) does not exceed the upper limit of the advantageous section.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of Initial Invention 5 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
In the first invention (third embodiment; FIGS. 44 to 46),
A game (a game when a small winning combination B is won) having an advantageous operation mode (a correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an indication function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Of the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function activation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, the game has an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, and an instruction function operating game is always executed or an instruction gaming section (AT) with a high execution frequency.
Game control means (main control board 50) for controlling the start and end of the advantageous section and the start and end of the instruction game section;
The game control means
After the start of the advantageous section, when the continuous upper limit (1500 games) of the advantageous section is reached (for example, when "Yes" in step S443 of FIG. 44), the advantageous section is ended,
In the advantageous section, when the start condition of the instruction game section is satisfied, the instruction game section is started,
In the instruction game section, it is possible to determine whether or not to extend the instruction game section,
When it is determined to extend the instruction game section, when the instruction game section has reached the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section before the determination of the extension (for example, when “Yes” in step S451 of FIG. 44) It is characterized by clearing the decision result concerning the extension.

(C) Effects of the First Invention 5 According to the first invention, even when it is determined to extend the instructed game section, when the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section is reached, the determination result of the extension is used. Since clearing is performed, it is possible to prevent the instructed game section from exceeding the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section.

6. Initial invention 6
(A) Problem to be Solved by Invention 6 The invention at the beginning relates to a slot machine provided with an advantageous section capable of executing an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch.
In the conventional slot machine, it is known to manage the AT with the main control board in addition to managing the AT with the sub control board (see, for example, JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section which is a game section capable of executing AT. Here, when the upper limit (for example, upper limit game frequency) is provided in the advantageous section, as a result of performing addition of the number of games during the advantageous section and the AT, the upper limit of the advantageous section may be exceeded.
The problem to be solved by the invention at first is to make it difficult for the indicated game section or the advantageous section to reach the upper limit of the advantageous section.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of Initial Invention 6 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The first invention (third embodiment; FIGS. 47 to 49) is
A game (a game when a small winning combination B is won) having an advantageous operation mode (a correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an indication function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Of the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function activation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, the game has an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, and an instruction function operating game is always executed or an instruction gaming section (AT) with a high execution frequency.
Game control means (main control board 50) for controlling the start and end of the advantageous section and the start and end of the instruction game section;
The game control means
After starting the advantageous section, when it reaches the continuation upper limit (1500 games) of the advantageous section, the advantageous section is ended,
In the advantageous section, when the start condition of the instruction game section is satisfied, the instruction game section is started,
In the instruction game section, it is possible to determine whether or not to extend the instruction game section,
It has an extension determination table (lottery table A or B) used when determining the degree of extension of the instruction game section,
The extension determination table is
at least,
A first extension determination table (in FIG. 47 to FIG. 49, a lottery table A);
A second extension determination table (lottery table B in FIGS. 47 to 49) having a smaller expected value of the degree of extension (the number of overlays) determined than the first extension determination table;
The first extension determination table is used to determine the degree of extension until the designated game section or the advantageous section reaches the predetermined threshold (the number of AT games is 1000), and the designated game section or the advantageous section is the predetermined threshold. When it reaches, the second extension determination table is used to determine the degree of extension.

(C) Effects of the First Invention 6 According to the first invention, when the instruction game section or the advantageous section reaches the predetermined threshold, the extension determination table is used to determine the extension degree with a small expectation value of the extension degree. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the instructed game section to reach the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section.

7. Initial invention 7
(A) Problems to be solved by the first invention 7 The same as the first invention 6.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the First Invention 7 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The first invention (third embodiment; FIGS. 50 to 52)
A game (a game when a small winning combination B is won) having an advantageous operation mode (a correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an indication function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Of the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function activation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, the game has an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, and an instruction function operating game is always executed or an instruction gaming section (AT) with a high execution frequency.
Game control means (main control board 50) for controlling the start and end of the advantageous section and the start and end of the instruction game section;
The game control means
It is equipped with the role lottery means (61) which performs the lottery of the role,
It is possible to determine whether or not to extend the instruction game section based on the winning combination in the combination drawing by the combination drawing means,
When the first combination (for example, the small combination E1) is won by the combination lottery by the combination lottery means, the degree of extension (the number of the tops) determined than when the second combination (for example, the small combination D) is elected The expected value of is large,
When the designated game section or the advantageous section has not reached the predetermined threshold (the number of AT games played 1000 games), when the first combination is won, extension of the specified game range based on the selection of the first combination Determine the degree (in FIG. 50 to FIG. 52, step S 541),
When the instruction game section or the advantageous section has not reached the predetermined threshold, when the second combination is won, the degree of extension of the instruction game range is determined based on the selection of the second combination,
When the instruction game section or the advantageous section has reached the predetermined threshold value, when the first combination is won, the degree of extension of the instruction game section is determined as in the case of the second combination (FIG. 50) -Figure 52, step S543)
It is characterized by

(C) Effects of the First Invention 7 According to the first invention, when the command game section or the advantageous section reaches the predetermined threshold, the command game section is extended so that the expected value of the degree of the extension to be determined becomes small. Since the degree is determined, it is possible to make it difficult for the instructed game section to reach the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section.

8. Initial invention 8
(A) Problem to be Solved by Invention 8 The present invention relates to a slot machine provided with an advantageous section capable of executing an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch.
In the conventional slot machine, it is known to manage the AT with the main control board in addition to managing the AT with the sub control board (see, for example, JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section, which is a game section capable of executing AT, and to provide an upper limit (for example, an upper limit game frequency) to the advantageous section.
Also, during AT, an external signal indicating AT is output, and during a special game, an external signal indicating special game is output. However, when the external signal of these external signals and the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached Because it is mixed, it is necessary to make the on / off timing of the external signal unnatural.
The problem to be solved by the invention at first is to prevent the on / off of the external signal indicating the instructed game section and the external signal indicating the special game from becoming unnatural when the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of Initial Invention 8 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The first solution (fourth embodiment; FIG. 57) is
A game (a game when a small winning combination B is won) having an advantageous operation mode (a correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an indication function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Of the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function activation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, the game has an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, and an instruction function operating game is always executed or an instruction gaming section (AT) with a high execution frequency.
Game control means (main control board 50) for controlling the start and end of the advantageous section and the start and end of the instruction game section;
The game control means
Part lottery means (61) which performs lottery of a role including a special role (BB) for shifting to a special game (BB game),
An external signal transmission means (70) and
Execute a special game based on having won the special part by the part lottery means,
The external signal transmission means
When the instruction game section is started, the first external signal (external signal 2) indicating the instruction game section is turned on, and when the instruction game section is ended, the first external signal is turned off,
When the special game is started, the second external signal (external signal 1) indicating the special game is turned on, and when the special game is ended, the second external signal is turned off,
When the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section is reached when the special game is not in progress during the instruction game section, the first external signal is turned off (example 1 in FIG. 57).
When the special role is won during the instruction game section and the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section is reached during the special game, the first external signal and the second external signal are turned off when the special game is ended (FIG. 57) Example 2)
It is characterized by

According to a second solution, in the first solution,
It has an advantageous section display (an advantageous section display LED 77) indicating that it is an advantageous section;
When the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section is reached, the display indicating the advantageous section by the advantageous section display device is ended even during the special game (example 2 in FIG. 57).
It is characterized by

(C) Effects of the First Invention 8 According to the first invention, even when the special game crosses the continuing upper limit of the advantageous section, the first external signal indicating the instructed game section can be turned off at a natural timing. .

9. Initial invention 9
(A) Problem to be Solved by Invention 9 The present invention relates to a slot machine provided with an advantageous section capable of executing an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch.
In the conventional slot machine, it is known to manage the AT with the main control board in addition to managing the AT with the sub control board (see, for example, JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section, which is a game section capable of executing AT, and to provide an upper limit (for example, an upper limit game frequency) to the advantageous section.
Also, although an external signal indicating AT is output during AT, when AT is executed until the upper limit of the advantageous interval is reached, the problem is how to control the external signal indicating AT It becomes.
The problem to be solved by the invention at first is to appropriately control the external signal indicating the instructed game section when the instructed game section is executed until the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of Initial Invention 9 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The first invention (the fourth embodiment; FIG. 58) is
A game (a game when a small winning combination B is won) having an advantageous operation mode (a correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an indication function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Of the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function activation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, the game has an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, and an instruction function operating game is always executed or an instruction gaming section (AT) with a high execution frequency.
Game control means (main control board 50) for controlling the start and end of the advantageous section and the start and end of the instruction game section;
The game control means includes an external signal transmission means (70).
The external signal transmission means
When the instruction game section is started, a predetermined external signal indicating the instruction game section is turned on, and when the instruction game section is ended, the predetermined external signal is turned off,
The predetermined external signal is turned off when reaching the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section during the instruction game section.

(C) Effects of the First Invention 9 According to the first invention, it is possible to match the time when the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section is reached and the timing at which the predetermined external signal indicating the instructed game section is turned off.

10. Initial invention 10
(A) Problem to be Solved by Invention 10 Initially, the invention relates to a slot machine provided with an advantageous section capable of executing an instruction function operating game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch.
In the conventional slot machine, it is known to manage the AT with the main control board in addition to managing the AT with the sub control board (see, for example, JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section, which is a game section capable of executing AT, and to provide an upper limit (for example, an upper limit game frequency) to the advantageous section.
In addition, although an external signal indicating AT is output during AT, the external signal, the start and end of the special game, and the reaching of the upper limit of the advantageous section are mixed, so It is necessary to make the on / off timing unnatural.
The problem to be solved by the invention at first is to prevent the unnaturalness of turning on / off of the external signal indicating the start and end of the special game, and the start and end of the special game section when the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of Initial Invention 10 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The first invention (the fourth embodiment; FIGS. 57 and 58)
A game (a game when a small winning combination B is won) having an advantageous operation mode (a correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an indication function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Of the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function activation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, the game has an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, and an instruction function operating game is always executed or an instruction gaming section (AT) with a high execution frequency.
Game control means (main control board 50) for controlling the start and end of the advantageous section and the start and end of the instruction game section;
The game control means
Part lottery means (61) which performs lottery of a role including a special role (BB) for shifting to a special game (BB game),
An external signal transmission means (70) and
Execute a special game based on having won the special part by the part lottery means,
The external signal transmission means
When the instruction game section is started, the predetermined external signal (external signal 2) indicating the instruction game section is turned on, and when the instruction game section is ended, the predetermined external signal is turned off (example 1 of FIG. 57) ,
When the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section is reached when the special game is not in progress during the instruction game section, the predetermined external signal is turned off (FIG. 58),
When the special role is won during the instruction game section and the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section is reached during the special game, the predetermined external signal is turned off when the special game is ended (example 2 of FIG. 57)
It is characterized by

(C) Effects of the First Invention 10 According to the first invention, the timing at which the special game ends when the reaching the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached and the timing at which the predetermined external signal indicating the instructed game section is turned off are matched. Can.

11. Original invention 11
(A) Problem to be Solved by Invention 11 Initially, the invention relates to a slot machine provided with an advantageous section capable of executing an instruction function operating game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch.
In the conventional slot machine, it is known to manage the AT with the main control board in addition to managing the AT with the sub control board (see, for example, JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section which is a game section capable of executing AT.
When such an advantageous section is provided, it becomes a problem at what timing to start the AT and at what timing to end the AT.
The problem originally intended to be solved by the invention is to enable a wide range of gameplay design by giving characteristics to the start and end timings of the instruction game section during the advantageous section.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of Initial Invention 11 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The first invention (the fifth embodiment; FIG. 60 (a)) is
A game (a game when a small winning combination B is won) having an advantageous operation mode (a correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an indication function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Of the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function activation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, the game has an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, and an instruction function operating game is always executed or an instruction gaming section (AT) with a high execution frequency.
Game control means for controlling the start and end of the advantageous section and the start and end of the command game section;
The game control means is provided with a role lottery means (61) for performing a lottery of roles.
The first lottery state (for example, RT5) and the second lottery state (for example, RT2) in which the winning probability of at least one replay player combination is different are provided as the lottery state (RT) in which the lottery of roles is performed by the role lottery means.
In the advantageous section and the first lottery state, the instruction game section can be executed,
In the instruction game section and the first lottery state, when transitioning to the second lottery state due to satisfying the predetermined condition (having digested 50 games), ending both the advantageous section and the instruction game section It features.

(C) Effects of the First Invention 11 According to the first invention, it is possible to start or end an advantageous section or an instruction game section triggered by the transition of the lottery state. This enables a wide range of gameplay designs.

12. Original invention 12
(A) Problems to be solved by the first invention 12 The same as the first invention 11.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of Initial Invention 12 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The first solving means (fifth embodiment; FIG. 61) is
A game (a game when a small winning combination B is won) having an advantageous operation mode (a correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an indication function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Of the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function activation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, the game has an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, and an instruction function operating game is always executed or an instruction gaming section (AT) with a high execution frequency.
Game control means (main control board 50) for controlling the start and end of the advantageous section and the start and end of the instruction game section;
The game control means includes at least a first control state (a sign, CZ, AT, etc.) and a second control state (normal) as the states controlled by the game control means.
It is possible to shift to the first control state (precursor) on condition that it is an advantageous section,
In the first control state (AT), the instruction game section is started,
When the transition condition to the second control state (normal) is satisfied in the advantageous section and the first control state (AT pullback period, CZ, CZ pullback period), the state shifts to the second control state and the advantageous section is ended. It is characterized by
According to a second solution, in the first solution,
In the first control state which is an instruction game section, when transition conditions to the second control state are satisfied, the second control state is transitioned, and both the advantageous section and the instruction game section are ended. .

(C) Effects of the First Invention 12 According to the first invention, it is possible to start or end the advantageous section or the instruction game section, triggered by the transition of the control state. This enables a wide range of gameplay designs.

13. Initial invention 13
(A) Problems to be solved by the first invention 13 The same as the first invention 11.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the First Invention 13 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The first solution (fifth embodiment; FIGS. 60 and 61)
A game (a game when a small winning combination B is won) having an advantageous operation mode (a correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an indication function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Of the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function activation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, the game has an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, and an instruction function operating game is always executed or an instruction gaming section (AT) with a high execution frequency.
Game control means (main control board 50) for controlling the start and end of the advantageous section and the start and end of the instruction game section;
The gaming state (RT (lottery state), AT, CZ, precursor, normal (control state)) controlled by the game control means includes at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state.
In the first gaming state (RT5 and AT), the advantageous section is executed and the instruction game section can be started,
When the instruction game section is started in the first gaming state and the predetermined number of games have been consumed, the game mode is shifted to the second game state (RT2 and normal), and the instruction game section is ended.

According to a second solution, in the first solution,
When the predetermined number of times of gaming in the first game state instruction game zone has been digested, the second game state is entered, and both the advantageous zone and the instruction game zone are ended.

(C) Effects of the First Invention 13 According to the first invention, it is possible to start or end the instructed game section, triggered by the transition of the gaming state. This enables a wide range of gameplay designs.

14. Original invention 14
(A) Problem to be Solved by Invention 14 The first invention relates to a slot machine provided with an advantageous section capable of executing an instruction function operating game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch.
In the conventional slot machine, it is known to manage the AT with the main control board in addition to managing the AT with the sub control board (see, for example, JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section, which is a game section capable of executing AT, and to provide an upper limit (for example, an upper limit game frequency) to the advantageous section.
However, the gaming nature of ending only when the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached is not sufficient to differentiate itself from other models.
The problem to be solved by the invention at first is to execute a game not limited to the upper limit of the advantageous section by making the advantageous section intermittently executable even if the advantageous section has an upper limit.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of Initial Invention 14 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The first solution means (sixth embodiment; FIG. 62) is
A game (a game when a small winning combination B is won) having an advantageous operation mode (a correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an indication function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Of the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function activation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, the game has an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, and an instruction function operating game is always executed or an instruction gaming section (AT) with a high execution frequency.
Game control means (main control board 50) for controlling the start and end of the advantageous section and the start and end of the instruction game section;
The game control means is provided with a role lottery means (61) for performing a lottery of roles.
As a lottery state in which the lottery of the role is performed by the role lottery means, a first lottery state (RT3), a second lottery state (RT6), and a third lottery state (for example, RT2) in which the winning probability of at least one replay player is different Equipped with
When a predetermined condition is satisfied before reaching the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section in the instruction game section in the first lottery state (when Replay 06 is displayed), the state shifts to the second lottery state, and the advantageous section and the instruction game section End both sides,
In the second lottery state, a normal section is started, and it is determined whether or not to shift to an advantageous section (a lottery of "1/32" is executed),
In the normal section of the second lottery state, when a specific condition for transitioning to the advantageous section is satisfied (when the lottery of “1/32” is won), the transition is made to the advantageous section and the transition to the advantageous section Enable to start the instruction game section based on
In the normal section of the third lottery state, when the specific condition is satisfied, the transition to the advantageous section is made, but the command game section is not started based on the transition to the advantageous section.

The second solution (sixth embodiment; FIG. 62) is
A game (a game when a small winning combination B is won) having an advantageous operation mode (a correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an indication function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Of the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function activation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, the game has an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, and an instruction function operating game is always executed or an instruction gaming section (AT) with a high execution frequency.
Game control means (main control board 50) for controlling the start and end of the advantageous section and the start and end of the instruction game section;
The game control means is provided with a role lottery means (61) for performing a lottery of roles.
As a lottery state in which a lottery of a role is performed by the role lottery means, a first lottery state (RT3), a second lottery state (RT6), and a third lottery state (non-RT) with different winning probabilities of at least one replay player Equipped with
When a predetermined condition is satisfied before reaching the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section in the instruction game section in the first lottery state (when Replay 06 is displayed), the state shifts to the second lottery state, and the advantageous section and the instruction game section End both sides,
In the second lottery state, a normal section is started, and it is determined whether or not to shift to an advantageous section (a lottery of "1/32" is executed),
In the second lottery state, when the end condition of the second lottery state is satisfied (when 50 games are digested), the third lottery state is entered,
There is a case of transitioning to the third lottery state without passing through the second lottery state,
In the normal section of the third lottery state that has shifted without passing through the second lottery state, it is determined whether or not to shift to the advantageous section
If it is decided to shift to the advantageous section in the second lottery state, then the instruction game section can be started,
When it is decided to shift to the advantageous section without passing through the second lottery state, the command game section is not started.

(C) Effects of the First Invention 14 According to the first invention, the command game section in the first lottery state is shifted to the second lottery state to end the advantageous section and the command game section, and thereafter, it is shifted to the advantageous section again. Since it is possible to start the instruction game section, it is possible to execute a game not bound by the upper limit of the advantageous section.
In addition, by adding a condition under which the instruction game section can be started (in the first solution means, the specific condition is satisfied in the second lottery state, and in the second solution means, the second lottery state is passed). It can be suppressed that the instruction game section becomes easy to be executed more than necessary.

15. Initial invention 15
(A) Problem to be Solved by Invention 15 Initially, the invention relates to a slot machine provided with an advantageous section capable of executing an instruction function operating game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch.
In the conventional slot machine, it is known to manage the AT with the main control board in addition to managing the AT with the sub control board (see, for example, JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section which is a game section capable of executing AT. It has also been proposed to indicate to the player that it is an advantageous section during the advantageous section. Here, it is conceivable to provide a case where the advantageous section is started based on the winning of the special part. In this case, it is desirable not to reduce the expectation of the player even during the special game.
The problem to be solved by the invention at first is to make it possible to keep giving a sense of expectation to the player even during the special game.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the First Invention 15 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The first solution (eighth embodiment; FIGS. 64 and 65)
A game (a game when a small winning combination B is won) having an advantageous operation mode (a correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an indication function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Of the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function activation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game can be executed,
Advantage section display means (advantage section display LED 77) for displaying that it is an advantageous section;
A unit (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13 or the like) for determining any one of a plurality of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6);
Part lottery means (61) which performs lottery of part,
A presentation control unit (sub control board 80) for controlling the output of the presentation;
The role lottery means performs a lottery of roles so as to have a case of winning a special role (1BBA) for shifting to a special game (1BBA game),
The winning probability of the special part is the same for all set values,
It is possible to start an advantageous section based on winning the special role,
Win special role, transition to special game based on the stop of the combination of symbols corresponding to the special role,
An advantageous section started on the basis of winning the special role ends when the special game ends (example 1 or example 2 in FIG. 64) and continues after the special game ends (FIG. 65) Example 3) and
The effect control means is capable of outputting a continuous effect for a plurality of games in connection with the continuation of the advantageous section during the special game.

According to a second solution, in the first solution,
The continuous effect is an effect indicating whether or not the advantageous section continues even after the end of the special game.

(C) Effects of the First Invention 15 According to the first invention, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation whether or not the advantageous section continues until the end of the special game.

16. Original invention 16
(A) Problem to be Solved by Invention 16 The first invention relates to a slot machine provided with an advantageous section capable of executing an instruction function operating game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch.
In the conventional slot machine, it is known to manage the AT with the main control board in addition to managing the AT with the sub control board (see, for example, JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section which is a game section capable of executing AT. It has also been proposed to indicate to the player that it is an advantageous section during the advantageous section. Here, it is conceivable to provide a case where the advantageous section is started based on the winning of the special part. In this case, it is desirable not to reduce the expectation of the player even after the end of the special game.
The problem to be solved by the invention at first is to make it possible to keep giving a sense of expectation to the player even after the end of the special game.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the First Invention 16 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The first solution (eighth embodiment; FIG. 66) is
A game (a game when a small winning combination B is won) having an advantageous operation mode (a correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an indication function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Of the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function activation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game can be executed,
Advantage section display means (advantage section display LED 77) for displaying that it is an advantageous section;
A unit (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13 or the like) for determining any one of a plurality of setting values;
Part lottery means (61) which performs lottery of part,
A presentation control unit (sub control board 80) for controlling the output of the presentation;
The role lottery means performs a lottery of roles so as to have a case of winning a special role (1BBA) for shifting to a special game (1BBA game),
The winning probability of the special part is the same for all set values,
It is possible to start an advantageous section based on winning the special role,
Win special role, transition to special game based on the stop of the combination of symbols corresponding to the special role,
The advantageous section started based on winning the special role is ended when the predetermined number of games (5 games) end after the end of the special game (example 4) and when continuing beyond the predetermined number of games (example) 5) and
The effect control means is capable of outputting a predetermined effect relating to continuation of the advantageous section in at least a part of the predetermined number of games after the end of the special game.

According to a second solution, in the first solution,
The predetermined effect is an effect that indicates whether or not the advantageous section continues even if the predetermined number of games is exceeded after the end of the special game.

(C) Effects of the First Invention 16 According to the first invention, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation whether the advantageous section continues even after the end of the special game.

17. Original invention 17
(A) Problem to be Solved by Invention 17 The first invention relates to a slot machine provided with an advantageous section capable of executing an instruction function operating game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch.
In the conventional slot machine, it is known to manage the AT with the main control board in addition to managing the AT with the sub control board (see, for example, JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section in which an instruction function operating game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch can be performed. Here, it is conceivable to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of the special part. In this case, the player's skill can not be exhibited only by starting the advantageous section uniformly based on the winning of the special part.
The problem to be solved by the invention is to make the profit on the advantageous section differ depending on the skill of the player when transitioning to the advantageous section based on the winning of the special character.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of Initial Invention 17 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The first invention (the ninth embodiment (FIG. 67)) is
A game (a game when a small winning combination B is won) having an advantageous operation mode (a correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an indication function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Of the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function activation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game can be executed,
A unit (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13 or the like) for determining any one of a plurality of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6);
Role lottery means (61) for performing a lottery of roles, and
The role lottery means performs a lottery of roles so as to have a case of being a specific winning (1BBA + small role E1),
The specific winning is a special winning including the special role (1BBA) carrying over the winning to the next game until the combination of the symbols is stopped, and the predetermined role (small playing E1) not to carry the win to the next game,
The winning probability of a specific winning is the same for all set values,
In the case where it is decided to shift to the advantageous section in the game ("N" game eyes) that became the specific winning, and the combination of the symbols corresponding to the special part is not stopped and the special part is carried over to the next game The game is characterized in that the advantageous section is started from a game ("N + 2" game eyes) in which the combination of symbols corresponding to the special part carrying over the winning has become stoppable.

(C) Effects of the First Invention 17 According to the first invention, according to the first invention, it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, and in the first game in which the combination of the symbols corresponding to the special character becomes stopable, the symbols corresponding to the special character It is possible to make a difference in the profit obtained in the advantageous section between the player who has stopped the combination and the player who can not stop the combination. Thereby, the profit obtained on the advantageous section can be made different depending on the skill of the player.

18. Original invention 18
(A) Problem to be Solved by Invention 18 Initially, the invention relates to a slot machine provided with an advantageous section capable of executing an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch.
In the conventional slot machine, it is known to manage the AT with the main control board in addition to managing the AT with the sub control board (see, for example, JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section which is a game section capable of executing AT. Here, although it is possible to execute AT addition based on the winning of the special part having no setting difference, it is conceivable that AT addition can not be performed based on the winning of the special part having the setting difference. ing.
However, in this case, there is a problem that it is not possible to give the player the expectation of the addition of the AT when the special part with the setting difference is won during the AT.
The problem to be solved by the invention at first is to make it possible to add an instruction game section (AT) even when a special combination with a set difference is won.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the First Invention 18 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The first invention (the tenth embodiment (FIG. 22)) is
A game (a game when a small winning combination B is won) having an advantageous operation mode (a correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an indication function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Of the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function activation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, a command game section (AT) which always executes an instruction function operation game or increases the execution frequency in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch.
A unit (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13 or the like) for determining any one of a plurality of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6);
Role lottery means (61) for performing a lottery of roles, and
The role lottery means performs a lottery of roles so as to have a winning case of a special role (for example, 1BBA) for shifting to a special game (for example, 1BBA game),
Win special role, transition to special game based on the stop of the combination of symbols corresponding to the special role,
The first lottery state (RT2) and the second lottery state (RT3) having different winning probabilities of at least one replay player as lottery states in which the lottery of the roles is performed by the role lottery means,
After the end of the special game, in order to shift to the second lottery state, it is necessary to go through the first lottery state,
When transitioning to the special game based on winning the special part during the instruction game section, after the end of the special game, the instruction game section can be extended based on the transition from the first lottery state to the second lottery state age,
When transitioning from the first lottery state to the second lottery state without transitioning to the special game during the instruction game section, the instruction game section is not extended based on that.

(C) Effects of the First Invention 18 According to the first invention, the instruction game section can be extended when transitioning from the first lottery state to the second lottery state on condition that the special game is performed. . As a result, regardless of whether or not the winning special part has a setting difference, it is possible to extend the instructed game section after the end of the special game. Furthermore, it is possible to set the instruction game section not to be extended only by shifting from the first lottery state to the second lottery state without going through the special game.

19. First invention 19
(A) Problem to be Solved by Invention 19 Initially, the invention relates to a slot machine provided with an advantageous section capable of executing an instruction function operating game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch.
In the conventional slot machine, it is known to manage the AT with the main control board in addition to managing the AT with the sub control board (see, for example, JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section in which an instruction function operating game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch can be performed. Here, it is desired to provide new playability using the instruction function operation game.
The problem that the invention is originally intended to solve is to provide new playability using an instruction function operation game.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the First Invention 19 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The first solution (the eleventh embodiment; FIG. 68) is
A game (a game when a small winning combination B is won) having an advantageous operation mode (a correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an indication function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Of the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function activation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, a command game section (AT) which always executes an instruction function operation game or increases the execution frequency in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch.
A unit (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13 or the like) for determining any one of a plurality of setting values;
Part lottery means (61) which performs lottery of part,
A presentation control unit (sub control board 80) for controlling the output of the presentation;
The role lottery means performs a lottery of roles so as to have a case of winning a predetermined role (small role E1),
The winning probability of the predetermined part is the same for all set values,
When a predetermined combination is won in the combination drawing by the combination drawing means, the next game is transferred to the advantageous section,
The advantageous section to shift based on the winning of the predetermined part is
A first advantageous section (Example 1 in FIG. 68) in which at least one command function operation game is executed but the command game section is not executed;
Having a second advantageous section (example 2 in FIG. 68) for executing the instruction game section;
The effect control means is characterized in that continuous effect is output in an advantageous section shifted based on the winning of a predetermined combination.

According to a second solution, in the first solution,
The effect control means is characterized in that the continuous effect is started after one instruction function operation game is executed.
According to a third solution, in the first or second solution,
The continuous rendition is a rendition that indicates whether it is a first advantageous section or a second advantageous section.

(C) Effects of the First Invention 19 According to the first invention, even when shifting to the advantageous section, the case where the instruction game section is executed and the case where the instruction function operation game is executed at least once but the instruction game section is not executed As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation even after shifting to the advantageous section. As a result, it is possible to keep the game characteristic of transitioning to / without transitioning to the advantageous section.

20. Initial invention 20
(A) Problem to be Solved by Invention 20 The present invention relates to a slot machine provided with an advantageous section capable of executing an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch.
In the conventional slot machine, it is known to manage the AT with the main control board in addition to managing the AT with the sub control board (see, for example, JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been considered to provide an advantageous section in which an instruction function operating game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch can be performed. Here, it is conceivable to set an upper limit to the advantageous section. On the other hand, it is also conceivable that the condition device (role) having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is not won even after shifting to the advantageous section.
The problem to be solved by the invention at first is to balance the termination condition (including the upper limit) of the advantageous section with the execution of the instruction function activation game.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the First Invention 20 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The first invention (the eleventh embodiment; FIG. 69) is
A game (a game when a small winning combination B is won) having an advantageous operation mode (a correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an indication function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Of the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function activation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game can be executed,
A unit (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13 or the like) for determining any one of a plurality of setting values;
Role lottery means (61) for performing a lottery of roles, and
The role lottery means performs a lottery of roles so as to have a case of winning a predetermined role (small role E1),
The winning probability of the predetermined part is the same for all set values,
When the player wins the predetermined combination in the combination drawing by the combination drawing means, the game may shift to the advantageous section from the next game,
When the predetermined end condition of the advantageous section is reached in the advantageous section, the advantageous section is ended,
When the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached in the advantageous section, the advantageous section is ended,
In the advantageous section, when there is no game having the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch until reaching the predetermined end condition, the advantageous section is ended until at least one indication function operation game is executed. If you have not played a game with the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch before reaching the upper limit of the advantageous section, although it is not allowed (Example 3 in FIG. 69), it is advantageous without executing the instruction function activation game End the section (Example 4 in FIG. 69)
It is characterized by

(C) Effects of the First Invention 20 According to the first invention, in the advantageous section, “perform at least one command function operation game” and “end the advantageous section when the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached”. You can balance it with things.

21. Initial invention 21
(A) Problem to be Solved by Invention 21 Initially, the invention relates to a slot machine provided with an advantageous section capable of executing an instruction function operating game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch.
In the conventional slot machine, it is known to manage the AT with the main control board in addition to managing the AT with the sub control board (see, for example, JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section in which an instruction function operating game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch can be performed. Here, it is conceivable to set an upper limit to the advantageous section. Furthermore, it is possible to win a special part during the advantageous section and shift to a special game. In this case, when the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached during the execution of the special game, the advantageous section ends at that point, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.
The problem to be solved by the invention at first is to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached during the execution of the special game.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the First Invention 21 (Here, the corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The first invention (12th embodiment; FIG. 70) is
A game (a game when a small winning combination B is won) having an advantageous operation mode (a correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an indication function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Of the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function activation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game can be executed,
A unit (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13 or the like) for determining any one of a plurality of setting values;
Part lottery means (61) which performs lottery of part,
A presentation control unit (sub control board 80) for controlling the output of the presentation;
The role lottery means performs a lottery of roles so as to have a winning case of a special role (for example, 1BBA) for shifting to a special game (for example, 1BBA game),
The effect control means is
When a predetermined condition is satisfied in the advantageous section (for example, when approaching the upper limit of the advantageous section), a specific effect (ending effect) is started,
When the upper limit (1500 games) of the advantageous section is reached during the output of the specific effect, the advantageous section is ended and the specific effect is ended,
Even when the special role is won during the output of the specific effect, and it is shifted to the special game, the specific effect is continued,
When the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached during the special game and the output of the specific effect, the advantageous section is ended, but the specific effect is continued until the special game is ended.

(C) Effects of the First Invention 21 According to the first invention, when the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached during the special game, the advantageous section is ended, but the signal is output during the advantageous section until the special game is ended. Continue specific effects. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the specific effect in the advantageous section from ending suddenly in the middle of the special game, and to make the player feel uncomfortable.

22. Original invention 22
(A) Problem to be Solved by the First Invention 22 The first invention relates to a slot machine provided with a plurality of lottery states in which the winning probability of at least one replay player is different.
In the conventional slot machine, it is known to manage the AT with the main control board in addition to managing the AT with the sub control board (see, for example, JP-A-2014-161344).
Further, for example, a slot machine is known which shifts RT (lottery state) in order to execute an AT.
In the prior art, it is known that RT transition is performed, for example, by winning a specific condition device and stopping a specific symbol combination. However, there is a problem that RT's ease of transition may differ depending on the set value.
The problem to be solved by the invention at the outset is to make RT's ease of transition insensitive to the set value.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the First Invention 22 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The first solving means (13th embodiment; FIG. 71) is
A unit (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13 or the like) for determining any one of a plurality of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6);
Role lottery means (61) for performing a lottery of roles, and
As the lottery state in which the lottery of the role is performed by the role lottery means, the first lottery state (RT2), the second lottery state (RT3), and the third lottery state (RT4) in which the winning probability of at least one replay player is different Equipped
In the first lottery state, the role lottery means performs a lottery of roles so as to have a case where a specific combination (Replay B group) is won.
When the specific winning combination is won in the first lottery state and the predetermined symbol combination is stopped, the second lottery state is entered,
The winning probability of the specific part in the first lottery state is the same for all set values,
The role lottery means performs a lottery of roles so as to have a winning case of a special role (for example, 1 BBB) for shifting to a special game (for example, 1 BBB game),
When the special winning combination is won in any of the drawing states, and the combination of symbols corresponding to the special holdings is not stopped, the third drawing state is entered,
The winning probability of the special part is characterized by being different according to the set value.

According to a second solution, in the first solution,
A game (a game when a small winning combination B is won) having an advantageous operation mode (a correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an indication function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Of the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function activation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, a command having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch always performs an instruction function operation game or an instruction game section (AT) in which the execution frequency is increased;
The instruction game section can be executed at least in the second lottery state,
When you win the special part during the instruction game section, it is necessary to go through the first lottery state to shift to the second lottery state after the end of the special game,
After the end of the special game, the command game section can be extended based on the transition from the first lottery state to the second lottery state.

According to a third solution, in the first or second solution,
The instruction game section is executable in the third lottery state,
When the instruction game section and the third lottery state are established, the instruction game section is not extended.

(C) Effects of the First Invention 22 According to the first invention, the winning probability of the specific combination that triggers the transition from the first lottery state to the second lottery state is the same for all set values, so from the first lottery state The ease of transition to the second lottery state can be prevented from being affected by the set value.

23. Initial invention 23
(A) Problems to be solved by the first invention 23 The same as the first invention 22.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of Initial Invention 23 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The first invention (13th embodiment; FIG. 71) is
A game (a game when a small winning combination B is won) having an advantageous operation mode (a correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an indication function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Of the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function activation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, a command game section (AT) which always executes an instruction function operation game or increases the execution frequency in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch.
A unit (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13 or the like) for determining any one of a plurality of setting values;
Role lottery means (61) for performing a lottery of roles, and
The first lottery state (RT2) and the second lottery state (RT3) having different winning probabilities of at least one replay player as lottery states in which the lottery of the roles is performed by the role lottery means,
The instruction game section can be executed at least in the second lottery state,
The role lottery means performs a lottery of roles so as to have a case where a specific replay player (Replay C group) is elected in the second lottery state,
In the second lottery state, when a specific replay player combination is won and the combination of predetermined symbols is stopped, the first lottery state is entered,
The winning probability of a specific replay player in the second lottery state is the same for all set values,
In the second lottery state, the role lottery means performs a lottery so as to have a case where a predetermined replay player combination (Replay A) is won.
Even if the player wins the predetermined replay player in the second lottery state and stops the combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined replay player, it does not shift to the first lottery state.
The winning probability of the predetermined re-play combination in the second lottery state is characterized by being different according to the set value.

(C) Effects of the First Invention 23 According to the first invention, since the winning probability of a specific replay player who triggers the transition of the lottery state is the same for all set values, the ease of transition of the lottery state is the set value It is possible not to be affected by the Furthermore, in the second lottery state, the winning probability of a predetermined replay player who does not become a transition trigger of the lottery state is made different according to the set value, so for example, the higher the setting, the higher the payout rate in the instruction game section can do.

24. Original invention 24
(A) Problem to be solved by the first invention 24 The same as the first invention 22.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the First Invention 24 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The first solving means (13th embodiment; FIG. 71) is
Part lottery means (61) which performs lottery of part,
Means for determining one of the plurality of setting values (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13 etc.),
The first lottery state (RT1) and the second lottery state (RT2) having different winning probabilities of at least one replay player are provided as lottery states in which the lottery of the roles is performed by the role lottery means,
In the first lottery state, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the second lottery state is entered,
In the first lottery state, the combination lottery means performs a combination lottery so that the first combination (small combination B group) having the possibility of satisfying the predetermined condition is won.
The winning probability of the first combination in the first lottery state is the same for all set values,
In the first lottery state, the combination lottery means performs a combination lottery so as to have a case of winning of a second combination (small combination D) having no possibility of satisfying the predetermined condition,
The winning probability of the second part in the first lottery state differs depending on the set value,
In the first lottery state, the combination lottery means performs a combination lottery so as to have a case where a third combination (small combination E1) having no possibility of satisfying the predetermined condition is won,
The winning probability of the third part in the first lottery state is the same for all set values,
The maximum payout when the combination of symbols corresponding to the first combination is stopped D1 (9 sheets), the maximum payout when the combination of symbols corresponding to the second combination is stopped D2 (15 sheets), the third combination When the maximum payout when the combination of the corresponding symbols is stopped is D3 (two pieces),
D2>D1> D3
Meet the requirements.

According to a second solution, in the first solution,
A game (a game when a small winning combination B is won) having an advantageous operation mode (a correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an indication function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Of the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function activation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section capable of executing an instruction function operation game, and
When winning the third part in the lottery of the part by the part lottery means during the normal section, it is characterized in that there is a possibility of transition to the advantageous section.

(C) Effects of the First Invention 24 According to the first invention, since the winning probability of the first combination having the possibility of shifting to the second lottery state in the first lottery state is made equal to all set values, the first lottery state It is possible to make it easy to shift from the second to the second lottery state not to be affected by the set value.
Furthermore, since the winning probability of the second combination with the largest payout is made to differ according to the set value, the payout rate can be largely changed according to the set value.

25. Original invention 25
(A) Problem to be Solved by Invention 25 Initially, the invention relates to a slot machine provided with an advantageous section capable of executing an instruction function operating game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch.
In the conventional slot machine, it is known to manage the AT with the main control board in addition to managing the AT with the sub control board (see, for example, JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section in which an instruction function operating game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch can be performed. Here, after starting the advantageous section, it is conceivable to change the ending condition of the advantageous section. In addition, in the advantageous section, it is considered that it is necessary to execute at least one pointing function activation game.
The problem to be solved by the invention at first is to make it possible to end the advantageous section at the intended timing while making it possible to change the ending condition of the advantageous section.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of Initial Invention 25 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The first invention (14th embodiment; FIG. 72) is
A game (a game when a small winning combination B is won) having an advantageous operation mode (a correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an indication function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Of the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function activation game is not executed,
And an advantageous section in which it is necessary to execute at least one instruction function activation game among the game sections.
When the transition conditions to the advantageous section are satisfied in the normal section, the process shifts to the advantageous section,
When a predetermined condition (extension condition of the advantageous section) is satisfied during the advantageous section, change the ending condition (30 games) of the advantageous section up to that time (add 50 games),
In the advantageous section, after executing the at least one command function operation game, when changing the termination condition of the advantageous section based on satisfying the predetermined condition, the command function operation game is changed after the termination condition is changed 1 It is possible to end the advantageous section without executing it repeatedly (example 1 in FIG. 72),
After changing to the advantageous section, if you change the ending condition of the advantageous section based on that the predetermined condition is satisfied before executing the first indication function operation game, at least one time after changing the ending condition If the instruction function operation game is not executed, the advantageous section can not be ended even if the ending condition is satisfied (example 2 in FIG. 72).
It is characterized by

(C) Effects of the First Invention 25 According to the first invention, since it is possible to change the ending condition of the advantageous section up to that point after starting the advantageous section, the advantageous section does not fix the ending condition of the advantageous section. Can not be monotonous. In addition, while making it possible to change the ending condition of the advantageous section, at the timing that the advantageous section intended because the instruction function activation game has not been executed even once even though the ending condition of the advantageous section is satisfied. It can suppress that it can not finish.

26. Original invention 26
(A) Problem to be Solved by the First Invention 26 The first invention relates to a slot machine provided with an advantageous section capable of executing an instruction function operating game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch.
In the conventional slot machine, it is known to manage the AT with the main control board in addition to managing the AT with the sub control board (see, for example, JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section in which an instruction function operating game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch can be performed. Here, it is conceivable to execute freezing at the end of the advantageous section. However, if the freeze is uniformly executed even when the advantageous section ends without giving a sufficient profit to the player, the player may be uncomfortable.
The problem to be solved by the present invention is to properly execute freezing at the end of the advantageous section.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of Initial Invention 26 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The first solving means (fifteenth embodiment; FIG. 73) is
A game (a game when a small winning combination B is won) having an advantageous operation mode (a correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an indication function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Of the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function activation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section capable of executing an instruction function operation game, and
When the transition conditions to the advantageous section are satisfied in the normal section, the process shifts to the advantageous section,
At least two types of first end conditions and second end conditions as end conditions of the advantageous section,
The advantageous section of the first ending condition has a larger expected value of the profit obtained during the advantageous section than the advantageous section of the second ending condition,
It has freeze control means to control freeze which temporarily stops the progress of the game,
The freeze control means does not execute freezing when ending the advantageous section under the second termination condition (termination condition of CZ), and freezes when terminating the advantageous section under the first termination condition (termination condition of AT). It is characterized by performing.

According to a second solution, in the first solution,
During the freezing, it is characterized in that a display is made on the profit obtained during the advantageous section.

(C) Effects of the First Invention 26 According to the first invention, when freeze is performed according to the expected value of the profit obtained during the advantageous section (when the expected value of the profit obtained during the advantageous section is large), By setting the case where freezing is not performed (when the expected value of the profit obtained during the advantageous interval is small), the freezing can be appropriately performed at the end of the advantageous interval.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 base part 10 slot machine 11 power switch 12 setting key switch 13 setting switch 14 reset switch 15 door switch 16 board case 16a caulking part 17 display window 21 presentation lamp 22 speaker 23 image display device 24 cross key 25 menu button 31 reel 32 motor 33 Reel Sensor 35 Hopper 36 Hopper Motor 37 Payout Sensor 40a 1 Bed Switch 40b 3 Bed Switch 41 Start Switch 42 Stop Switch 43 Medal Entry Port 43a Passage Sensor 44 Entry Sensor 45 Blocker 46 Settlement Switch 50 (50A, 50B) Main Control Board ( Main control means)
51 input port 52 output port 53 RWM
54 ROM
55 Main CPU
61 winning combination lottery means 62 winning flag control means 63 push order instruction number selection means 64 effect group number selection means 65 reel control means 66 prize determination means 67 payout means 68 RT control means 69 advantage zone control means 69a advantage zone counter 69b upper limit counter 70 External signal transmission means 71 Control command transmission means 72 Management information control means 73 Setting value display LED
74 Management information display LED
75 Display board 76 Storage number display LED
77 advantage zone indicator LED
78 Acquisition number display LED
80 Sub control board (sub control means)
81 Input port 82 Output port 83 RWM
84 ROM
85 sub CPU
91 Production output control means 100 External concentrated terminal board 200 Hall computer

Claims (1)

A game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch;
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an indication function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Of the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function activation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, the game has an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, and the instruction function operating game is always executed or the instruction game section in which the execution frequency is increased.
Game control means for controlling the start and end of the advantageous section and the start and end of the command game section;
The game control means comprises a role lottery means for performing a lottery of roles.
The first lottery state and the second lottery state in which the winning probability of at least one replay player combination is different are provided as the lottery state in which the lottery of the roles is performed by the role lottery means,
In the advantageous section and the first lottery state, the instruction game section can be executed,
A slot machine characterized by ending both the advantageous section and the instruction game section when transitioning to the second lottery state by satisfying predetermined conditions in the instruction game section and the first lottery state.

Images